Home

Here

Contents

1. TRACE menu AUTO SELECT SELECT gt MIN HOLD DETECTOR S IRACE AUTOPEAK gt 1 2 gt 1 E 3 T1 T3 gt T1 PEAK MAX HOLD DETECTOR IN PEAK AVERAGE DETECTOR TRACE SAMPLE POSITION VIEW DETECTOR RMS mE DETECTOR AVERAGE SWEEP ASCII FILE COUNT EXPORT DE n DETECTOR DECIM SEP TRACE COPY MATH E TRACE MATH OFF 1093 4820 12 4 41 E 3 Traces Analyzer FSP The TRACE key opens a menu offering the setting options for the selected trace In this menu the mode of representing the measured data in the frequency or time domain in the 501 pixels of the display is determined Upon start of the measurement each trace can be displayed either completely new or based on the previous results In this menu the mode of representing the measured data in the frequency or time domain in the 501 pixels of the display is determined Upon start of the measurement each trace can be displayed either completely new or based on the previous results Traces can be displayed blanked and copied Traces can also be corrected with the aid of mathematical functions The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by FSP The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mod
2. 2 53 Measurement Example 5 Measuring adjacent channel power of a W CDMA uplink signal seen 2 55 1093 4820 12 l 2 1 E 2 Contents Getting Started FSP Amplitude distribution 2 58 Measurement Example Measuring the APD and CCDF of white noise generated by the FSP es ied ee iiti dienen tatus 2 58 Time Domain Measurements 2 61 dy ahead e eee a aote ee vee LE en dde pae gu 2 61 Measurement Example Measuring the power of a GSM burst during the switch on phase 2 2 61 Power Ramping Measurement for Burst 2 63 Measurement Example Measurements on GSM burst edges using a high time resolution 2 63 Measuring the S N Ratio of Burst 2 65 Measurement Example S N ratio of a GSM signal 2 65 1093 4820 11 2 2 1 FSP Level and Frequency Measurements 2 Getting Started Chapter 2 explains how to operate the FSP using typical measurements as examples Chapter 3 describes the basic operating steps such as selecting the menus and setting parameters and explains the screen structure and displayed function indicators Chapter 4 describes all the menus and FSP functions All of the following examples are based on the standard setting
3. M 4 61 frequency ii inue aes 4 61 level to 4 75 line tracking generator 4 193 4 208 position for normalization 4 208 Reference level ius eter ee rer 4 13 channel 4 93 coupling of diagrams 4 133 DIM 4 16 DOSIIOFI eee 4 16 to marker level 4 75 Reference point 4 61 frequency phase 4 69 level somam oe pat En hess 22222 4 61 iS 4 61 level phase 4 68 dee o 4 68 M ce de 4 62 Reference value channel DOWAer eie tnra einn in 4 92 time domain 22 22000 4 86 Reflection 4 196 4 211 Remote control rry pM M 5 1 IEC IEEE bus 154 HS 232 C eR RUE 5 5 SWIICh OVO lies ces itio WERE tence hata cep ED 5 3 Remote Control 5 E ie o moo Met Net Nd 4 241 Rename directory tico neppure en 4 171 G 4 171 Reset Ss ie e ieu taal 4 2 status reporting
4. eng o uro gine 3 10 4 158 acknowledgement sss 3 7 MHz dBm key 23 11 MP trace info 3 5 e enn 4 45 Min peak detector sees 4 52 MINH trace info esses 3 5 Minimum search tree iere nee tpe 4 81 Mobile radio standard sss 4 91 Mode analyze side M 4 5 Modulation external tracking generator 229 4 199 Modulation 4 114 Monitor CONDECION a RD Oe 1 22 Et 8 10 votre i 1 21 CONNCCION MED 8 12 Mouse CONNGGCIOR ied rc er rre 8 2 MER RS 3 5 N NetWOIK rece crier eripi rre Eee OE ere 4 187 Noise source external incre etta 4 138 Noise 9 4 65 8 10 Normalization 4 192 4 207 eir terrere rro OR 1 19 NTRansition register 5 19 Numerical values 5 13 Occupied 4 103 Offset MOQUONCY 4 9 10 4 E 3 FSP frequency ext 4 213 gate 4 36 level tracking generator 4 189 cat c ni
5. SEARCH EXT RIGHT FSP E 3 FSP Menu Overview MKR FCTN Key MKR CTN gt 1093 4820 12 NOISE MEAS PHASI NOISI 719 DB DOWN LIST MARKER DEMOD 8 MRK gt TRACI SEARCH MKR DEMOD ON SORT MODI lt z pi B EXCURSION KR STOP TIM E LEFT LIMIT CONT DEMOD RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD EAK LIST OFF 3 29 gt PH NOIS E EF POI LEVEL EF POI LVL OFFSET EF POIN trj REQUENCY SEARCH gt E 3 Menu Overview MEAS Key PERCENT MARKER RES BW NO OF SAMPLES SCALING ADJUST SETTINGS CONT MEAS SINGLE MEAS f 1093 4820 12 FSP 3 30 TIME DOM POWER SET POWER ON REFERENCE CHAN PWR cP POWER ON NADC PEAK IBS TETRA 1 BRS RMS STAND
6. Asi mu a ur 3 29 iiie en edet ime 3 30 3 31 MEAS KEV f LS tt 3 32 TRIG KOY ce LL ELM et LU 3 33 TRAGE tis ons 3 34 st An 3 35 3 36 FILE KOV cz eo nue Ud uu es 3 37 eM Ci LEE 3 38 SETUP KEY ED AL iet er 3 39 GIG ORY ROY 3 40 Hotkey Menu iu 3 41 EOGAL 3 41 Menu Overview Network 3 42 Menu Overview Option Ext Generator 3 43 1093 4820 12 I 3 1 E 1 FSP The Screen 3 Manual Operation Chapter 3 provides an overview of the operating concept and the basic steps of manual operation of the FSP This includes a description of the screen of the control of menus and of the setting of parameters An overview of the menus will be listed at the end of this chapter The functions of the menus are described in dtail in Chapter 4 Chapter 2 contains a short introduction on step by step simple measurements The remote control
7. End connection to instrument RSDLLibonl ud 0 amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl else Error Instrument not found 1093 4820 12 4 256 E 3 FSP Index 10 Index Note All softkeys are listed alphabetically under keyword Softkey with their names The page numbers 4 xxx refer to the detailed description of the softkeys in chapter 4 Generally the number of the page in chapter 6 containing the equivalent remote control command is given in addition A list of softkeys and equivalent remote control commands or command sequences is given in chapter 6 section Table of Softkeys with IEC IEEE Bus Command Assignment Chapter 6 also contains an alphabetical list of all remote control commands 3 5 APD UNCON 4 108 enhancement 3 6 4 44 Bll ey ol 5 14 4 15 Autopeak 4 51 0 AUX CONTROL interface d Ia 8 13 Ofo D Ko Dott DES Lu cM ool 3 11 AUX CONTROL 8 13 AV trace info iiec ARES 3 5 Average detector 4 50 4 53 Pico 4 43 4 86 1 continuous 4 43 ioc 4 45 1 2 trace info M MH 4 54
8. 4 0 0 1 4 190 Calibration of Transmission Measurement ssesee enne 4 190 ERR 4 192 gt 22 Per een 4 196 Calibration of Reflection 4 196 Calibration mechanism 4 197 Frequency Converting 4 198 External Modulation of the Tracking Generator sse 4 199 Option External Generator Control 10 4 203 External Generator 4 204 Transmission 4 0 4 00 4 205 Calibration of Transmission Measurement sesee 4 205 Norrntalizatlor i aite Ade tee te e tette e reete 4 207 Reflection M asureimiefnt cote conet iex enc ee tee eerte ree Logo eene eed 4 211 Calibration of Reflection nnne 4 211 Calibration 4
9. 4 20 6 206 RESTORE FIRMWARE 4 162 ATTEN AUTO sss 4 15 6 152 RF ATTEN MANUAL 4 15 4 17 6 152 RF INPUT 50 2 75 4 16 6 154 tnnt 4 14 HF POWER inte 4 38 6 291 6 293 RIGHT LIMIT 4 71 4 77 6 46 6 47 RMS ince entendi 4 84 6 75 6 220 RMSESPI 6 220 R N SCAN iiie tee rite 6 151 SATURATION 4 186 4 180 6 119 6 145 SAVE coi unice em E e 4 166 6 165 SAVE LIMIT 4 127 SAVE 4 145 4 109 6 90 5 6 241 6 242 SCRIYPE 5 eene tenet teens 6 213 SCRAMBLING CODE 6 213 SCREEN 85 4 178 SCREEN 4 134 6 120 6 121 SEARCH LIMIT 4 77 6 46 SEARCH LIMITS 4 77 6 46 SEARCH NEXT LEFT 4 76 6 13 6 14 6 52 SEARCH NEXT RIGHT 4 76 6 13 6 14 6 50 6 52 SELECT GENERATOR 4 214 6 264 6 265 6 266 SELECT ie 4 168 6 166 6 167 SELECT LIMIT LINE 4 120 6 20 6 21 6 40 6 43 SELECT MARKER 4 65 4 74 4 117 6 45 SELECT 4 135 4 179 SELECT 4 9 4 42 4 98 6 71 6 239 SEEFETEST i eana iea ai i 4 161 6 7 SELFTEST 4 161 6 116 SERVICE eie 4 159 6
10. 4 43 1 8 trace 8889 1 4 54 SWeep COUnE x ait eir imt be aded 4 43 AVG trace 3 5 2 2044 MHz Qut i etae 8 12 B BAGK KOV betont 3 11 Band filter digital sss 4 24 7 B NODASS m 4 24 Bandwidth 75 Q enhancement 3 6 OCCUDIC ib c E ERE 4 103 resolution video Tale e irri e Re EE 4 147 8 Befehl 6 329 6 100 Zuordnung Softkey 6 344 65 2 n9 514 dfc nie Boolean parameter 77543 Brightness 4 136 Brighiness SCIe8r esce t errore da 4 179 A Abort cM E a 4 175 erede XE Calibration SUD CONG CUO o sitit ierit tumidus functioning et 4 197 4 212 ACP measurement 4 88 reflection measurement 4 211 Adaressed 8 5 relex on moss rofmeti s esses T 4 196 B transmission measurement 4 190 4 205 UU E i Calibration 4 56 AF demodulation 4 72 CANCEL key 3 11 OUTPUT tl 82 CODES J X B e HQ 4 108 AM demodulation sse 4 73 CCIR 473 4 4 39 AM
11. 4 72 SRE service request enable register 5 21 SRQ service 2 5 21 5 31 Standard deviation essen 4 85 Standard mobile radio see 4 91 Start frequency iin tines acest eis 4 8 Statistics is Status byte STB Status information esses 3 4 UNCAL 52 neis Wr asian eae Ges 3 4 Status Questionable esses 5 30 Status register CONDITION 5 19 5 19 ESE isa foe aon ue ese iene 5 22 5 22 EVEN 5 19 NTRansition 5 19 OVGIVIOW Seed 5 20 5 22 PT Ransition 5 19 SAE 5 21 STATus QUEStionable TRANSducer 5 30 STATusVOPERation 22 2 222200000000000 0000 5 23 STATus QUEStionable inserere re 5 25 FREQUENCY ooer eerta pud 5 26 ise nre 5 27 2 oerte exer 5 28 POWER rice pe b 5 29 STATus QUEStionable SYNG
12. 4 245 Programming via the RSIB Interface sse 4 251 Visual e 4 251 Visual Basic for Applications Winword and 4 254 GRO pk PO sone dede eh teu hel ORA huy se US ead Seanad e ENERMAX Rao ERR SEEN SEVA eR RE 4 255 1093 4820 12 4 3 E 3 FSP Instrument Functions 4 Instrument Functions All functions of the spectrum analyzer and their application are explained in detail in this chapter The sequence of the described menu groups depends on the procedure selected for the configuration and start of a measurement 1 Resetting the instrument PRESET key 2 Setting the mode hotkey bar and LOCAL key 3 Setting the measurement parameters keys FREQ SPAN AMPT BW SWEEP TRIG TRACE CAL 4 Selecting and configuring the measurement function keys gt MEAS LINES The instrument functions for general settings printout and data management are described at the end of this chapter keys DISP SETUP FILE and HCOPY The different softkeys of a menu are described from top to bottom and from the left to the right side menu The submenus are marked by an indentation or displayed in a separate section The whole path key softkey is indicated in the line above the menu display An overview of the menus is given in chapter 3 which also contains the
13. sss 4 39 TV TRIGGER 4 39 6 245 UNIT ccce USE SCAN TABLEESPI VBW EIN LOG 4 27 6 209 VERT SYNG sitim deni TS 4 39 6 295 VERT SYNC EVEN FIELD 4 39 6 295 VERT SYNC ODD 4 39 6 295 VIDEQ 4 4 31 6 291 6 293 VIDEO BW 4 21 6 208 VIDEO BW MANUAL 4 20 6 208 VIDEO POL POS NEG 4 40 6 295 VIEW 4 44 6 124 VIEW TRANSDUCER 4 141 VOL 4 14 6 95 6 297 WAT imeem 4 14 6 95 6 297 X RBW sedet eene 4 7 6 221 6 222 X 4 6 6 221 6 222 X OFFSET t 4 122 6 38 1093 4820 12 Index X AXIS RANGE sese 4 110 6 91 X AXIS REF LEVEL 4 109 6 90 Y AXIS MAX 6 91 Y 5 her et 4 122 6 40 6 43 Y AXIS MAX 4 110 Y AXIS MIN VALUE 4 110 6 91 ZERO 4 10 6 222 ZOOM 9SXCAXIS 4 36 Zuordnung Befehl 6 344 SoftkeyGRID MIN LEVEL 6 123 SDan ace icri on ud M uere DUE 4 10 Special 6 2 Spectrum analyzer 4 5 Split screen 3 8 4 133
14. 1 16 Switching the Instrument 1 16 Switching On the 1 17 Startup Menu and Bootihg entree er Een ee i ento e D ni o 1 17 Switching Off the FSP iue rto nte pei ee ura args 1 17 Power Save MOode c de cam adottati apo 1 18 Recalling the Most Recent Instrument Settings sse 1 18 FUNCUONAL TOSE m CP 1 18 Mp oM me RC C 1 19 Connecting an External 1 20 len nusbENIIIMP E 1 21 Connecting an External 1 22 Connecting a Printing 1 23 Installation of a Network Printer with Option FSP B16 only 1 29 Installing Windows NT Software cesses 1 32 Authorized Windows NT Software for the Instrument sse 1 32 Reinstallation of Service Pack 5 1 32 1093 4820 12 1 1 1 1 Contents Preparing for Operation FSP MAX 30 dBm 50V a 2 o wo o a
15. FSP The SCREEN TITLE softkey activates the entry of a title for the active diagram A or B It switches on or off a title that is already input The length of the title is limited to max 20 characters IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND1 TEXT Noise Meas DISP WIND1 TEXT STATe ON The TIME DATE ON OFF softkey switches on or off the display of date and time above the diagram IEC IEEE bus command DISP TIME OFF The LOGO ON OFF softkey switches the Rohde amp Schwarz company logo displayed in the upper left corner of the display Screen on or off IEC IEEE bus command DISP LOGO ON The ANNOTATION ON OFF softkey switches the displaying of frequency information on the screen on and off ON Frequency information is displayed OFF Frequency information is not outputted to the display This can be used for example to protect confidential data IEC IEEE bus command DISP ANN FREQ ON The DATAENTRY OPAQUE softkey sets the data entry windows to opaque This means that entry windows are underlayed with the background color for tables IEC IEEE bus command The DEFAULT COLORS 1 and 2 softkey restores the default settings for brightness color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements The color schemes have been selected to give optimum visibility of all picture elements at an angle of vision from above or below DEFAULT COLORS 17 is active in the default setting of the instrument IEC IEEE bus co
16. 5 83 Resolution 4 20 Resolution 4 60 RF ATTEN MANUAL 4 17 4 15 10 5 E 3 Index AM trace ei ente et 3 5 RMS detector oe RMS value RS 232 C CONIIQUIALION ier c ee rrt eg vg transmission parameters 5 trace t de 3 5 Sample detector esee 4 52 Sample number 4 109 Saturation 4 136 Saturation 5 222 2 0000000000000000 4 180 Save GOMMQUTAUON s T od Us dr e etse cua 4 163 limit line 4 127 tc hc cd eee 4 163 Scalar reflection measurement 4 196 4 211 Scaling levelaxis Ji eio ette e re ere 4 16 level display range sess 4 14 liit line io t te ten IRAE 4 125 x and y axis signal statistic 4 109 SCPI conformity information esses 6 1 introduction 25 9 SCPI version 5 1 ie 3 7 DHQNINGSS ente er RE Rea 4 179 COIS DRE 4 180 Re Rede 4 132 hig ins s heb ee M II 4 179 SaluraliOI
17. um are nu Model FSP3 Serial 123456 789 Firmware Rev 1 23 BIOS Rev 1 00 Operating time hours 375 Power On Cycles 786 Attenuator Cycles Input RF Cal 57 10 1786 20 1473 40dB 675 IEC IEEE bus command 2 1093 4820 12 4 157 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Display of System Messages SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu 1093 4820 12 The SYSTEM MESSAGES softkey opens a submenu including a table in which the generated system messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence The most recent messages are placed at the top of the list The following information is available No Device specific error code MESSAGE Brief description of the message COMPONENT On hardware messages name of the affected module On software messages if needed the name of the affected software components DATE TIME Date and time of the occurrence of the message Messages that have occurred since the last call to the SYSTEM MESSAGES menu are marked with an asterisk The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey is activated and allows clearing of the error buffer If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer the message appearing first is Message buffer overflow No MESSAGE COMPONENT DATE TIME 01 No of cycles Attenuator 05 Jan 99 10 02 00 02 VCO unlock Frontend 05 Jan 99 10 01 30 03 Calamp range IF Filter 05 Jan 99 10 00 50 04 3 Voltage Detector 04 Jan 99 15 58 10 05 I2C
18. N 8 em os o gt 23 n Bloc B CN e e 5 re 5 6 9 a 2 Fig 1 1 Front View 1093 4820 12 1 4 E 2 FSP Front View Key group for entering data and for cursor movement see Chapter 3 Cursor keys Move the cursor within the input fields and tables the input value Define the direction of movement for the roll key Roll key Vary input values Move markers and limits Select letters in the help line editor Move cursor in the tables Close data input ENTER 7 3 1 2 diskette drive 1 44 MByte 8 PROBE POWER AF OUTPUT only with option FSP B3 see Chapter 8 8 e mE Volume control Q Head phone GEN OUTPUT 50 RF INPUT 50 connector am 0 PROBE POWER Power supply and A coded socket itia 15 V 12 V for accessories KEYBOARD Connector for an external keyboard RF INPUT HF input see Chapter 8 Caution AN The maximum DC voltage is 50 V the maximum power is 1 W 30 dBm at gt 10 dB attenuation TRACE Select and activate traces and detectors see Chapter 4 LINES Set limit lines DISP Configure display FILE Save and recall instrument data Configuration of memory media and data 1093 4820 12 1 5 E 2 Front View FSP
19. in ERE 5 30 ae 5 21 SUUCTUIG ioco cct du e e ME Ten 5 18 Cue EPIS 5 19 Status reporting lt 2 2 2 00 000000000000 5 18 resetting values seien tnn 5 33 STATusVOPERation 5 23 STATusVQUEStionable 5 24 ACPLimit register esses 5 25 FREQUENCY 8 5 26 5 27 LMARgin register 5 28 POWer regiSter terrere rens 5 29 SY ING iae Ritter iet dedit 5 30 STB slatus byle eene 5 21 SIepsiZG csv aM M cdd 4 8 center frequency 4 6 vsus reae ep pne Nee 4 8 Stop frequency 4 8 OSlofingz inc aC DELL E cee teen ch Era 8 1 SUMING PPM 5 14 10 9 E 3 Supply voltage external noise source Sweep continue single Sweep 4 29 CONMUINUOUS 4 28 COUN Suva e a p Aa e aaa 4 29 4 18 HOO TUD ior e e c t ee ees 4 31 gated er 4 33 4 34 Co Er 4 28 te c 4 28 lime 4 10 4 29 coupling Switching cycles essere Switching On off site uet irt tre ede Sync signal esses Syntax
20. 1093 4820 12 AUTO SELECT DETECTOR AUTOPEAK DETECTOR MAX PEAK DETECTOR LMIN PEAK DETECTOR SAMPLE DETECTOR RMS DETECTOR AVERAGE DETECTOR OPK Analyzer Traces The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu for selecting the detector for the selected trace The softkey is highlighted if the detector is not selected with AUTO SELECT The detector can be selected independently for each trace The AUTO SELECT mode selects the optimum detector for each display mode of the trace Clear Write Max Hold or Min Hold The softkeys for the detectors are mutually exclusive selection keys The AUTO SELECT softkey default setting selects the optimum detector for the set display mode of the trace Clear Write Max Hold and Min Hold and the selected filter mode bandpass FFT Trace display Detector bandpass Detector FFT Clear Write Auto Peak Max Peak Average Sample Sample Max Hold Max Peak Max Peak Min Hold Min Peak Max Peak The detector activated for the specific trace is identified in the respective trace display field as follows Detector Auto Peak AP Max Peak PK Min Peak MI Average AV RMS RM Sample SA Quasipeak QP IEC IEEE bus command DET AUTO ON The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey activates the autopeak detector IEC IEEE bus command DET APE 4 51 E 3 FSP Traces Analyzer 1093 4820 12 A 3 3
21. 4 169 6 163 STATISTICS iia 4 157 6 5 STEPSIZE 6 221 STEPSIZE MANUAL 4 8 STOP mii e ded eases iad cate 4 8 6 223 STOP LIMIT iis 4 85 4 86 6 47 STOP SCAN SWEEP COUNT E SWEEP 4 30 6 244 SWEEPTIME AUTO 4 22 4 29 6 241 SWEEPTIME MANUAL 4 10 4 21 4 29 6 241 SYSTEM INFO nete tede 4 155 SYSTEM MESSAGES 4 158 6 270 6 271 4 54 6 87 ET M 4 54 6 87 THRESHOLD 4 71 4 77 6 93 6 94 TIME DOM POWER 4 83 6 73 6 75 6 76 6 78 TIME LINE sss 4 130 4 150 6 270 6 273 TIME DATE 4 134 6 121 TINT uie 4 136 4 179 6 119 6 145 bt ea he feme es 4 116 6 63 TRACE MATH 4 54 6 87 TRACE MATH OFF 4 54 6 88 TRACE 4 54 6 87 TRACK 4 9 6 70 TRACK 4 9 6 70 TRACK THRESHOLD we 4 9 6 71 4 188 5 4 140 TRANSDUCER 6 217 TRANSDUCER 4 140 6 217 6 219 TRANSDUCER 6 217 TRIGGER 4 32 6 294 TUNE TO MARKER 6 64 TV TRIG SETTINGS
22. 4 4 Spectrum Analyzer Mode ra a t a nce aeree im e ie cua aee ca cac ruens 4 5 Frequency and Span Selection FREQ 4 5 Setting the Frequency Span SPAN 4 10 Level Display Setting and RF Input Configuration AMPT 4 13 Electronic Attenual r ce mto o PO RT REIN tee rans 4 17 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time BW Key sss 4 18 List of available channel filters 0 2 1000 4 26 Sweep Settings SWEEP Ky eae 4 28 Triggering the Sweep TRIG Key entente enne 4 31 Option FSP B6 TV and RF 4 38 Selection and Setting of Traces TRACE 4 41 Selection of Trace Flnctlor 4 41 Selection OF DELECION si e X HEN AT TR RAN RENTA Ua AXE VE ERO RAI ee 4 49 Mathematical Functions for 4 54 Recording the Correction Data of FSP CAL 4 55 Markers and Delta Markers MKR 4 57 Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter 4 59 Marker Functions
23. The entry of span SPAN MANUAL softkey is SWEEPTIME automatically active for span gt 0 Hz HT For span 0 Hz the entry for sweep time SWEEPTIME MANUAL is automatically active FULL SPAN With two windows SPLIT SCREEN displayed at the same time the input data always refer to the window ZERO SPA selected with hotkey SCREEN A B LAST SPAN The SPAN MANUAL softkey activates the window for manually entering the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The allowed range of span values is for the time domain span 0 0 Hz and for the frequency domain span 0 minspan S span Sfmax frequency span minspan smallest selectable span 10 Hz fmax max frequency IEC IEEE bus command FREQ SPAN 2GHz The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering the sweep time manually with Span 0 Hz The softkey is not available for Span gt 0 Hz IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIME 10s 4 11 E 1 Frequency and Span Analyzer FSP 1093 4820 12 The FULL SPAN softkey sets the span to the full frequency range of FSP IEC IEEE bus command FREQ SPAN FULL The ZERO SPAN softkey sets the span to 0 Hz The x axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines corresponding to 1 10 of the current sweep time SWT IEC IEEE bus command FREQ SPAN 2 After changing the span setting the LAST SPAN softkey activates the p
24. i SMR60 TTL 1 GHz 60 GHz 130 92 SMR60B11 TTL 10 MHz 60 GHz 130 2 12 SMP02 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz 130 3 x1 5 TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz 130 SMP04 TTL 10 MHz 40 GHz 41303 TTL 4139 125 SMP22 10 MHz 20 GHz 130 209 SMT02 GPIB 5 0 kHz 1 5 GHz 144 13 5 03 5 0 kHz 3 0 GHz 144 13 SMT06 GPIB 5 0 kHz 6 0 GHz 144 13 5 9 kHz 3 3 GHz 140 13 SMX GPIB 100 kHz 1 0 GHz 137 13 SMY01 GPIB 9 kHz 1 04 GHz 140 13 SMY02 GPIB 9 kHz 2 08 GHz 140 13 HP8340A GPIB 10 MHz 26 5 GHz 110 10 HP ESG A GPIB 250 kHz 4 GHz 136 20 Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A HP ESG D GPIB 250 kHz 3 GHz 136 10 SERIES E4432B Requires the option SMR B11 to be fitted Maximum minimum power depends on presence of Option SMR B15 B17 and set frequency range For more details see SMR data sheet Maximum minimum power depends on presence of Option SMP B15 B17 and set frequency range For more details see SMP data sheet 1093 4820 12 4 216 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration The FREQUENCY SWEEP softkey opens a table for setting the generator level as well as the multiplier and the offset used to derive the generator frequency from the analyzer frequency This table also permits configuration of two generators so that switching between two different configurations is
25. signal amplitude statistics 4 106 Time Domalhs ceste NL eere n 4 83 POWer meal ceti nie a nEn HR 4 85 Power save mode displays e e LER 1 18 hard disk isa eite eir i 1 18 PPE parallel poll enable register 5 22 Preamplifier ives csc oie 2 4 139 Preparing the Instrument for Operation 1 14 Preset instrument 42 aedi pe m REDE 4 32 1093 4820 12 Index Print ce S 4 175 2 4 PRINT SCREEN Gate 4 36 Printer CORfIQUFatlOn MES te dtu 4 172 connection 1 23 8 6 WINCH ACC avo eee 8 6 PRN enhancement lable 3 6 Probe Power connector 2 6 2 PTRansition register 5 19 Putting into operation AC supply connection essen 1 16 Q QP traceihfo ii ein 3 5 Quasipeak 22 200 0000000 4 50 2 5 12 5 32 QUOSTION Mark Joie ves e eere ete 5 12 5 14 Quotation Maki re bte eie 5 14 R 1 15 Recording the correction 4 55 Reference dataset tracking generator 4 197 4 212 4 138 Dio
26. 4 156 Display of Device 4 157 Display of System 5 4 158 Setvice Mentui iei tet e 4 159 General Service 0 4 4 160 Selflest xo eat asco loce ef intere 4 160 Hardware Adjustment eben 4 162 Firmware Update rM deer t thoes 4 162 Saving and Recalling Data Sets FILE eene nnns 4 163 Saving a Data Sets RR 4 164 Recalling a Data Set ont edt e dee bes 4 164 PIE aes crm oh UTD Rees diee TE 4 165 Measurement Documentation 4 172 HGOBY MANU 4 173 Selection of Printer Color Senier 4 178 Installation of a Local Printer a dao aa aiva 4 180 Installation of a Network Printer with Option FSP B16 4 183 Tracking Generator Option 9 4 187 Tracking Generator Settings ER Ee EP Rae 4 188 Transmission
27. 5 ms CENTER B MARKER CLRUR CENTER A HARKER B Span 3 6 MHz CONFIG DISPLAY Fig 3 4 Subdivision of the screen in Split Screen mode The upper half is assigned Screen A the lower one Screen B The settings for measurement can be selected independently for both screens E g a spectrum may be displayed in Screen and a time amplitude in the time range is displayed in Screen B The indications which are valid only for one window appear in the margin of the associated diagram Indications which are valid for the two windows are displayed between the diagrams The window for entry of the measuring parameters or the marker operation is selected using the SCREEN A B hotkey The measurements are simultaneously performed in the two windows irrespective of the currently active one Switching from full screen to split screen mode is performed in menu DISP 1093 4820 12 3 8 E 2 FSP The Screen Softkey Area The softkeys are assigned to the nine keys on the right side of the display The setup of the softkey area is independent of the operating mode It consists of the following graphic elements Softkey menu SOFTKEY LABEL1 indication of submenu arrow SOFTKEY LABEL 2 EE softkey active green 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i EE softkey function not available without 3D frame SOFTKEY LABEL 5 1
28. All settings will be managed and configured on this computer Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator 1093 4820 12 1 25 E 3 Connecting an Output Device Add Printer Wizard Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description Local O LPT2 Local Port LPT3 Local Port 1 0 1 Local Port 1 Local COM3 Local Port COM4 Local Port Add Pott Configure Pott Enable printer pooling ee Add Printer Wizard 252 Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers Gestetner HP HP DeskJet 850C IBM HP DeskJet 855C Kodak HP DeskJet Plus 14 Kyocera HP DeskJet Portable LaserMaster HP DeskJet Lexmark HP Have Disk lt Back Cancel Add Printer Wizard Type in the name of this printer When you have finished click Next Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by so
29. 1093 4820 12 4 124 E 3 FSP Limit Lines 1093 4820 12 X Axis Select interpolation Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency reference points of the table The ENTER key toggles between LIN and LOG selection IEC IEEE bus commands CALC LIM3 CONT SPAC LIN CALC LIM3 UPP SPAC LIN CALC LIM3 LOW SPAC LIN Scaling selection of absolute or relative scaling The limit line can either be scaled in absolute frequency or time or relative units Any of the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE the cursor must be positioned in the X Scaling or the Y Scaling line X Scaling ABSOLUTE frequencies or times are interpreted as absolute physical units X Scaling RELATIVE In the data point table the frequencies are referred to the currently set center frequency In time domain mode the left boundary of the diagram constitutes the reference Y Scaling ABSOLUTE limit values refer to absolute levels or voltages Y Scaling RELATIVE The limit values refer to the reference level Ref Level or in case a reference line is set to the reference line Limit values with the unit dB are always relative values The RELATIVE scaling is always suitable if masks for bursts are to be defined in the time domain or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain An X offset with half the sweep time may be entered in order to shift the mask in the
30. 22200000000000000 eee 4 200 VA SES e TEL AM modulation depth 4114 GGVS signal pe attori R d iet 4 40 putas Center 4 6 i NINOS es ccs 4 13 isse rr eme 4 6 Amplitude probability distribution function 4 108 Channel Amplitude statistics sss 4 106 POWER Ne estere 4 97 Analyzer mode bandwidth 4 96 4 103 4 113 2 err 4 95 1093 4820 12 10 1 E 3 Index 4 97 Channel fillers i2 s pens 4 26 Channel power measurement 4 90 Characters special 6 2 Clear Write mode 4 42 trace info 3 5 iiie iode d e AAE TAT 5 14 Color 4 136 4 178 Color printoUt oie aa eror e tna een e 4 178 COM interface 4 147 8 7 Don uL 5 14 Command rr 5 14 addressed 8 5 ECT COMMA eee thm EE description question 5 12 5 14 quotation mark recognition Sequence ShOFt TOITIasi ee o ere eeu structure syntax elem
31. 4 59 4 73 4 80 6 10 6 46 MKR DEMOD 4 72 6 61 MKR STOP TIME 4 73 6 61 4 199 MODULATION DEPTH 4 114 6 62 MODULATION OFF 4 201 6 246 6 247 N dB 4 69 6 57 6 58 6 59 4 124 6 21 6 22 6 37 6 38 6 41 6 43 NETWORK tt tec et 4 203 NETWORK 4 204 NETWORK 4 152 NEW ino 4 141 4 142 NEW CHAN 2 6 108 NEW LIMIT LINE4 124 6 21 6 22 6 37 6 38 6 40 6 42 NEXT MIN nci 4 81 6 13 6 51 6 52 tt ees 4 76 NEXT PEAK 4 75 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 50 NO 6 88 NO OF 4 109 6 90 NO OF ADJ 4 95 6 235 NOISE CORR 6 238 NOISE 5 4 65 6 60 NOISE SRC 4 138 6 115 NORMALIZE 4 192 4 207 6 216 NORMALIZE 6 214 NUMBER OF 5 4 87 6 242 OCCUP BW ON OFF 4 103 6 65 6 66 6 69 OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH 4 103 6 65 4 178 us 4 153 T E 6 153 6 153 PEAK 4 65 4 75 4 84 6 12 6 50 6 73 PEAK
32. 4 B 1 O i 5 o Co e fc E y lt 2 lt tc E o n 7 E aj 5 z Fig 1 1 Front View 1093 4820 12 I 1 2 E 2 FSP Front View 1 Preparing for Operation Chapter 1 describes the controls and connectors of the Spectrum Analyzer FSP by means of the front and rear view Then follows all the information that is necessary to put the instrument into operation and connect it to the AC supply and to external devices A more detailed description of the hardware connectors and interfaces can be found in chapter 8 Chapter 2 provides an introduction into the operation of the FSP by means of typical examples of configuration and measurement for the description of the concept for manual operation and an overview of menus refer to chapter 3 For a systematic explanation of all menus functions and parameters and background information refer to the reference part in chapter 4 For remote control of the FSP refer to the general description of the SCPI commands the instrument model the status reporting system and command description in chapter 5 and 6 Description of Front and Rear Panel Views Front View 1 Display Screen see Chapter 3 2 Softkeys see Chapter 3 3 data input see Chapter 3 0 9 input numbers input decimal point change sign ESC close input field for uncompleted or CANCEL already closed inputs the o
33. If the sweep count is gt 1 averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps In this case the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula i l n l Trace T meas value n where n is the number of the current sweep n 2 SWEEP COUNT No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory With increasing n the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more single sweeps for averaging After the selected number of sweeps the average trace is saved in the trace memory Until this number of sweeps is reached a preliminary average is displayed After completion of averaging ie when the averaging length defined by SWEEP COUNT is attained a running averaging is continued with CONTINUOUS SWEEP according to the following formula N 1 Traceoid meas value where Trace new trace Trace N old trace N SWEEP COUNT The display Sweep N of N does not change any more until a new start is triggered In the SINGLE SWEEP mode the number of sweeps is triggered with SWEEP START The sweeps are stopped when the selected number of sweeps is attained The number of the current sweep and the total number of sweeps are shown on the display Sweep 3 of 200 1093 4820 12 4 43 E 3 Traces Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and displ
34. MODE 2 9999 4 45 6 88 6 205 BLANK iie ies Sa 4 44 6 124 BRIGHTNESS 4 136 4 179 6 119 6 145 a a 4 113 CIN 0 000000000 4 112 QNO 3 4 113 CAL ABORT enis 4 55 6 96 CAL CORR 4 56 6 97 CAL GEN 128 4 160 6 114 CAL GEN 4 160 6 115 CAL REFL 4 196 4 211 6 216 6 217 CAL REFL SHORT 4 196 4 211 6 216 6 217 CAL RESULTS sss 4 56 6 97 eie tiri err 4 55 6 96 CAL TRANS hs 4 191 4 206 6 216 CCDF ON OFF 4 108 6 89 6 92 CCVS INT 4 40 6 245 CENTER eame 4 6 6 221 CENTER MKR 4 75 6 64 CENTER MARKER 4 133 6 156 CENTER 4 133 6 156 CENTER FREQUENCYESPI CF STEPSIZE 2 6 CHAN PWR HZ iei 4 98 CHAN 4 90 6 65 CHAN PWRUFZ iic e ers 6 68 CHAN TABLE 6 109 6 112 CHAN TABLE VALUES 6 108 6 111 CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 4 96 4 103 4 113 6 235 CLEAR ALL 4 158
35. SOFTKEY LABEL 6 E 1 softkey active opens data entry field red SOFTKEY LABEL 8 ea SOFTKEY LABELI gt indication of side menu Fig 3 5 Setup of the softkey area The softkeys have different functions depending on the instrument state Therefore their labeling can be varied The labeling of all softkeys which call a submenu includes a U arrow The function and current state of the softkeys is indicated in the label by different texts and colors The color assignment is factory set as follows Table 3 1 Factory set color assignment of soft keys Softkey switched off Softkey switched on Softkey switched on and data entry active These colors can be changed by the user as desired in the DISP CONFIG DISPLAY menu A softkey is switched on or off by pressing the respective hardkey see following section Setting the Parameters Softkeys are masked out too if the functionality which they represent is not available A distinction has to be made between two cases e f an instrument function depends on an option and if this option is not fitted the associated softkey is masked out e f the instrument function is not available temporarily due to specific settings the softkey is displayed without the 3D frame The label El on the right lower corner of the softkey area indicates that a side menu is available The side menu is called by pressing the NEXT key 1093 4820 1
36. 1 9 Rear View see Chapter 8 see Chapter 1 see Chapter 8 see Chapter 8 see Chapter 8 see Chapter 8 see Chapter 8 E 2 FSP Rear View VET TE OVAOvZ 00L 8l 6 0c 000000000000 0000000000000 Le ASION e 1no viva 21 NI 31V9 100 Ge Ee Rear View Fig 1 2 E 2 1 10 1093 4820 12 FSP 24 EXT TRIG GATE IN 26 27 AUX CONTROL 28 REF IN REF OUT 1093 4820 12 Rear View Input connector for an external trigger or an see Chapter 8 external gate signal Connector for a PS 2 mouse see Chapter 8 Reserved for options REF IN Input connector for an external see Chapter 4 reference 10 MHz REF OUT Output connector for an internal reference 10 MHz Connector to control an external generator only with option FSP B10 FSP Rear View VET TE OVAOvZ 00L 8l 6 0c 000000000000 0000000000000 Le ASION e 1no viva 21 NI 31V9 100 Ge Ee Rear View Bild 1 2 E 2 1 12 1093 4820 12 FSP 29 30 20 4 MHz OUT VS IN OUT 31 32 1093 4820 12 TG IN Signal input connector for external modulation
37. 3 Set the center frequency to 850 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 850 MHz 4 Configure the adjacent channel power measurement for 15136 signals in Fast ACP mode Press the MEAS key gt Press the CHAN PWR softkey gt Press the CP ACP STANDARD softkey gt Select NADC 15136 from the list of standards and press ENTER gt Press the CP ACP CONFIG 2 softkey gt Set the FAST ACP softkey to ON The FSP performs the power measurement in 5 channels in the useful channel and in the two upper and lower adjacent channels 5 Set the optimum reference level and RF attenuation for the measurement gt Press the ADJUST REF LEVEL softkey The FSP sets the optimum RF attenuation and the optimum reference level on the basis of the measured channel power 1093 4820 12 2 53 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP 6 Select the peak detector and increase the sweep time to 10 s gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the DETECTOR softkey gt Press the PEAK softkey gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the SWEEP TIME softkey and enter 70 5 The FSP measures the adjacent channel power generated by the burst edges and the modulation SHEEP TINE 14 5 10 Fig 2 43 Adjacent channel power due to modulation spectrum and transient spectrum Note The peak power display depends on the selected sweep time The longer the sweep time the higher the probability of measuring the highest peak amplitude o
38. 4 65 4 75 reference level 10 rario 4 75 search limit 4 77 I Toe IN ta k E 4 9 TACO 4 59 4 7 1093 4820 12 FSP ZOO RS 4 63 Max hold ces xt a er d a oe eras 4 42 Max peak detector sss 4 52 trace 3 5 Maximum peak value 4 86 Maximum search densin ee er edes 4 75 Maximum 4 84 Mean power GSM 4 85 Mean value ce ciere 4 85 Measurement 4 198 4 213 reflection e teer 4 211 4 196 transmission eise 4 190 4 205 Measurement example ACP with user specific channel configuration 4 101 adjacent channel power for a specific standard 4 100 CCDF of a 1595 BTS 4 111 occupied bandwidth of a PDC 5 4 105 signal noise power density C No of an 1595 CDMA 50 T 4 102 Measurement Example Harmohic dide iH 25 Measurement of Carrier Noise Ratio C N and C N 4 112 Measurement 4 163 Memory 1 18 Menu Gall 3 10 Change 6
39. Background Grid Function field status field data entry text Function field LED on Function field LED warn Enhancement label text Status field background Trace 1 Trace 3 Marker Lines Measurement status limit check pass Limit check fail Table softkey text Table softkey background Table selected field text Table selected field background Table data entry field titlebar Data entry field opaq text Data entry field opaq background 3D shade bright part 3D shade dark part Softkey state on Softkey state data entry Logo 4 135 E 3 Display FSP The BRIGHTNESS softkey activates entry of the brightness of the selected graphics element Values between 0 and 100 can be entered IEC IEEE bus DISP CMAP3 HSL lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt The TINT softkey activates the entry of the color tint of the selected element The entered value is related to a continuous color spectrum ranging from red 0 to blue 100 IEC IEEE bus DISP CMAP3 HSL lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt The SATURATION softkey activates the entry of the color saturation for the selected element The range of inputs is from 0 to 100 IEC IEEE bus DISP CMAP3 HSL hue sat lum The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey activates a table with which the predefined colors for the diplay screen elements can be selected COLOR BLACK BLUE BROWN GREEN CYAN RED MAGENTA YELLOW WHITE GRAY LIGHT GRAY LIGHT
40. The FSP displays the power during the switch on phase of the burst Fig 2 52 Measuring power during the switch on phase of the burst 7 Define the measured power as the reference and switch on relative power measurement gt Press the NEXT key The side menu for setting the power measurement is opened gt Set the POWER ABS REL softkey to REL gt The power relative to the power during the switch on phase of the burst is displayed gt Press the SET REFERENCE softkey The measured power of the GSM burst is defined as the reference 1093 4820 12 2 66 E 2 FSP Time Domain Measurements 8 Measure the power during the switch off phase of the burst gt Press the TRIG key gt Set the POLARITY POS NEG softkey to NEG The FSP triggers on the falling edge of the burst The burst is then shifted to the left half of the screen The power is measured in the switch off phase The start of the burst is shifted to the middle of the screen and the power is measured during the switch off phase relative to the reference power burst power Fig 2 53 Measuring the S N ratio of the GSM burst signal in the time domain 1093 4820 12 2 67 E 2 FSP Contents Manual Operation Contents Chapter 3 Manual Operation 3 Manual OperallOli iseranero atra coca inner nai auia cuadrado ari i peak er re d ea dx ia 3 1 The SCHOC I Ee ccm 3 1 Diagram Areas ici Ai nee eee 3 2 I
41. 4 35 E 3 Triggering the Sweep Analyzer J Measurement example FSP The GATE DELAY softkey activates the window for setting the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep This may be useful for taking into account a delay between the gate signal and the stabilization of an RF carrier for example As gate delay values between 125 ns and 100 s may be set The position of the delay on the time axis in relation to the sweep is indicated by the line labelled GD As there is a common input signal for trigger and gate if EXTERN or IF POWER is selected changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay TRIGGER OFFSET as well IEC IEEE bus command SWE EGAT HOLD 1US The GATE LENGTH softkey activates the window for setting the sweep duration of FSP in the edge triggered mode Values between 125 ns and 100 s may be set for the gate length The length of the gate in relation to the sweep is indicated by the line labelled GL This softkey is only available if GATE MODE EDGE edge triggering has been selected IEC IEEE bus command SWE EGAT LENG 10005 The SWEEP TIME softkey enables the user to change the time axis to obtain a higher resolution for positioning gate delay and gate length When this is to be done the sweep time temporarily changes the original value is restored when the menu is quit IEC IEEE bus command The PRINT SCREEN softkey allows the
42. GCENTEHB itis eter ne ae deis 4 7 4 8 MARKER iet ith Wt 4 7 4 8 0 T RBW 2 Reime 4 7 6 221 6 222 SPAN sd neret 4 6 6 221 6 222 Op GAB Wo sciiicet neis 4 7 6 221 6 222 SPAN tiii monente 4 6 6 221 6 222 T MHZESPI iint tiere 6 206 10 DB MIN ON OFF 6 152 120 kHzESPI 6 206 200 HzESPI 6 206 9 kHZESPl serre mre tete e 6 206 ABSOLUTE 4 76 6 12 6 13 ACP LIMIT 4 99 6 26 ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH 4 96 6 236 ADJ CHAN SPACING 4 97 6 234 6 235 ADJUST REF 4 93 4 104 6 237 ADJUST SETTINGS 4 110 4 113 6 90 6 237 ADJUST SETTINGS occupied bandwidth 4 104 ADJUST SETTINGS power measurements 4 98 ALL MARKER 4 63 6 10 6 46 VAM ecc eU e eL 4 73 6 60 6 291 unosi 4 14 6 95 6 297 ANNOTATION ON OFF 4 134 6 118 APD 4 108 6 89 6 92 CCELI 3 9 ASCII FILE EXPORT 4 46 6 143 6 165 6 166 AUTO RANGE 6 152 AUTO 4 51 6 220 AUTOPREAMP 6 154 AVERAGE 4 43 6 124 6 204 6 220 AVERAGE ON OFF 4 86 6 74 6 75 6 77 6 79 6 81 AVERAGEESPH At eee 6 220
43. MKR 4 64 Activating the Markers neat 4 65 Measurement of Noise 4 65 Phase Noise 4 67 Measurement of the Filter or Signal 2 4 69 Measurement of a Peak 4 70 AF Demod lati n uiri EM 4 72 Selecting the ia iioc tp cree aa date ede eT ago d re ait aes 4 73 Change of Settings via Markers MKR Key nee 4 74 Power Measurements Hardkey MEAS sse 4 82 Power Measurement in Time 4 83 Channel and Adjacent Channel Power Measurements 4 88 Setting the Channel 4 95 Measurement of Signal Amplitude 4 106 Measurement of Carrier Noise Ratio C N and 4 112 Measurement of the AM Modulation 4 114 Measurement of the Third Order Intercept 4 115 Setup of Limit Lines and Display Lines LINES Key eese 4 118 Selection of Limit Eines erii reed nen n dedere nene nne xe Rn 4 119 Entry and Editing
44. Optimum Level Setting for ACP Measurements on W CDMA Signals The dynamic range for ACPR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor the phase noise and the intermodulation spectral regrowth of the spectrum analyzer The power values produced by the FSP due to these factors accumulate linearly They depend on the applied level at the input mixer The three factors are shown in the figure below for the adjacent channel 5 MHz carrier offset ACPR dBc 30 35 40 45 a Total ACPR a a a Spectral regrowth Lav intercept Thermal noise a 4j 75 80 Phase noise Optimum 10 dB range 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 Mixer level dBm p Fig 2 46 FSP s dynamic range for adjacent channel power measurements on W CDMA uplink signals is a function of the mixer level The level of the W CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis i e the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation The individual components which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative level total ACPR in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis The optimum mixer level is 16 dBm The relative adjacent channel power ACPR at
45. The specified channel bandwidth allows the optimal setting of the measurement parameters of the FSP using ADJUST SETTINGS IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH BWID 14kHz The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey adapts the span to the channel bandwidth selected For the carrier noise ratio measurement the span is set to 4 x channel bandwidth measurement margin The adjustment is performed once if necessary the setting can be changed later on IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH PRES CN CNO 4 113 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Measurement of the AM Modulation Depth The MODULATION DEPTH softkey switches on the measurement of the AM modulation depth An AM modulated carrier is required on the screen for ensuring correct operation The level value of MARKER 17 is taken as the carrier level When this function is activated MARKER 2 and MARKER 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace as delta markers and MARKER 2 is activated for the entry When the position of MARKER 2 delta is changed MARKER 3 delta is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker MARKER 1 If the data entry is activated for MARKER 3 MARKER 1 2 3 4 softkey the latter can be moved for fine adjustment irrespective of MARKER 2 The FSP calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated from the ratio between the power values at the reference m
46. To prevent faults it is therefore indispensable to reinstall the service pack see chapter 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software 1093 4820 12 4 231 E 3 LAN Interface FSP Operating the Instrument on the Network After the network support has been installed it is possible to exchange data between the instrument and other computers and to use printers in the network A prerequisite to the network operation is the appropriate access rights for the required network resources Resources may be file directories of other computers or also central printers Access rights can be obtained from the network or server administrator In that respect it is necessary to obtain the network name of the resource as well as the corresponding access rights In order to avoid misuse the resources are protected by passwords Normally every entitled user of the resources is assigned a user name that is also protected by a password Resources can then be assigned to this user It is possible to determine the type of data access i e whether data can only be read or also written as well as shared data access Depending on the network operating system different types of usage are possible NOVELL Networks The operating system NETWARE from NOVELL is a server based system Data cannot be exchanged between individual workstations the data transfer takes place between the PC and a server This server provides memory space and th
47. 18 dB kHz Ref 10 dBm Att dB Su ns Span 1 MHz Fig 2 16 If the RF attenuation is increased the FSP s intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor 1093 4820 12 2 20 E 2 FSP Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals Calculation method The method used by the FSP to calculate the intercept point takes the average useful signal level Py in dBm and calculates the intermodulation in dB as a function of the average value of the levels of the two intermodulation products The third order intercept is then calculated as follows TOl dBm 1 2 Intermodulation free dynamic range The Intermodulation free dynamic range i e the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two tone signals are measured is determined by the 39 order intercept point the phase noise and the thermal noise of the spectrum analyzer At high signal levels the range is determined by intermodulation products At low signal levels intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor i e the noise floor and the phase noise of the spectrum analyzer determine the range The noise floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been selected At the smallest resolution bandwidth the noise floor and phase noise are at a minimum and so the maximum range is obtained However a large increase in sweep time is required for smal
48. DATA ENTRY OPAQUE CENTER B DEFAULT PREDEFINED MARKER A COLORS 1 COLORS CENTER A DEFAULT MARKER B COLORS 2 CONFIG DISPLAY DISPLAY PWR SAVE G8 The FULL SCREEN softkey selects the display of one diagram This corresponds to the default setting of FSP In the FULL SCREEN mode it is possible to switch between two different device settings by selecting the active window screen A or screen B Switching between SCREEN A and SCREEN B is performed by means of the corresponding key in the HOTKEY bar SPECTRUM SCREEN B It should be noted that the measurements in the FULL SCREEN mode are performed only in the visible active window The active window is marked by or on the right of the diagram IEC IEEE bus command DISP FORM SING DISP WIND lt 1 2 gt SEL 4 132 E 3 FSP h o 2 1093 4820 12 Display The SPLIT SCHEEN softkey selects the display of two diagrams The upper diagram is designated SCREEN A the lower diagram SCREEN B Switching between SCHEEN A and SCHEEN B is performed via the corresponding key in the HOTKEY bar The active window is marked by highlighting fields A and B on the right of the diagram IEC IEEE bus command DISP FORM SPL The REF LEVEL COUPLED softkey switches the coupling of the reference level on and off In addition to the reference level the mi
49. FPE Y CALC FUNC FPEX The SORT MODE FREQ LEVEL softkey defines the position of the peak values in the list FREQ sorting in ascending order of frequency values time values if span 0 LEVEL sorting according to level IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT X With level measurements the PEAK EXCURSION softkey allows the minimum amount to be entered by which a signal must decrease or increase in order to be recognized as a maximum by the peak search function Values between 0 dB and 80 dB may be entered the resolution being 0 1 dB IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK PEXC 6dB The LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the vertical lines F1 F2 in the frequency domain span 0 and T1 T2 in the time domain span 0 between which the search is carried out If only one line is active the F1 T1 line is used as the lower limit the upper limit is the stop frequency If F2 T2 is also active it defines the upper limit IEC IEEE bus commands CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 10MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM ON The THRESHOLD softkey defines a horizontal threshold line which represents the lower limit of the peak search level range IEC IEEE bus command CALC THR 20dBm CALC THR ON The PEAK LIST OFF softkey switches off the table with the search results IEC IEEE bus command 4 71 E 3 MKR FCTN Analyzer FSP AF Demodulation The FSP provi
50. HP DeskJet HP LaserMaster exmark zi Have Disk lt Back Cancel 1093 4820 12 4 181 Measurement Documentation gt Click on My Computer and then Next The selection of printer ports appears gt Select port LPT1 The selection will be marked with a tick gt Click on Next The selection of the printer drivers appears The left table contains the manufacturers the right on the available printer drivers gt Select the desired manufacturer and the corresponding printer driver Note If the desired printer type does not appear in the list then the corresponding driver has not been installed on the instrument so far In this case click on button HAVE DISK This will open a prompt for inserting a disk with the corresponding driver into the floppy drive Press OK and select the desired printer driver After the installation the Service Pack 5 must be reinstalled see section Installing Windows NT software gt Click on Next The data entry field for the printer name appears Measurement Documentation FSP Add Printer Wizard gt The name of the printer can be modified in 2227772 the edit field Printer name max 60 finished click Next characters Note Exceeding 31 characters in the Server and Printer name combination may not be supported by If there are already installed printers in the some applications s
51. MANUAL The COUPLING RATIO softkey opens a sub menu for selection of the coupling ratios When the default setting is active i e the COUPLING RATIO Softkey is deactivated not highlighted the ratio span resolution bandwidth SPAN RBW is 50 this corresponds to SPAN RBW AUTO 50 and the ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth RBW VBW is 0 33 this corresponds to RBW VBW SINE 1 3 If the ratio RBW VBW or SPAN RBW is different from the default setting the COUPLING RATIO softkey is highlighted The softkeys RBW VBW are selection keys Only one softkey can be enabled at any one time The softkeys are only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu The softkeys SPAN RBW are also selection keys They are only effective for the HBW AUTO selection in the main menu The RBW VBW SINE 1 3 softkey sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 3 x resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID RAT 3 This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu 4 22 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time The RBW VBW PULSE 1 softkey sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz
52. N 8 Lo em se Bd Be E je ED ED CD HI HE 399m a CN e Ne N w 5 E 6 9 a 5 Fig 1 1 Front View 1093 4820 12 1 6 E 2 FSP 10 PREV NEXT M 11 14 15 16 1093 4820 12 Menu change keys NEXT Change to side menu PREV Call main menu Hotkeys ON STANDBY switch Configure and start a print job Define general configuration Record correction data Call default settings 1 7 Front View see Chapter 3 see Chapter 3 see Chapter 1 see Chapters 1 and 4 see Chapter 4 see Chapter 4 see Chapter 4 E 2 FSP Rear View VET TE OVAOvZ 00L 8l 6 0c 000000000000 0000000000000 Le ASION e 1no viva 21 NI 31V9 100 Ee Rear View Fig 1 1 E 2 1 8 1093 4820 12 FSP Rear View 17 18 100 240 VAC 3 1 1 3A 21 23 NOISE SOURCE 1093 4820 12 Reserved for options Power switch and AC power connector bus connector Parallel interface connector printer connector Connector for a serial interface 9 pin socket COM Connector for an external monitor Output connector for an external noise source
53. REFERENCE This means 1 Declare the power of the currently measured channel as the reference value using the SET CP REFERENCE softkey 2 Select the channel of interest by varying the channel frequency FSP center frequency With linear scaling of the Y axis the power of the new channel relative to the reference channel CP CPret is displayed With dB scaling the logarithmic ratio 10lg CP CP is displayed The relative channel power measurement can thus also be used for universal adjacent channel power measurements Each channel can be measured individually IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH MODE ABS 1093 4820 12 4 97 E 3 MEAS Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The CHAN PWR HZ softkey toggles between the measurement of the total channel power and the measurement of the channel power referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth 1 Channel Bandwidth By means of this function it is possible e g to measure the signal noise power density or use the additional functions CP ACP REL and SET CP REFERENCE to obtain the signal to noise ratio IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON OFF The conversion factor is 10 10 The SELECT TRACE softkey selects the trace on which the CP ACP measurement is performed Only traces can be selected which are switched on not set to BLANK IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW TRAC 1 The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey automatically optimizes the instrument settings f
54. Ref 8 dBm Att 20 dB 1 as LEUE POLARITY HEG 1 CLRHR 1808 Fig 4 4 Setting GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH in time domain by means of lines GD and GL On quitting the GATE SETTINGS menu FSP returns to the previous screen 1093 4820 12 4 37 E 3 Triggering the Sweep Analyzer FSP Option FSP B6 TV and RF Trigger The option TV and RF Trigger FSP B6 enables the FSP to trigger on TV signals or on the presence of a RF carrier outside the resolution bandwidth For this purpose the hardware board is equipped with a TV demodulator which produces the trigger signals necessary for the analysis of TV signals In addition to the pure trigger function the board also creates a demodulated CCVS video signal for operation of external TV monitors Apart from using the internal IF for creating the trigger signals the FSP can also make use of an externally supplied CCVS signal the corresponding connector is placed at the rear panel of the instrument In order to display different sections of a TV video signal the FSP derives several trigger signals from the video signals This allows triggering as well on the frame repetition as on each line of the TV video signal Additionally the option includes a broadband RF detector bandwidth 80 MHz which allows triggering within a 40 MHz range around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency sweep Thus the measurement of spurious emissions
55. Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Setthe center frequency to 99 64 MHz and the span to 300 kHz Press the FREQ key and enter 99 64 MHz Press the SPAN key and enter 300 kHz 3 Setaresolution bandwidth of 300 kHz Press the BW key Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 300 kHz 4 Setadisplay range of 20 dB and shift the filter characteristics to the middle of the display Press the AMPT key gt Press the RANGE LOG MANUAL softkey and enter 20 dB Press the NEXT key gt Set the GRID softkey to REL 1093 4820 12 2 40 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals gt Press the PREV softkey gt Using the spinwheel shift the reference level so that the filter edge intersects the 10 dB level line at the center frequency The slope of the 300 kHz filter is displayed This corresponds to the demodulator characteristics for FM signals with a slope of approx 5 dB 100 kHz Fig 2 32 Filter edge of a 300 kHz filter used as an FM discriminator characteristic 5 Set FM deviation of 100 kHz and an of 1 kHz on the signal generator 6 Seta frequency deviation of 0 Hz on the FSP gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the ZERO SPAN The demodulated FM signal is displayed The signal moves across the screen 7 Creating a stable display by video triggering gt Press the TRIG key gt Press the VIDEO softkey A stationary display i
56. The FSP therefore corrects the noise figure by 2 51 dB To standardize the measurement result to a bandwidth of 1 Hz the result is also corrected by 10 log RBW oise with RBW poise being the power bandwidth of the selected resolution filter RBW Detector selection The noise power density is measured in the default setting with the sample detector and using averaging Other detectors that can be used to perform a measurement giving true results are the average detector or the RMS detector If the average detector is used the linear video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel If the RMS detector is used the squared video voltage is averaged and displayed as a pixel The averaging time depends on the selected sweep time SWT 501 An increase in the sweep time gives a longer averaging time per pixel and thus stabilizes the measurement result The FSP automatically corrects the measurement result of the noise marker display depending on the selected detector 41 05 dB for the average detector 0 dB for the RMS detector It is assumed that the video bandwidth is set to at least three times the resolution bandwidth While the average or RMS detector is being switched on the FSP sets the video bandwidth to a suitable value The Pos Peak Neg Peak Auto Peak and Quasi Peak detectors are not suitable for measuring noise power density 1093 4820 12 2 29 E 2 Noise Measurements FSP Determining the noise figure The noise figu
57. and TTL interface for synchronization for most of the Rohde amp Schwarz generators see table above The two operating modes differ in the speed of the control Whereas with pure IECBUS operation each frequency to be set must be individually transferred to the generator additional use of the TTL interface permits to program a total frequency list at once and subsequently perform the frequency stepping via TTL handshake which is a big advantage in terms of speed Note Generators equipped with the TTL interface can also be operated with IECBUS GPIB only Only one of the two generators can be operated with TTL interface at a time The other generator must be configured for IECBUS GPIB GPIB IECBUS address of the respective generator Addresses from 0 to 30 ADDR are possible MODE Operating mode of generator The generator activated using the FREQUENCY SWEEP softkey is automatically set to remote mode REMOTE the other to manual mode LOCAL FMIN Frequency range of generator Select the start and stop frequency of the F FSP in a way that the specified range is not exceeded If the start frequency lies below F MIN the generator is only switched on when F MIN is reached If the stop frequency lies above F MAX it is limited to F MAX when the generator is switched on using the EXT SRC ON OFF softkey PMIN Level range of generator This field defines the allowed input range for the POWER column in the FREQU
58. confirmation query Do you really want to delete the factor NO IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN DEL The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys are used to scroll through large tables that cannot completely be displayed on the screen i i lt i 4 141 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors A transducer factor is characterized by the following e Reference values with frequency and factor Values e Unit of the factor Unit and e Name Name to distinguish the various factors During entry the FSP checks the transducer factor for compliance with specific rules that must be met to ensure correct operation e frequencies for the reference values must always be entered in ascending order Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and the following message will appear Frequency Sequence e The frequencies entered may exceed the frequency range of the FSP since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements The minimum frequency of a reference value is 0 Hz the maximum frequency 200 GHz e The value range for the transducer factor is 200 dB If the minimum or maximum value is exceeded the FSP outputs the following message Min Level 200 Max Level 200 e Gain has to be entered as a negative value and attenuation as a positive value Note The softkeys in the UNIT submenu of the
59. e g for pulsed carriers is possible even when the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span This RF power trigger can be used as long as the RF signal at the input mixer is in the range of 10 dBm to 50 dBm The resulting range for the input signal at the RF input connector can be calculated using the following formula Mixerlevel RFAtt PreampGain lt Input Signal Mixerlevel RFAtt PreampGain min max The RF Power Trigger can be selected and configured in the trigger menu TRIG using the softkey RF POWER The RF POWER softkey activates triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel The FSP uses a level detector at the first IF The detector s threshold can be selected from values between 50 dBm and 10 dBm at the input mixer The range of the input signal to which the trigger responds is calculated using the following formula Mixerlevel t RFAtt PreampGain lt Input Signal Mixerlevel RFAtt Pr eampGain min max The bandwidth at the IF is 80 MHz Triggering starts when the trigger threshold is exceeded in a range of 40 MHz around the frequency selected start frequency for frequency sweep This allows spurious emissions e g with pulsed carriers to be measured even if the carrier itself is outside the frequency display range IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR RFP SWE EGAT SOUR RFP 1093 4820 12 4 38 E 3 FSP Analyzer Triggering
60. ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud INIT CONT OFF ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud FREQ START 1MHZ ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud FREQ STOP 2MHZ ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud INIT IMM WAI ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud CALC MARK MAX Y ibsta iberr ibcntl Response 5 5 100 Call RSDLLibrd ud Response ibsta iberr ibcntl Response RTrim Response Cut off space Insert value in current document Selection InsertBefor Response Selection Collapse wdCollapseEnd Winword Terminate connection to measuring instrument Call RSDLLibonl ud 0 ibsta End Sub iberr ibcntl The entry of the peak value in the Winword document can be replaced as follows for Excel Insert value in current document ActiveCell FormulaR1Cl Response 1093 4820 12 4 254 Excel E 3 FSP RSIB Interface C C Programming hints Access to the functions of the RSIB32 DLL Windows platforms The functions of the RSIB32 DLL are declared in the header file RSIB H The DLL functions can be linked to a C C program in different ways 1 Enter one of the supplied import libraries RSIB LIB or RSIB32 LIB into the linker options 2 Load the library using the function LoadLibrary during runtime and determine the function pointers of the DLL functions using GetProcAddress Before the end of the program the RSIB DLL must be unloaded again using
61. not represented The REF FXD ON OFF softkey switches on or off the relative measurement to a fixed reference value REFERENCE POINT independent of the trace IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT2 FUNC FIX The REF POINT LEVEL softkey enters a reference level inde pendent of the reference marker level All relative level values of the delta markers refer to this reference level IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT2 FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey specifies a level offset relevant to the reference level The relative level values of the delta markers refer to the reference point level plus the level offset The level offset is set to 0 dB on enabling the HEFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT2 FUNC FIX RPO Y OFFS OdB With the REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey a reference fre quency can be manually activated for the delta markers when the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function is used IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT2 FUNC FIX RPO X 10 7MHz 4 61 E 3 MKR Analyzer FSP The REF POINT x LEVEL softkey activates the entry box for the input of a reference level on the x axis for the REFERENCE FIXED function when the power sweep is active IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT2 FUNC FIX RPO X 5DBM The PEAK SEARCH sets the reference point level for all delta markers to the peak of the selected trace when the REFERENCE FIXED function is used IEC IEEE bus
62. of the overall diagram height IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR VID TRIG LEV VID 50 PCT 1093 4820 12 4 31 E 3 Triggering the Sweep Analyzer FSP POLARITY 1093 4820 12 The EXTERN softkey activates triggering via a TTL signal at the input connector EXT TRIGGER GATE on the rear panel IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR EXT SWE EGAT SOUR EXT The F POWER softkey activates triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel For this purpose the FSP uses a level detector at the second intermediate frequency can be selected a range between 30 dBm and 10 dBm at the input mixer The resulting trigger level at the RF input is calculated via the following formula Mixerlevel RFAtt PreampGain lt Input Signal Mixerlevel RFAtt Pr eampGain min The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is 10 MHz The FSP is triggered as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded within a 5 MHz range around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency sweep Thus the measurement of spurious emissions e g for pulsed carriers is possible even when the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR IFP SWE EGAT SOUR IFP See following section Option FSP B6 TV and RF Trigger page 4 38 The TRIGGER OFFSET softkey activates the window for entering the time offset between the trigger signal and th
63. or an additional mouse instead is required 1093 4820 12 4 219 E 3 LAN Interface Network Configuration Network Setup Wizard 1093 4820 12 4 220 FSP gt Press the SETUP key The SETUP menu opens gt Press the GENERAL SETUP key The GENERAL SETUP menu opens gt Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK softkey gt Answer the prompt Do you want to install it now with Yes gt Leave the default setting Wired to the network unchanged and confirm by means of NEXT gt To select the appropriate network card click on Select from list E 3 FSP Select Network Adapter 3 16 bit Ethernet Adapter 3Com Etherlink Adapter also 11216 and 11 16 3Com Etherlink ISA PCMCIA Adapter 89 3Com EtherLink IIl PCI Bus Master Adapter 30590 Select OEM Option Intel EtherExpress PRO Adapter BI Intel EtherE xpress PRO Adapter 1093 4820 12 4 221 LAN Interface gt Click on Have Disk A prompt to enter a path name will appear gt Enter the following path name CAWINNT R amp S_drivers Etherexp and click on Note this path does not exist enter A as a path name Insert the driver disk and click on OK gt Confirm Intel EtherExpress PRO Adapter with gt Close the dialog by means of NEXT after selecting Intel EtherExpress PRO Adapter once again E 3 LAN Interface FSP Sele
64. softkey gt Press the CP ACP STANDARD softkey gt Select NADC 15136 from the list of standards and press ENTER The FSP performs the power measurement in 5 channels in the useful channel and in the two upper and two lower adjacent channels 1093 4820 12 2 48 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals 5 Setting the optimum reference level and RF attenuation for the measurement gt Press the ADJUST REF LEVEL softkey The FSP sets the optimum RF attenuation and the optimum reference level on the basis of the measured channel power Fig 2 39 Measuring the relative adjacent channel power of an NADC signal in each of the two adjacent channels below and above the transmit channel To increase repeatability especially in the adjacent channels the FSP s Fast ACP routine is recommended 6 Switching on the Fast ACP routine gt Press the CP ACP CONFIG 4 softkey gt Set the FAST ACP softkey to ON The FSP makes consecutive measurements on the 5 channels in the Zero Span mode using the receive filter specified in IS 136 to define the resolution bandwidth The power in each channel is displayed on the graph as a function of time Att 10 dB 200 ms SS eS Fig 2 40 Measuring adjacent channel power in time domain Fast ACP 1093 4820 12 2 49 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP As the resolution bandwidth is much wider than the one used for the integration method the results are much more stable when c
65. ud c db sav ibsta iberr 1 The file name may as well include a drive or path specification RSDLLibtmo This function defines the timeout for a device The default value for the timeout is set to 5 seconds VB format Function RSDLLibtmo ByVal ud ByVal tmo ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibtmo short ud short tmo short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibtmo short ud short tmo short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle tmo Timeout in seconds Example RSDLLibtmo ud 10 ibsta iberr ibcntl RSDLLibsre This function sets the device to the or REMOTE state VB format Function RSDLLibsre ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibontl C format Unix short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle State of device 0 local 1 remote Example RSDLLibsre ud 0 ibsta iberr 1 1093 4820 12 4 247 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP RSDLLibloc This function temporarily switches the device to the LOCAL state VB format Function RSDLLibloc ByVal ud ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibloc short ud short far ibs
66. 1 28 The selection box DEVICE is closed and HP DeskJet 660C is entered in line DEVICE2 Note The selection of the printer type automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION to values which correspond to a standard mode with this output device Other printer dependent parameters such as PAPERSIZE can be modified under Windows NT in the printer properties window START SETTINGS PRINTER SETTINGS E 3 FSP PRINT SCREEN Connecting an Output Device Start print of measurement results gt Press Softkey PRINT SCREEN to start the print job Installation of a Network Printer with Option FSP B16 only Fi Printers OF x File Edit View Help Canon Bubble Jet BJ 330 44 2 Canon Bubble Jet BJC 800 al Canon Bubble Jet BJC 800 44 Epson LQ 1500 Epson LQ 1500 4 Epson Stylus COLOR ESC P 2 75 object s Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by My Computer All settings will be managed and configured on this computer Connect to a printer on another machine settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator lt Back Cancel 1093 4820 12 1 29 After opening the Printers dialog window proceed with the installation as follows gt Double click the Add Printer line The Add Printer Wizard wi
67. 100 kHz and resolution bandwidth of 3 kHz 1093 4820 12 2 10 E 2 FSP Measurement of Harmonics 4 Switching on the marker gt Press the MKR key The marker is positioned on the trace maximum 5 Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values gt Press the REFERENCE FIXED softkey gt The position of the marker becomes the reference point The reference point level is indicated by a horizontal line the reference point frequency with a vertical line At the same time the delta 2 marker is switched on at the marker position Fig 2 6 Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 6 Make the step size for the center frequency equal to the signal frequency gt Press the FREQ key The frequency menu opens gt Press the CF STEPSIZE softkey and press the MARKER softkey in the submenu The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency 7 Set the center frequency to the 274 harmonic of the signal Press the FREQ key The frequency menu open s Press the up cursor key below the spinwheel once The FSP s center frequency is set to the 2 harmonic 8 Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic Press the MKH key Press the PEAK softkey The delta marker jumps to the maximum of the 2 harmonic The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level fundamental wave level 1093 4820 12 2 11 E 2 Measurement of Harmonics
68. 114 SET CP 4 92 6 237 SET 4 86 6 82 SET TO DEFAULT 4 180 SET TO STANDARD 6 211 SETTINGS COUPLED SGL SWEEP DISP OFF 4 90 6 151 SHIFT X LIMIT 4 127 6 38 SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE 4 127 6 44 SIGNAL 2 2 12 0200000000000 4 60 6 48 SIGNAL 4 108 SIGNAL TRACK 4 9 6 70 SINGLE MEAS 4 111 6 150 6 151 SINGLE SCAN tace e ee eb 6 150 E 3 FSP SINGLE 4 28 6 150 6 151 SOFT 4 154 SORT 4 171 SORT MODE 4 71 SOURCE 4 190 4 205 SOURCE 4 188 6 170 SOURCE POWER 4 189 4 204 6 248 6 251 SPAN MANUAL 4 10 6 222 SPAN RBW AUTO 50 4 28 6 207 SPAN RBW MANUAL 4 24 6 207 SPLIT 4 133 6 118 STANDARD DEVIATION 4 85 6 78 6 79 STABLE rite m erii et 4 8 6 222 START LIMIT 4 85 4 86 6 47 STARTUP
69. 155 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Display of Module Data SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu The HARDWARE INFO softkey opens a table in which the modules INSTALLED COMPONENTS installed in the instrument are listed together with the corresponding hardware revisions Table HARDWARE INFO consists of six columns SERIAL serial number COMPONENT name of module ORDER order number MODEL model number of the module REV main modification index of the module SUB REV secondary modification index of the module HARDWARE INFO COMPONENT SERIAL ORDER MODEL REV SUB ATTEN 7 688557 005 1067 7684 21 FRONTEND1 8333877083 1093 5540 3 7 11 mi FRONTEND2 6833467053 1093 5791 3 12 IF FILTER REF 6897127002 1093 7242 2 84 84 DETECTOR 683999 035 1093 6998 2 83 a4 AF_DENOD 6650877 002 1093 7620 2 CPU Board 9910257687 1091 2489 04 11 MOTHERBOARD 6756317822 1093 7494 a2 85 04 FSP 8333877026 1093 4495 A LAN Interface 8218187018 1093 9080 04 Note The screenshot lists the components of an FSP 7 with options FSP B3 AF demodulator and FSP B16 LAN interface 1093 4820 12 4 156 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Display of Device Statistics SETUP SYSTEM INFO submenu The STATISTICS softkey opens the table STATISTICS This table contains the model information serial number and firmware version and a list in which the operating time of the instrument the power on cycles as well as attenuator
70. 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals ACPR 1595 Repeatability 0 35 0 3 0 25 0 2 0 15 0 1 A Tx channel Alternate channels 0 05 Adjacent channels Standard dev dB 0 10 100 gt 1000 Sweep time ms Fig 2 37 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on 1595 signals in the Fast ACP mode Note on adjacent channel power measurements 1595 base station signals When measuring the adjacent channel power of IS95 base station signals the frequency spacing of the adjacent channel to the nominal transmit channel is specified as 750 kHz The adjacent channels are therefore so close to the transmit channel that the power of the transmit signal leaks across and is also measured in the adjacent channel if the usual method using the 30 kHz resolution bandwiath is applied The reason is the low selectivity of the 30 kHz resolution filter The resolution bandwidth therefore must be reduced considerably e g to 3 kHz to avoid this This causes very long measurement times factor of 100 between a 30 kHz and 3 kHz resolution bandwidth This effect is avoided with the time domain method which uses steep IF filters The 30 kHz channel filter implemented in the FSP has a very high selectivity so that even with a 750 kHz spacing to the transmit channel the power of the useful modulation spectrum is not measured
71. 4 The DETECTOR MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak detector It is recommended for measurement of impulsive signals IEC IEEE bus command DET POS The DETECTOR MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak detector Weak sinewave signals become clearly visible in noise using this detector In case of a composite signal made up of sinewave and impulsive signals the impulsive signals are suppressed IEC IEEE bus command DET NEG The DETECTOH SAMPLE softkey activates the sample detector It is used for measuring uncorrelated signals such as noise The power can be determined with the aid of fixed correction factors for evaluation and the logarithmic function IEC IEEE bus command DET SAMP The DETECTOR RMS softkey activates the rms detector The rms detector supplies the power of the signal independent of the waveform For this effect the root mean square of all sampled level values is formed during the sweep of a pixel The sweep time thus determines the number of averaged values and with increasing sweep time better averaging is obtained The rms detector is thus an alternative for averaging over several sweeps see TRACE AVERAGE Since the video bandwidth must be at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth RBW to ensure that video filtering does not invalidate the rms values of the signal this ratio is set automatically upon activating the detector IEC IEEE bus command DET RMS 4 52 E 3 FSP Anal
72. 6 21 6 37 6 40 6 42 6 43 6 44 EDIT PATH ee 4 170 6 159 6 164 ENABLE ALL 5 2000 00 4 168 6 168 ENTER PASSWORD 4 160 6 272 EXT AM nth ote eere 4 200 6 246 EXT LEM sos itt ie 4 200 6 247 EXT SRC 4 214 6 249 EXTERN in eren 4 32 6 244 6 291 FAST ACP 4 92 6 238 1093 4820 12 10 7 Index FILE 4 170 6 159 FILTER 2228 4 24 6 208 FINAL 500 00 nnns 6 220 FINAL MAX 6 220 FINAL MEAS 6 241 FINAL MIN 6 220 FINAL PHASES 6 153 FINAL 6 220 te erc eov et 6 220 FIRMWARE 4 162 6 271 FEM 4 73 6 60 6 291 FORMAT 5 50 4 171 6 161 etae atte eire 4 31 6 291 FREQ AXIS 6 121 FREQUENCY LINE 1 2 4 129 FREQUENCY OFFSET 4 9 4 198 4 213 6 223 6 247 FREQUENCY 4 217 6 250 6 251 4 132 6 118 FULL SIZE 2 4 93 FUEL SPAN niuis 4 10 6 222 GATE DELAY 4 36 6 243 GATE LE
73. 625 525 4 40 6 294 LOCAL 4 4 5 6 LOGO ON OFF 4 134 6 118 MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH eese 4 26 MAKE 4 171 6 163 MANUAL re deese vae 4 7 MARGING ie 6 88 MARKER 1 to 4 4 58 6 11 6 12 6 45 6 46 6 49 MARKER 4 72 6 60 MARKER NORMP DELTA 4 58 6 9 MARKER TRACK 6 49 MARKER 2 4 63 6 59 gt 5 5 000 0 nnne sen 6 84 gt 6 85 MARKER gt PCCPCH esee eene nnne nnn 6 84 MAXCHOED t erre dede 4 42 6 124 MAX HOLD ON OFF 4 86 6 74 6 76 6 78 6 80 MAX PEAK ose en Od aR 6 220 MAX iere eee eive tha e 6 220 MEAN 4 85 6 76 6 77 MEASPERIOD 6 211 6 212 MIN AP S d raa 4 81 6 13 6 51 E 3 Index MIN HOED iie nets 4 45 6 124 tree eater tnde 6 220 MIN 2 0 6 220 MKR gt STEPSIZE 4 80 6 64 sse 6 64 MKR gt
74. ADJUST REF LVL SETTINGS 2 N 11 U LI The CHAN POWER ACP softkey switches on the channel power measurement or adjacent channel power measurement according to the current configuration At the same time it opens the submenu for defining the channel power measurement The softkey is highlighted to show that channel or adjacent channel power measurement is on Note This softkey can only be operated frequency domain SPAN 0 The CP ACP ON OFF softkey switches the calculation of the channel power or adjacent channel power on or off With default settings the measurement is performed by integrating the powers at the display points within the specified channels IBW method The adjacent channel power can be either absolute or relative related to the transmission channel power The default setting is relative measurement see softkey CP ACP ABS REL IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CPOW ACP CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW ACP CALC MARK FUNC POW OFF 4 90 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MEAS The CP ACP STANDARD softkey opens a table for the selection of the settings according to predefined standards The test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are set according to the mobile radio standard ACP STANDARD The standards available are listed in the table on the left NADC 15136 Note For the FSP the channel spacing is defined as the distance be
75. AMALTHEA_1 2 E ANUBIS 1093 4820 12 4 235 E 3 LAN Interface FSP gt Select the appropriate drive under Drives Drive er gt Activate Reconnect at Logon if the connection is to be set up automatically Path 11575 each time the instrument is started M Connectas Hee gt Use OK to connect the network path with Reconnect at Logon the selected drive Shared Directories IV Expand by Default The user name and the password are E TESLA 1 queried Then the drive will appear in the overview All Directories of the explorer Note Only drives in the network can be connected that the user has the appropriate access rights for E URANUS 1 1 Disconnecting a network drive gt Click on Tools in the Explorer and then Disconnect Network Drive gt Select the drive to be disconnected under Network Drive gt Disconnect the drive using OK The security prompt must be answered with Yes 1093 4820 12 4 236 E 3 FSP Printing on a Network Printer Fi Printers OF xi File Edit View Help Canon Bubble Jet BJ 330 Canon BubbleJet BJ 330 44 Canon Bubble Jet BJC 800 38 Canon BubbleJet BJC 800 44 Epson 12 1500 8 Epson LQ 1500 44 Epson Stylus COLOR ESC P 2 75 5 7 Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer co
76. BLUE LIGHT GREEN LIGHT CYAN LIGHT RED LIGHT MAGENTA IEC IEEE bus command DISP CMAP 1 to 26 PDEF lt color gt 1093 4820 12 4 136 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration SETUP Key The SETUP key opens the menu for configuration of the FSP gt TRANSDUCER m INSERT FACTOR LINE DELETE LINE NEW EDIT 9 DELETE VIEW TRANSDUCER SAVE TRD FACTOR PAGE UP PAGE DOWN i N GPIB SOFT ADDRESS FRONTPANEL N HARDWARE 2 INPUT INFO RF REFERENCE ETRMWARE STATISTICS COM SETUP ENT EXT UPDATE m INTERFACE NOISE SRC RESTORE CAL SYSTEM FIRMWARE CAL GEN MESSAGES TIME SELFTEST 158 MHZ DATE SELFTEST CAL GEN CONFIGURE NN RR NETWORK PREAMP RESULTS COMB AL ON MESSAGES NETWORK M LOGIN TRANSDUCER Ll GENERAL SETUP 8 SYSTEM INFO SERVICE AN ENTER c PASSWORD T fib a EN lt L lt The following settings be modified here The REFERENCE INT EXT softkey determines the source of the reference The NOISE SRC ON OFF softkey switches on and off the voltage supply for an external noi
77. CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 IEC IEEE bus command CALC STAT PRES The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey optimizes the level settings of the FSP according to the measured peak power in order to gain maximum sensitivity of the instrument The level range is adjusted according to the measured difference between peak and minimum power for APD measurement and peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Additionally the probability scale is adapted to the selected number of samples IEC IEEE bus command CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE 4 110 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS The CONT MEAS softkey starts collecting a new sequence of sample data and calculating the APD or CCDF curve depending on the selected measurement The next measurement is started automatically as soon as the indicated number of samples has been reached CONTinuous IEC IEEE bus command INIT CONT ON INIT IMM The SINGLE MEAS softkey starts collecting a new sequence of sample data and calculating the APD or CCDF curve depending on the selected measurement At the beginning of the measurement previously obtained measurement results are discarded IEC IEEE bus command INIT CONT OFF INIT IMM Hint for usage of the marker functions with measurement of signal statistics With the signal statistic measurement level always is displayed on x axis Y axis always is a normalized value
78. CENT FREQ CENT LINK SPAN LINK FACT 20PCT The CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and the step size to the value of the center frequency This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic content because by entering the center frequency each stroke of the STEP key selects the center frequency of another harmonic IEC IEEE bus command The MARKER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and the step size to the value of the marker This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic content at the marker position because by entering the center frequency each stroke of the STEP key selects the center frequency of another harmonic IEC IEEE bus command The MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering a fixed step size IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT STEP 120MHz 4 7 E 1 Frequency and Span Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP Softkeys in time domain dod d 44 4 The 0 1 RBW softkey sets the step size for the center frequency entry to 1096 of the resolution bandwidth AUTO 0 1 RBW corresponds to the default setting IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT iP LINK RBW FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT wn The 0 5 RBW softkey sets the step size for the center frequency entry to 50 of the resolution bandwidth IEC IEEE
79. CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter DAB Satellite CFILter CFILter CFILter CFILter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels CFILter AM Radio CFILter CFILter CDMAone CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels CFILter CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels RRC TETRA CFILter CFILter PDC RRC IS 136 CFILter CFILter CDPD CDMAone CFILter CFILter CFILter FM Radio CFILter PHS CFILter CFILter CFILter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA CFILter CDMAone CFILter CDMAone CFILter DAB CFILter CFILter MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP MHz o 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo MHz CFILter This filter is avaible with modification index gt 2 of the IF filter module see softkey SETUP SYSTEM INFO HARDWARE INFO 1093 4820 12 4 26 E 3 FSP Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time VBW MODE 1093 4820 12 The VBW MODE LIN LOG softkey determines the position of the video filter in the signal path for resolution bandwidths lt 100 kHz gt If is selected the video filter will be in front of the logarithmic amplifier default gt f LOGarithmic is selected the video filter will be behind the logarithmic amplifier The essential difference between the two operating modes relates to the settling in the case of falling signal edges With LINear the falling signal edge will be flatter than with LOGarithmic This is due to the conversion from linear power to logarit
80. CLEAR ALL 2 et DATAENTRY OPAQUE skeet aah 4 14 6 95 6 297 ABMV 4 14 6 95 6 297 GBT saa cite tile de eot st a mentors 6 95 dBDTESPR LU 6 95 6 297 4 14 6 95 6 297 6 95 pe 4 14 6 95 6 297 200 4 14 6 95 6 297 4 48 6 143 DEFAULT COLORS 4 134 6 119 6 144 DEFAULT 59 4 168 6 168 DEFAULT SETTINGS 4 110 6 91 DEL CHAN CONF 6 110 6 112 DEEETE itus 4 141 4 171 6 161 6 165 6 219 DELETE LIMIT LINE esses 4 122 6 23 DELETE LINE 4 145 DELETE VALUE 4 127 iie one 4 51 6 220 DETECTOR AUTOPEAK 4 51 6 220 DETECTOR AVERAGE 4 53 6 220 DETECTOR MAX PEAK 4 52 6 220 DETECTOR MIN PEAK 4 52 6 220 DETECTOR 4 53 6 220 DETECTOR 5 4 52 6 220 DETECTOR 4 52 6 220 DEVICE 1 2 4 175 6 146 6 147 6 149 6 164 6 269 DISPLAY LINE Ise 4 129 DISPLAY PWR 4 135 6 118 EDIT ii ett ttis 4 141 4 142 6 218 EDIT ACP LIMITS4 99 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 EDIT CHAN CONF 6 108 6 111 EDIT 25 4 166 6 169 EDIT LIMIT LINE4 124
81. Cancel Finally the instrument needs to be configured for use of the installed network printer using softkeys DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the Hardcopy Main Menu 1093 4820 12 4 238 E 3 FSP LAN Interface Remote Data Transfer with TCP IP Services The protocol TCP IP allows the transfer of files between different computer systems This requires a program running on the two computers that controls this data transfer It is not necessary that the same operating or file system is used by both computers For example a file transfer between DOS WINDOWS and UNIX is possible One of the two partners must be configured as Host and the other one as Client However they may as well change their roles Usually the system which is able to perform several processes at the same time will play the host role The file transfer program usually used under TCP IP is FTP File Transfer Protocol An FTP host is installed as standard on the majority of UNIX systems If the TCP IP services are installed a terminal connection is possible using Start Programs Accessories Telnet or a data transfer via FTP by means of Start Run ftp OK Thus all computer systems supporting these universal protocols can be addressed UNIX VMS For further information please refer to the corresponding NT literature File Transfer via FTP The total scope of functions and commands is described in the FTP literature The following table therefore only
82. Demodulation 4 72 Detector iti eee 4 49 E 4 50 peak tinere t eMe 4 49 min peak oec eene nri ees 4 49 QUAasipOak ir ttr nee 4 50 BRMSi sire tm Pf De Nee e YR EE 4 50 PEES 4 49 Device reset 4 2 Directory nc DEN 4 171 anu c ES 4 171 Diskette 4 171 Display brightness soto eee NH des 4 136 i dei S 4 136 ALC eA eicere tis ox rra a eee yore Wo 4 134 deactivation during single sweep 4 30 power save 1 18 4 135 CLE To TEE 4 136 lile rete REEF EE 4 134 tint 4 136 title 4 134 Display line 4 128 Display mode 3 8 4 132 Split SCI OBITN soia DA EE CURE eR 3 8 4 133 Display range e clie d 4 6 level c o uoce IS 4 13 enn ition be TE PE E 4 10 Distribution function 4 108 Double dagger essen 5 14 E EDGE Midamble 3 tre NE ee 6 100 PER sett 6 101 Editing limit 4 123 paramet r ssns 2 2 a e e etes 3 16 table iet eet ER Dx ERR 3 21 Electrostatic discharge sse 1 14 EMI Protectio
83. ENTER The autologin mechanism is reenabled and is active when the instrument is rebooted the next time 1093 4820 12 4 234 E 3 FSP LAN Interface Using Network Drives Exploring My Computer 4 Mapping a network drive Toos gt Use the key combination lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt All Folders a to call the Windows NT start menu Type 1 My Computer E 3 Floppy 3 Inch Floppy Disk gt Click on Programs Windows NT a Network Neighborhood g C Local Disk Explorer one after the other Entire Network amp 3 0 Local Disk 1esl nt term amp J Local Disk gt Click on the line Network Neighborhood Analyzer S9 emil on Venus_1 Network Connection in the overview All Directories E d Efcserver GI Control Panel System Folder amp j Recycle Bin Piinters System Folder An overview of the available network di My Briefcase amp Dial Up Networking System Folder drives is displayed 8 object s 2 Map Network Drive x gt Click on Tools and then Map Network Drive or wf E The network paths available in the network es E are displayed in the overview Shared Connect As Help Directories PV Logon gt Mark the desired network path Shared Directories Expand by Default 3 Microsoft Windows Network NetWare Compatible Network E
84. EXCURSION v4 71 4 78 6 52 PEAK EIST 4 70 PEAK LIST OFF iet 4 71 PEAK LIST 6 124 PEAK SEARCH 4 62 4 69 4 71 6 88 5 5 5 0 6 88 PERCENT MARKER 4 108 6 49 PH NOISE 4 68 6 16 PHASE LI E2IES 6 153 PN OFFSET 6 212 POLARITY POS NEG 4 32 4 35 6 243 6 294 PORT x 6 170 POWER ABS REL 4 86 6 81 OFFSET tee 6 248 POWER ON OFF 4 84 6 73 6 75 6 76 6 78 6 82 POWERBEE rte 6 214 4 139 PREAMP ON OFFESPI 6 154 PREDEFINED COLORS 4 136 4 180 6 120 6 146 PRESCAN 6 153 PRESELECT ON OFFESP 6 154 PRINT 4 36 4 174 6 147 6 148 6 164 PRINT 4 174 6 147 6 148 6 164 PRINT TRACE 4 174 6 147 6 148 6 164 PULSE xx oret eie 6 115 PWH OFFSET eiie eee 4 189 RBW UNCOUPLED 6 207 QUASIPEAK eniti ient 6 220 6 220 RANGE 4
85. FSP RBU 3 kHz 1 12 Center 256 0002 MHz Fig 2 7 Measuring the level difference between the fundamental wave reference point level and the 2 harmonic The other harmonics are measured with steps 6 and 7 the center frequency being incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the up or down cursor key 1093 4820 12 2 12 E 2 FSP Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth One basic characteristics of the spectrum analyzer is that it can separate the spectral components of a composite signal The resolution with which the individual components are separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is too large spectral components may no longer be distinct i e they are displayed as a single component An RF sinewave signal is displayed on the screen of the spectrum analyzer with the passband characteristics of the set resolution filter RBW It is the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter that is displayed Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to the signals frequency difference If the resolution bandwidth and the frequency difference are equal a 3 dB level dip can be seen in the middle between the two signals The smaller the resolution bandwidth the deeper the level dip and the better the signal
86. FSP is in its default state 2 Switch on internal reference generator Press the SETUP key Press the softkeys SERVICE INPUT CAL The internal 128 MHz reference generator is now on The FSP s RF input is turned off 3 Set the center frequency and the frequency span gt Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz The FSP center frequency is set to 128 MHz gt Press the SPAN softkey and enter 1 MHz The FSP frequency span is set to 1 MHz 4 Switch on the marker gt Press the MKR key The marker is switched on and set to the signal maximum The level and the frequency at the marker are displayed in the marker info field 5 Switch on frequency counter Press the SIGNAL COUNT softkey in the marker menu The frequency count is displayed in the marker field at the top of the screen along with the set resolution 1 kHz is the default setting The sweep stops at the marker position and the FSP measures the frequency of the corresponding signal The frequency is output in the marker info field To distinguish the signal count result from the normal marker frequency display the marker is labeled with CNT 1093 4820 12 2 3 E 2 Level and Frequency Measurements FSP 6 Set the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 Hz gt Press the NEXT key gt Press the CNT RESOL 1 Hz softkey Fig 2 1 Frequency measurement with a frequency counter Note The frequency measurement with the integral frequency counter
87. Fig 4 32 Measurement of a 10 dB attenuator pad with 1dB DIV IEC bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RVAL 10dB The RECALL softkey restores the instrument setting with which the calibration was carried out This can be useful if the device setting was changed after calibration eg center frequency setting frequency deviation reference level etc The softkey is only available if the NETWORK mode has been selected e the memory contains a calibration data set IEC IEEE bus command CORR REC 1093 4820 12 4 210 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out by means of a reflection coefficient bridge GEN OUTPUT Mess briicke Fig 4 33 Test setup for reflection measurement Calibration of Reflection Measurement The calibration mechanism essentially corresponds to that of the transmission measurement NETWORK SOURCE CAL submenu The CAL REFL OPEN softkey starts the open circuit calibration During calibration the following message is displayed SOURCE CAL in progress IEC bus command CORR METH REFL CORR COLL OPEN The CAL REFL SHORT softkey starts the short circuit calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration curve is formed by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory The order of measurements is opt
88. Lines Display lines help to evaluate a trace as do markers The function of a display line is comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute values The FSP provides two different types of display lines e two horizontal level lines for marking levels Display Line 1 2 e two vertical frequency or time lines for marking frequencies or points in time Frequency Time Line 1 2 Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations at the right edge of the diagram D1 Display Line 1 D2 Display Line 2 1 Frequency Line 1 F2 Frequency Line 2 T1 Time Line 1 T2 Time Line 2 The level lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted in y direction The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can be shifted in x direction The DISPLAY LINES submenu for activating and setting the display lines appears different depending on the display mode set in the active measurement window frequency or time domain If the spectrum is shown span 0 the T ME LINE 1 and TIME LINE 2 softkeys are disabled whereas in the time domain span 0 the FREQUENCY LINE 1 and FREQUENCY LINE 2 softkeys are not available Note The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on off work like triple switches Initial situation The line is off softkey with gray background ist press lin
89. Measuring the Modulation Spectrum in Burst Mode with the Gated Sweep Function Since transmission systems compliant to 15136 use TDMA method the adjacent channel power must also be measured in burst mode An 15136 TDMA frame is divided into 6 time slots Two of these slots are assigned to a subscriber This means that the ratio of transmit time to off time for 15136 mobile phones is only 1 3 e g time slots 1 and 4 The FSP supports the measurement of the adjacent channel power in the TDMA mode with the Gated Sweep function Test setup with the R amp S Signal Generator SMIQ Ext Gate Trig IN Par Data Output Ext Ref Out Ext Ref IN The SMIQ has to be equipped with options SMIQ B10 or SMIQ B20 modulation coder and SMIQ B11 data generator Option SMIQ Z5 is required to trigger the FSP This option is connected to the SMIQ s parallel output port The BNC output Trigger 1 of the SMIQ Z5 provides a TTL trigger signal on the rising edge of the 15136 burst which is used to start the FSP sweep in the Gated Sweep mode Note The FSP s IF power trigger is not suitable for 15136 It triggers on every level edge of the input signal Since the modulation of the 15136 signal causes level dips even during the transmit burst there is no way of ensuring that the FSP is only triggered the burst edge Settings on signal generator SMIQ Switch the signal generator to the 15136 burst mode time slots 1 and 4 a
90. OFF TRANS EXT AM SOURCE CAL REFL POWER SHORT POWER CAL REFL OFFSET OPEN 1 0 SOURCE NORMALIZE CAL amp FREQUENCY REF VALUE OFFSE POSITION MODULATIO REF VALUE s RECALL MODULAT ION OFF 2 1093 4820 12 3 42 E 3 FSP Menu Overview Menu Overview Option Ext Generator Control gt gt CAL EXT SRC TRANS ON OFF CAL REFL SELECT SHORT GENERATOR CAL REF FREQUENCY OPEN SWEEP SOURCE CAL amp NORMALIZE REF VALUE POSITION REF VALUE RECALL EXT SOURCE 9 3 43 1093 4820 12 FSP Contents Instrument Functions Contents Chapter 4 Instrument Functions 4 Instrument FUNCIO HS 22 22 Saadani 4 1 FSP Initial Configuration PRESET 4 2 Mode Selection HOTKEY 4 3 Return to manual control LOCAL
91. Ordinarvusers gt on the User menu and select The menu for entering the user data will appear O O FulName Description Default Analyzer User Help Fill in the lines Username Password and Confirm Password Password and terminate the data entry with OK d The user data must comply with the User Must Change Password at Next Logon setti ngs on the network User Cannot Change Password Password Never Expires Account Disabled 25 Groups Dialin Only NOVELL network Configure NOVELL Client gt Use the key combination lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt to call the Windows NT start menu gt Click on Settings Control Panel and CSNW one after the other Bindary login NOVELL 3 x gt Click on Preferred Server gt Select the NOVELL server where the user is configured using Select Preferred Server 1093 4820 12 4 233 E 3 LAN Interface FSP NDS login more recent NOVELL Username Administrator versions Preferred Server ok gt Click on Default Tree and Context Current Preferred Server lt None gt Cancel Select Prefered Server gt m Enter the NDS Tree under Tree and the He hierarchical path where the user is defined C Default Tree and Contest 4 under Context Le Note This data can be obtained fro
92. Rohde amp Schwarz The following program packages have been successfully tested for compatibility with the instrument s software FS K3 software for measuring the noise factor and gain gt FS K4 software for measuring the phase noise Symantec PCAnywhere for remote control via soft front panel gt VNC for remote control via soft front panel FileShredder for deleting files from the hard disk Symantec Norton AntiVirus software for protection against viruses The use of other software or hardware may cause failures in the functions of the FSP A current list of the software authorized for use on the FSP can be obtained from your nearest Rohde amp Schwarz agency see list of addresses After installing software of other manufacturers from a disk it is necessary to reinstall the Windows NT Service Pack 5 unless the instrument is equipped with the B20 option Reinstallation of Service Pack 5 Notes gt It is not necessary to install the Service Pack 5 if the instrument is equipped with the B20 option since in this case the service pack files are installed automatically gt Ifthe service pack is not installed although there is no B20 option the following error message will be displayed At least one service or driver failed during system startup In this case the network installation is not fully operational To prevent faults it is therefore indispensable to reinstall the service pack see chapte
93. SERVICE softkey Press the NPUT HF softkey The internal signal path of the FSP is switched back to the RF input in order to resume normal operation 1093 4820 12 2 2 E 2 FSP Level and Frequency Measurements Measurement Example 2 Measuring Frequency with the Frequency Counter With the internal frequency counter frequencies can be measured more accurately than with the marker The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the FSP measures the frequency of the corresponding signal If an analog bandwidth 2300 kHz is used the frequency is measured by counting the zero crossings of the last IF With digital resolution bandwidths 10 Hz to 100 KHz the frequency measurement is performed in the IQ baseband by a special approximation algorithm The resolution range for the frequency measurement is 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz At bandwidths 2300 kHz the time required for the FSP to perform the frequency measurement is dependent on the selected counter resolution 1 frequency resolution in Hz The digital frequency approximation takes about 30 ms to perform a frequency measurement irrespective of the selected resolution The frequency measurement accuracy is determined by the reference frequency of the FSP and the selected counter resolution In the example the frequency of the 128 MHz internal reference generator is displayed with the marker 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to the default settings Press the PRESET key The
94. SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set Name name of data set Path directory in which the data set is located Items indicates whether the default selection of the data subset DEFAULT or user defined selection SELECTED will be recalled Comment Commentary regarding the data set IEC IEEE command MMEM LOAD STAT 1 a test02 The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary concerning the current data set A total of 60 characters are available for this purpose IEC IEEE command MMEM COMM Setup fuer GSM Messung 4 166 E 3 FSP Recalling Data Sets The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE RCL softkey opens a sub menu for selection of the data subsets FILE ITEMS TO SAVE RCL sub menu ITEMS TO SAVE RECALL CURRENT SETTINGS ENABLE ALL ITEMS DEFAULT CONFIG 4 J0 4 z T o eT PRENT NEXT The ITEMS TO SAVE RECALL table offers the following selectable data subsets Current Settings these settings include current configuration of general instrument parameters current measurement hardware settings active limit lines A data set may contain maximum 8 limit lines for each window It always contain the activated limit lines and the de activated limit lines used last if any Consequently the combination of the restored de activated limit lines depends on the sequence of use with com
95. TELNET WWW Services that is unique in the network is to be set GOPHER etc MICROSOFT Network NetBEUI Protocol Workstation In folder Identification Computer Name a or Server name that is unique in the network is to be TCP IP Protocol entered Subsequent Changing of the Network Configuration Computer Name etc Network After completion of the installation the Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings computer name can be adapted as follows Wind following inf i identif al eM HUE ATA RET Press the SETUP key this computer and the workgroup or domain that it will appear in Computer Name ANALYZER Workgroup WORKGROUP The SETUP menu opens gt Press softkey GENERAL SETUP The GENERAL SETUP menu opens gt Press softkey CONFIGURE NETWORK The configuration menu Network for the network settings opens gt Select folder Identification Both entries can be changed in the submenu Change The other settings can be changed after selecting the other folders However it is recommended to contact the network administrator before any changes Disabling the Autologin Mechanism Upon delivery the instrument is configured for automatic login into Windows NT This mechanism must be disabled if the instrument is operated in a network since the default user name instrument and the password normally are not identical to those of the network account To disable the autolog
96. Type 802 3 with OK Windows NT Setup x gt Enter C386 as the drive and click on Continue 1093 4820 12 4 229 E 3 LAN Interface Network x Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Adapter BIB 1 Intel EtherE xpress PRO Adapter 89 2 MS Loopback Adapter Bemove Properties Update Comments Microsoft TCP IP Properties 2 x IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing An IP address can be automatically assigned to this network card by a DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Specify an IP address IP Address 10 0 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Advanced Network Settings Change You must shut down and restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now Afterwards the following steps have to be performed FSP Afterwards the network drivers installed are displayed You now have to uninstall the network driver for the network card gt Select the Intel EtherExpress network driver gt Click on Remove gt Answer the confirmation query This action will permanently remove the component from the system Do you still wish to continue with YES The network
97. active 1 2 trace 1 trace 2 1 3 trace 1 trace 3 Indication of user instrument settings which influence the measuring result and which are not immediately obvious when viewing the measured values 3 5 E 2 The Screen SGL GAT TRG LVL FRQ PRN 750 Entry fields Entry window Tables 1093 4820 12 FSP The current instrument setting does not correspond to the one which applied when one of the displayed curves had been stored This occurs under the following circumstances e The instrument setting is modified while a measurement is being performed The instrument setting is modified in SINGLE SWEEP mode subsequent to the end of the sweep and no new sweep is started e The instrument setting is modified after setting the trace to VIEW The display is retained until the cause is eliminated by the user l e either a new sweep is started SINGLE SWEEP mode or the trace of interest is switched to BLANK Identification for screen A B When screen B is activated for the entry of test parameters this label is highlighted The sweep is set to SINGLE SWEEP The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG GATE input of the instrument The instrument is not triggered in FREE RUN mode A level offset 0 dB has been set A frequency offset 0 Hz has been set A printer output is active The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 The instrument is configured for op
98. alternatives of making the selection Example Switching on off the frequency counter gt Press key gt Press SIGNAL COUNT softkey Each time the softkey is pressed the marker info list is switched on or off If the softkey is active marker info list on it is illuminated SIGNAL m Example Selection of the reference internal or external Press SETUP key Press GENERAL SETUP softkey the GENERAL SETUP submenu is opened Press HEFERENCE INT EXT softkey With each pressing the checkmark on the softkey changes from INT internal reference to EXT external reference and vice versa When in the active setting the softkey menu item is illuminated REFERENCE 4 REFERENCE EXT INT 3 13 E 2 Setting Parameters 3 Various softkeys act like selection switches Only one softkey may be active at a time 4 The softkey is used to select the parameter the setting is made in an alphanumeric data entry window 1093 4820 12 FSP Example sweep setting gt Press SWEEP key gt Press CONTINOUS SWEEP softkey The continuous sweep is thus set The CONTINOUS SWEEP softkey is colored factory set green The second alternative a series of n sweeps according to the trigger definition can be selected via the SINGLE SWEEP softkey in the same menu Only one of the two softkeys can be active at a time the softkeys thus act like selection switches CONTINUOUS S
99. amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual SPECTRUM ANALYZER R amp S FSP3 1093 4495 03 R amp S FSP7 1093 4495 07 R amp S FSP13 1093 4495 13 R amp S FSP30 1093 4495 30 39 Volume 1 This Operating Manual consists of 2 volumes Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1093 4820 12 03 Dear Customer throughout this operating manual the abbreviation FSP is used for your Spectrum Analyzer R amp S FSP FSP Tabbed Divider Overview Volume 1 Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality EU Certificate of Conformity List of R amp S Representatives Manuals for Spectrum Analyzer FSP Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 2 Chapter 2 3 Chapter 3 4 Chapter 4 10 Chapter 10 Volume 2 Data Sheet Safety Instructions Manuals for Spectrum Analyzer FSP Tabbed Divider Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 10 Chapter 10 1093 4820 12 Tabbed Divider Overview Putting into Operation Getting Started Operation Functional Description Index Remote Control Basics Remote Control Commands Remote Control Program Examples Maintenance and Hardware Interfaces Error Messages Index RE E 2 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 99049 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation FSP3 1093 4495 03 Spectrumanalyzer FSP7 1093 4495 07 FSP1
100. any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement functions Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined for example If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat the noise marker from the previous example can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel bandwidth If however phase noise and noise that normally increases towards the carrier is dominant in the channel to be measured or if there are discrete spurious signals in the channel the channel power measurement method must be used to obtain correct measurement results Measurement Example Measuring the intrinsic noise of the FSP at 1 GHz in a 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth with the channel power function Test setup The RF input of the FSP remains open circuited or is terminated with 50 O Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz Press the SPAN key and enter 2 MHz 3 obtain maximum sensitivity set RF attenuation on the FSP to 0 dB Press the AMPT key Press the HF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 0 aB 4 Switch on and configure the channel power measurement Press the MEAS key Press the CHAN POWER ACP softkey The FSP activates the channel or adjacent channel power measurement a
101. arbitrary buttons The user may select one of the buttons using the cursor keys and initiate the associated action by means of the unit keys The ESC key is used to acknowledge the message without releasing any action Up to 3 traces in each measurement diagram can be displayed simultaneously Limit lines are used to mark level curves or spectral distributions which must not be exceeded or dropped below The FSP provides two display modes e Full Screen Split Screen 1093 4820 12 1 window the measurement is performed in the active diagram 2 windows the measurements are performed in both diagrams 3 7 E 2 The Screen FSP Full Screen In the full screen mode the settings and measurements are performed in the active visible window All indications on the screen refer to this window The designation SCREEN or SCREEN is inserted as enhancement label A or B on the right diagram margin Switching between the windows is by means of SCREEN A B hotkey The current measurement is terminated when its window is blanked out Switching from split screen to full screen mode is performed in menu DISP Split Screen In Split Screen mode the screen is divided into two halves RBW 1 MHz Marker 1 T1 UBH 10 MHz 13 04 dBm FULL Ref 10 dBm Att 20 dB 1 ms 287 000000 ps 1 CLRUR Center 935 2 MHz 100 RBH 30 kHz UBH 100 kHz Ref 10 dBm Att 20 dB
102. are related 1093 4820 12 2 17 E 2 Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals FSP Output level Intercept point Compression Intermodulation products Carrier level gt Input level Fig 2 14 Level of the 39 order intermodulation products as a function of the level of the useful signals The behavior of the signals can explained using an amplifier as an example The change in the level of the useful signals at the output of the amplifier is proportional to the level change at the input of the amplifier as long as the amplifier is operating in linear range If the level at the amplifier input is changed by 1 dB there is 1 dB level change at the amplifier output At a certain input level the amplifier enters saturation The level at the amplifier output does not increase with increasing input level The level of the 39 order intermodulation products increases 3 times faster than the level of the useful signals The 3 order intercept is the virtual level at which the level of the useful signals and the level of the spurious products are identical i e the intersection of the two straight lines This level cannot be measured directly as the amplifier goes into saturation or is damaged before this level is reached The 3 order intercept can be calculated from the known slopes of the lines the intermodulation distance d and the level of the useful signals TOI aps 2 3 with TOI Third Order Interce
103. assigned to and the active measuring function of the marker indicated The measuring function of the markers in the second field is indicated by the following abbreviations reference fixed active PHN phase noise measurement active CNT frequency counter active TRK signal track active NOI noise measurement active MOD measurement of AM modulation depth active TOI TOI measurement active 39 order intercept Indication of the result of the limit check Display of the x scaling The distance between two grid lines is displayed in this label The set center frequency or start frequency is displayed in this label depending on whether the keys FREQ SPAN or the softkeys START STOP were last pressed If span 0 Hz the center frequency is always displayed The set frequency range SPAN or the stop frequency is displayed depending on whether the keys FREQ SPAN softkeys START STOP were last pressed If span 0 Hz the trigger moment PRETRIGGER is displayed The status information on the left side of the diagram hint at irregularity e g UNCAL UNCAL is indicated under the following circumstances e correction data are switched off menu CAL CAL CORR OFF switch on CAL CORR ON or PRESET no valid correction data This may occur after a cold start of the instrument following a firmware update gt record correction data 3 4 E 2 FSP The Screen OVLD IFOVL MSG LOUNL OVEN Trace inf
104. averaging function The average is formed over several sweeps Averaging can be performed with any of the detectors available If the detector is automatically selected by FSP the sample detector is used Depending on the setting of AVG MODE LOG LIN the logarithmic level values or the measured power voltage values are averaged Averaging is restarted every time the AVERAGE softkey is pressed The trace memory is always cleared IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Description of averaging Averaging is carried out over the pixels derived from the measurement samples Several measured values may be combined in a pixel This means that with linear level display the average is formed over linear amplitude values and with logarithmic level display over levels For this reason the trace must be measured again when changing between L N and LOG display mode The settings CONT SINGLE SWEEP and running averaging apply to the average display analogously There are two methods for calculating the average For a sweep count 0 a running average is calculated according to the following formula 9 TRACE meas value 10 Due to the weighting between the new measured value and the trace average past values have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten sweeps With this setting signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal TRACE
105. be measured properly Even if the modulation spectrum is transmitted in the TDMA mode the measurement of the modulation spectrum will work because the burst edges are blanked out for the measurement by means of the Gated Sweep function The spectrum analyzer performs measurements only if the modulation spectrum is continuous when the burst is on However the IBW method fails for the spectrum created by the burst edges As the measurement is carried out with resolution bandwidths that are very small compared to the signal bandwidth a spurious amplitude distribution is obtained in the defined measurement channel because of the resolution bandwidth The small resolution bandwidth cannot settle to the peak amplitudes of the test signal This problem is avoided in the FSP by performing time domain measurements with the root raised cosine filter specified in the 15136 standard If the peak detector is used instead of the default RMS detector which is selected when the standard is selected the true adjacent channel power generated by the burst edges can also be measured Test setup test setup for this example and the settings for SMIQ are identical to those in the previous example Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Synchronize the FSP to an external reference frequency gt Press the SETUP key gt Set the REFERENCE softkey to EXT
106. being added to the power in the transmit channel A resolution bandwidth equal to 196 to 396 of the channel bandwidth should therefore be selected If the resolution bandwidth is too small the required sweep time becomes too long and the measurement time increases considerably Detector selection Since the power of the trace is measured within the channel bandwidth only the sample detector and RMS detector can be used These detectors provide measured values that make it possible to calculate the real power The peak detectors Pos Peak Neg Peak and Auto Peak are not suitable for noise power measurements as no correlation can be established between the peak value of the video voltage and power With the sample detector a value sample of the IF envelope voltage is displayed at each trace pixel Since the frequency spans are very large compared with the resolution bandwidth span RBW 2501 sinewave signals present in the noise might be lost i e they are not displayed This is not important for pure noise signals however since a single sample in itself is not important it is the probability distribution of all measured values that counts The number of samples for power calculation is limited to the number of trace pixels 501 for the FSP Note To increase the repeatability of measurements averaging is often carried out over several traces AVERAGE softkey in the TRACE menu This gives spurious results for channel power measu
107. can be converted into markers with absolute value display by means of the MARKER NORM DELTA softkey When MARKER 1 is the active marker pressing the MARKER NORM DELTA softkey switches on an ad ditional delta marker Pressing the MARKER 1 to 4 softkey again switches off the selected marker Example PRESET FSP is set to the default setting MKR On calling the menu MARKER 1 is switched on 1 high lighted in the softkey and positioned on the maximum value of the trace It is a normal marker and the MARKER NORMAL softkey is highlighted MARKER 2 MARKER 2 is switched on 2 highlighted in the softkey It is automatically defined as a delta marker on switching on SO the DELTA is is highlighted on softkey MARKER NORM DELTA The fre quency and level of MARKEH 2 with reference to MARKER 1 are output in the marker info field MARKER NORM DELTA The MARKER NORM DELTA softkey is highlighted MARKER 2 becomes a normal marker The frequency and level of MARKER 2 are output as absolute values in the marker info field MARKER 2 MARKER 2 is switched off MARKER 1 is the active marker for entry The frequency and level of MARKER 1 are output in the marker info field IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK ON CALC MARK X lt value gt CALC MARK Y CALC DELT ON CALC DELT MODE ABS REL CALC DELT X value CALC DELT X REL CALC DELT Y When several traces are being displayed the
108. configuring the printout The PRINT SCREEN PRINT TRACE and PRINT TABLE softkeys start the desired printout Printing can be stopped by means of HARDCOPY ABORT The DEVICE 1 and 2 softkeys are used for selecting and configuring the output interface The COLORS submenu allows the switchover between black and white and color printouts default provided that the printer connected can produce color printouts In addition the colors are set in this submenu e SCREEN Output in screen colors OPTIMIZED default Instead of light colors dark colors are used for traces and markers trace 1 blue trace 1 black trace 3 green markers turquoise e USER DEFINED This option enables the user to change the colors at will It provides the same setting functions as the DISPLAY CONFIG DISPLAY NEXT menu Notes 1 With SCREEN and OPTIMIZED selected the background will always be white and the grid black With USER DEFINED these colors can be selected too 2 Upon activation of the submenu the color display is switched over to the selected printout colors When the menu is quit the original color setting is restored The COMMENT SCREEN A and COMMENT SCHEEN B softkeys allow text to be added to the printout date and time are inserted automatically Use the NSTALL PRINTER softkey to install additional printer drivers 1093 4820 12 4 173 E 3 Measurement Documentation FSP 1093 4820 12 The PRINT SCREEN softkey starts the output
109. contains the major functions Setting up the connection Click on Start and then Run in the task bar The DOS command FTP starts the program The command OPEN lt gt sets up the connection XX XX XX XX IP address e g 89 0 0 13 Data transfer The command PUT lt dateiname gt transfers the data to the target system The command GET lt dateiname gt transfers the data from the target system The command TYPE B transfers the data in BINARY format no conversion takes place The command TYPE A transfers the data in ASCII format converting control characters so that text files can also be read on the target system Examples PUT C AUTOEXEC BAT sends the file AUTOEXEC BAT to the target system LCD DATA changes the current directory on the local machine to subdirectory DATA CD SETTING changes to the subdirectory SETTING on the target system dateiname File name e g DATA TXT 1093 4820 12 4 239 E 3 LAN Interface Changing the directories 1093 4820 12 FSP The command LCD lt path gt changes the directory on the local machine as with Dos The command LDIR shows the directory contents on the local machine These commands refer to the file system of the FSP If the L is omitted ahead of the commands they apply to the target system 4 240 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface RSIB Interface The instrument is equipped with an RSIB int
110. dB Fig 4 9 Display of the amplitude probability distribution 1093 4820 12 4 106 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS RBH 3 kHz Marker 1 T1 UBW 10 kHz 8 213300064 APD Ref 20 dBm Att 20 dB 6 8 3 00 dB Center 802 MHz 1 Mean Pur 10 dB OF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function SAMPLES Samples 1 1 Mean Power 37 27 dBm SCALING 9 Peak Power 27 46 dBm 2 88 dB Crest Factor Fig 4 10 Display of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF Alternate to the histogram display of the APD the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF can be displayed It shows the probability of an amplitude exceeding a specific value For the APD function the x axis is scaled in absolute values in dBm whereas for the CCDF function the x axis is scaled relative to the MEAN POWER measured Definitions Crest factor peak voltage to rms CCDF complementary cumulative distribution function Note During an active statistic measurement the functions FULL SCREEN SPLIT SCREEN and selection of the active diagram via SCREEN A SCREEN B are disabled 1093 4820 12 4 107 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP MEAS SIGNAL STATISTIC submenu p X AXIS The SIGNAL STATISTIC softkey opens a REF LEVEL submenu for measurement of signal v statistics RANGE In the submenu measurement of amplitude a probability den
111. data can be edited accordingly Network printers can also be addressed like normal printers A connection is possible to DOS WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS WINDOWS95 WINDOWS NT 1093 4820 12 4 232 E 3 FSP LAN Interface Defining Users After the network driver software has been installed the instrument will output an error message on the next power on as there is no user called Instrument user name for NT autologin in the network It is therefore necessary to define a common user for Windows NT and the network and to disable the autologin mechanism subsequently The definition of new users in the network is done by the network administrator For definition of a new user on the instrument the User Manager is required User Manager gt Use the key combination lt CTRL gt UE faeces queis EE ESC to call the Windows NT start Username Full Name Description menu k Administrator Built in account for act 6 Guest Builtin account for guq gt Click on Programs Administrative instrument Default Analyzer Use Tools Common and User Manager one after the other The User Manager menu opens Administrators Members can fully administer the computer dom Backup Operators Members can bypass file security to back up file Guests Users granted guest access to the computer do Select User instrument Power Users Members can share directories and printers Replicator Supports file replication in a domain uat
112. device must be provided at system level Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed Prior to performing any work on the unit or opening the unit the latter must be discon nected from the supply network Any adjustments replacements of parts main tenance or repair may be carried out only by authorized R amp S technical personnel Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety eg power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must be performed after each replacement of parts relevant to safety visual inspection PE conductor test insulation resistance leakage current measurement func tional test continued overleaf 10 11 12 Safety Instructions Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC950 EN60950 Lithium batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries away from children If the battery is replaced improperly there is danger of explosion Only replace the battery by R amp S type see spare part list Lithium batteries are suitable for environmen tally friendly disposal or specialized recycling Dispose them into appropriate containers only Do not short circuit the battery Equipment returned or sent in for repair must be packed in the original packing or in packing with electrostatic and mechanical protecti
113. driver for the network card is removed gt Use Close to leave the dialog You are then requested to enter an IP address gt change the Adapter setting gt Click on Specify an IP address gt Enter the following IP address and subnet mask IP address 10 0 0 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 gt Click on OK to leave the dialog The restart request is displayed gt Answer You must shutdown with No gt disable the start request for user and password the autologin mechanism has to be enabled see section Reenabling the Autologin Mechanism before the service pack is installed 1093 4820 12 4 230 E 3 FSP LAN Interface gt The Service Pack 5 of Windows NT must be reinstalled afterwards see chapter 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software gt Ifthe instrument is equipped with the firmware application FS K3 noise measurement software or FS K4 phase measurement software the modified IP address must also be entered in the configuration of these programs See the relevant documentation for details Notes gt Itis not necessary to install the Service Pack 5 the instrument is equipped with the B20 option gt Ifthe service pack is not installed although there is no B20 option the following error message will be displayed At least one service or driver failed during system startup In this case the network installation is not fully operational
114. easily possible FREQUENCY SWEEP SOURCE FREQ REC FREQ OFFSET SRC STATE POMERLdBa1 NUN DEN OFFSET RESULT 1 8826 1 1 Hz Hz 3GHz 2 38dBn 1 1 Hz 3 2GHz SRC Index of selected generator STATE Selects the active generator Only one generator can be active at a time The operating mode of the active generator is set to remote control in the SELECT GENERATOR table POWER Permits to enter the generator level within the limits P MIN to P MAX of the SELECT GENERATOR table NUM Numerator DEN Denominator OFFSET Offset used to derive the generator frequency from the current frequency of the FSP according to the following formula F _F Numerator Generator Analyzer 4 Offset Denominator ds Note that the frequencies resulting from start and stop frequency of the FSP do not exceed the allowed generator range gt If the start frequency lies below F MIN the generator is only switched on when F MIN is reached gt If the stop frequency lies above MAX the generator is switched off When the generator is subsequently switched on using the EXT SRC ON OFF softkey the stop frequency is limited to F MAX gt f the stop frequency lies below F MIN the generator is switched off and the following error message output ERROR GENERATOR RANGES EXEEDED EXT GEN SWITCHED OFF gt In the time domain Span 0 Hz the generator frequency is derived from the set receive frequency of the FSP us
115. elements of commands System T T1 T2 trace info oie e tees 3 5 T1 T38 lrace info a enit Rees 3 5 Table operation Trenira cone 3 21 scrolling 3 23 TDF enhancement lable 3 6 TDS enhancement 3 6 Test 1 18 selftest 2 4 161 Text paramleler 5 3 ere ese reed 5 14 DG LAM IN ossi nitus nus 8 13 IG QUEM IN ea en ieee 8 13 Third Order Intercept 4 115 Threshold Time Tint Title for the active diagram TOI TT ACO T 4 41 4 42 aVerage cei oie eee ad eyed averaging blank GleavWiile 5 1 4 42 roo 4 48 A A 4 44 4 54 max hold TEREST TERT E 4 42 min hold os os i co tbt eut 4 45 position for 0 difference 4 54 Select eerte 4 41 signal tracking 4 9 Trace info 82915 Tracking generator sese 4 187 Transducer Activating Entry x eee hes Transmission measurement 2 Transmission parameters 5 232 TRG enhancement 3 6 Trigger OXIOINAl 4 32 4 34 1093 4820 12 10 10 FSP TUN oie nis anita 4 3
116. extensions contents and designations of data subsets Designation in the Contents table SEL ITEMS TO SAVE RECALL Configuration CURRENTSETTINGS current settings of the measurement hardware and the related title SET data if present EE active limit lines LIN DENEN current configuration of general instrument parameters CFG Po configuration for hardcopy output HCS Po tracking generator settings only with option tracking generator TCI Additional ALL LIMIT LINES all limit lines LIA configuration data SOURCE CAL DATA Settings for source calibration TS1 only with option tracking generator TS2 Correction data for source calibration TC1 only with option tracking generator TC2 Measurement ALL TRACES measurement data trace 1 to trace 3 screen A TR1 to TR3 results 22 measurement data trace 1 to trace 3 screen TR4 to TR6 1093 4820 12 4 163 E 3 Recalling Data Sets FSP Saving a Data Set gt v Select the data subsets to be saved sub menu ITEMS TO SAVE RCL configurations measurement and calibration data softkey ITEMS TO SAVE RCL Possibly enter a comment softkey EDIT COMMENT Enter the directory in which the data set should be saved in table SAVE DATA SET softkey SAVE Enter the name of the data set which should be saved softkey SAVE and save the data set by pressing the ENTER key Data set names may contain both letters and numbers in the simplest case only numbers If required th
117. frequency to 100 MHz and the stop frequency to 400 MHz Press the FREQ key gt Press the START softkey and enter 100 MHz Press the STOP softkey and enter 400 MHz The FSP displays the fundamental and the 2 and 3 harmonics of the input signal 4 Set the RF attenuation to 0 dB to obtain maximum sensitivity Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 0 aB 5 Reduce the video bandwidth to average suppress noise Press the BW key Press the COUPLING RATIO softkey Select HBW VBW NOISE 10 using the cursor keys The video bandwidth VBW will now always be set to a value which is 10 times smaller than the resolution bandwidth RBW 6 Switch on the marker Press the MKH key Marker 1 is switched on and is positioned on the signal maximum fundamental wave at 128 MHz The level and the frequency of the marker are displayed in the marker info field 1093 4820 12 2 7 E 2 Measurement of Harmonics FSP 7 Switch on the delta marker and measure the harmonic distance gt Press the MARKER 2 softkey in the marker menu Marker 2 is activated as a delta marker Delta 2 T1 It appears automatically on the largest harmonic of the signal The frequency and level related to marker 1 are indicated in the marker field at the top of the screen gt Press the MARKER 3 softkey in the marker menu Marker 3 is activated as a delta marker Delta 3 T1 It appears automatically on the next largest h
118. gate settings to be output on a printer IEC IEEE bus command The modulation spectrum of a GSM or PCS1900 signal is to be measured using the gated sweep function The signal is generated by a Signal Generator SME03 whose RF output is directly connected to the RF input of FSP Settings on SMEO03 FREQ 802 MHz Level 0 dBm Return Digital Mod Select GMSK Select Source Select PRBS Select Return Level Attenuation Select 60 dB Return The supplies a GMSK modulated TDMA signal GSM 1093 4820 12 4 36 E 3 FSP Analyzer Triggering the Sweep Settings on FSP Conventions KEY Menu called by this key All information between the brackets refers to this menu Number Numeric value to be entered for the parameter on hand SOFTKEY Softkey to be used for making a selection or entering a value PRESET FREQ CENTER 802 MHz SPAN 3 6 MHz AMPT REF LEVEL 0 dBm RF ATTEN MANUAL 10 dB BW RES BW MANUAL 30 kHz TRACE TRACE 1 DETECTOR RMS SWEEP SWEEPTIME MANUAL 50 ms TRIG EXTERN GATED TRIGGER GATE SETTINGS GATE MODE EDGE POLARITY POS SWEEPTIME MANUAL 1 ms GATE DELAY 300 ps GATE LENGTH 250 us The following figure shows the screen display for setting gate parameters The vertical lines for gate delay GD and gate length GL can be adjusted to the burst signal by entering numeric values or by means of the rollkey e RBM 38 kHz UBU 388 kHz GATE NODE
119. grid to the vertical center of the grid RBH 3 MHz TG 20 dBm UBM 18 MHz Att dB 1s Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN _HETUORK SCREEN B Fig 4 18 Normalized display In SPLIT SCREEN operation the normalization is switched on in the currently active window Different types of normalization can be active in the two windows Normalization is aborted when the NETWORK operating mode is quit IEC IEEE bus command CORR ON 1093 4820 12 4 192 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 The REF VALUE POSITION softkey marks a reference position in the active window at which the normalization result calculated difference with a reference trace is displayed If no reference line is active the softkey switches on a reference line and activates the input of its position The line can be moved within the grid boundaries The reference line is switched off by pressing the softkey again The function of the reference line is explained in the section Calibration mechanisms REF POSITION RBH 3 MHz 5 UBM 18 MHz CAL Ref dBm Att dB SWT 1s TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 llHz Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN SCREEH B Fig 4 19 Normalized measurement shifted with REF VALUE POSITION 50 IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RPOS 10PCT 4 193 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP The REF VALUE softkey a
120. ien eser dar 4 28 THAGE xu is esc vec ash ce tas IL E 4 41 TRIG 5e iter debere eim 4 31 Index Keyboard CODRBeCcliOnu s oie tim Ame ee EA 1 20 connector kHZ aB key tree L LAN line uL offset phase noise offset tracking generator Telerenca i eu eto tirer so ioco 4 13 Limit ACP measurement evaluation range esses probability range sese Limit check a ACP measurement Limit Gheck ist oni etes Limit line GOD PEE delete domain edit sns limit check offset Save scaling select shift unit noreste deed peer be re Line Frequency Frequency Line 1 2 4 129 level Display Line 1 2 4 129 HIPS EBS de nee md 4 120 reference tracking generator 4 193 4 208 threshold intu 4 77 Time Time Line 1 2 4 130 Line system Lines LO exclude Login out NT controller LOGO xsi een Lower case 2 6 EPT interfaces mA 8 6 Maintenance ia ERREUR Ee 8 1 Manual operation neu 5 4 5 6 SWIICh 10 iii i tit eee gati ed 4 4 Marker adc ies 4 57 center frequency 4 75 stepsize 1 4 80 indication 34 aB Down 4 69 TOLMAN PT 4 57
121. if the limit line is compatible with the measurement window of the given trace Limit Check Activate automatic violation check for upper lower limits Trace Select the measurement curve to which the limit is assigned Margin Define margin Name and Compatible Enabling limit lines A maximum of 8 limit lines can be enabled at any one time In split screen mode they may be assigned to screen A screen B or to both screens A check mark at the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled A limit line can only be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible column i e only when the horizontal display time or frequency and vertical scales are identical to those of the display in the measurement window Lines with the unit dB are compatible to all dB settings of the Y axis If the scale of the y axis or the domain frequency or time axis are changed all non compatible limit lines are automatically switched off in order to avoid misinterpretation The limit lines must be enabled anew when the original display is re displayed IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 NAME GSM1 CALC LIM3 UPP STAT ON CALC LIM4 LOW STAT ON 4 120 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Limit Lines Limit Check Activate automatic limit violation check When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated a GO NOGO test is performed in the active screen In the center of the diagram a display window appears which indicates the resul
122. in LAN interface option FSP B16 IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 151 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP The NETWORK LOGIN softkey opens the dialog box with the auto login settings Login Name Password instrument Auto Login Cancel When a network is installed the preset user name Instrument and the password instrument can be adapted to a new user see section Defining Users in the LAN interface manual With the Auto Login option active an automatic registration is performed during booting with the specified user name and password Otherwise the Windows NT login request is displayed during booting Notes PC keyboard with trackball or additional mouse instead is required for the installation configuration of the network support The softkey is only available with built in LAN interface option FSP B16 IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 152 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Enabling Firmware Options The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu that allows license keys for firmware options to be entered Previously installed options are displayed in a table that opens automatically 1093 4820 12 FIRMWARE OPTIONS REMOVE OPTION SPECTRUM DIAG B Softkey INSTALL OPTION opens the data entry for the license keycode of a firmware option On entry of a valid license key t
123. indicate the printer driver path after clicking on Finish the Service Pack must be reinstalled after this printer installation see chapter 1 section Installing Windows NT software lt Back Carce Finally the instrument must be configured for printouts of the measurement screen with this printer For details please refer to softkey DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the hardcopy menu 1093 4820 12 4 182 E 3 FSP Measurement Documentation Installation of a Network Printer with Option FSP B16 only Printers Torx After opening the Printer dialog window View proceed with the installation as follows gt Double click Add Printer line The Add Printer Wizard window is opened This window guides the user through the printer driver installation Canon Bubble Jet BJ 330 44 2 Canon Bubble Jet BJC 800 Canon Bubble Jet BJC 800 44 Epson LO 1500 ew Epson LQ 1500 4 Epson Stylus COLOR ESC P 2 75 object s Add Printer Wizard gt Click Network printer server and then This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer Next connections This printer will be managed by A list of selectable printers is displayed Computer All settings will be managed and configured on this computer Connect to a printer on another machine settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator lt B
124. is switched off STANDBY Otherwise correct operation of the mouse and instrument cannot be guaranteed In order to ease up operation of Windows NT the FSP provides an option for connecting a mouse to the PS 2 mouse connector MOUSE at the rear panel of the instrument The mouse type supported is Microsoft mouse It is available as option PS B1 Order No 1006 6359 02 Note The recommended keyboard PSP Z2 is equipped with a trackball for mouse control Connecting an additional mouse will cause interface conflicts and lead to malfunctions of the instrument The section Instrument Interfaces in Chapter 8 contains the interface description of the connector After connection and subsequent power on the mouse is automatically recognized Special settings such as mouse cursor speed etc can be performed in the Windows NT menu START SETTINGS CONTROL PANEL MOUSE 1093 4820 12 1 21 E 3 Connecting an External Monitor FSP Connecting an External Monitor Caution The monitor may only be connected when the instrument is switched off STANDBY Otherwise the monitor may be damaged Do not modify the screen driver display type and display configuration since this will severely affect instrument operation The instrument is equipped with a rear panel connector MONITOR for the connection of an external monitor MONITOR After connecting the external monitor the instrument needs to be rebooted in order to recognize the m
125. level and frequency indicated by the marker are displayed in the marker info field at the upper edge of the screen These are the measurement results The info field header indicates the number of the marker MARKER 1 and the number of the trace on which the marker is positioned T1 Trace 1 Increasing the Frequency Resolution During a Frequency Measurement with a Marker The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the pixel resolution of the trace The FSP uses 501 pixels for a trace i e at a frequency span of 1 MHz each pixel corresponds to a frequency range of approx 2 kHz This gives a maximum error of 1 KHz To increase the pixel resolution of the trace the frequency span has to be reduced 7 Reduce the frequency span to 10 kHz gt Press the SPAN key gt Enter 70 from the numeric keypad and terminate the entry with the KHz key Note If the SPAN is changed the resolution bandwidth RES BW the video bandwidth VIDEO BW and the sweep time SWEEP TIME are also set to new values because they are defined as coupled functions in the standard PRESET settings The internal reference signal is measured with a span of 10 kHz The pixel resolution of the trace is now approx 20 Hz 10 kHz span 501 pixel i e the accuracy of the marker frequency display is increased to approx 10 Hz 8 Switch on the RF input again for normal operation of the analyzer Press the PRESET key or press the SETUP key and the
126. of Tracking Generator option FSP B9 TG Signal input connector for external modulation of Tracking Generator option FSP B9 Output connector for 20 4 MHz IF replaced by CCVS IN OUT if option FSP B6 is built in Selectable CCVS input output only if option FSP B6 is built in LAN Interface option FSP B16 Reserved for options Rear View see Chapter 8 see Chapter 4 and 8 see Chapter 4 E 2 Getting Started with the Instrument FSP Getting Started with the Instrument The following section describes how to activate the instrument and how to connect external devices like e g printer and monitor Chapter 2 explains the operation of the instrument using simple measurement examples Important note Before turning the instrument on care should be taken that the following conditions are fulfilled instrument cover is place and tightened by the corresponding screws e fan openings are free from obstructions e signal levels at the connectors are all within specified limits signal outputs are connected correctly and not overloaded Ignoring these conditions may cause damage to the instrument Preparing the Instrument for Operation gt gt Take the instrument out of the shipping box and check whether the items listed in the packing list and in the lists of accessories are all included gt Remove the two protective caps from the front and rear of t
127. of the FSP Fig 2 21 below shows the change in the displayed noise depending on the set reference level at 10 kHz and 300 kHz resolution bandwidth With digital bandwidths 100 kHz the noise increases sharply at high reference levels because of the dynamic range of the A D converter 14 12 RBW 10 kHz 10 to g gt 26 52 24 i RBW 300 kHz 2 0 2 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Reference level Fig 2 19 Change in displayed noise as a function of the selected reference level at bandwidths of 10 kHz and 300 kHz 30 dBm reference level Impact of the resolution bandwidth The sensitivity of a spectrum analyzer also directly depends on the selected bandwidth The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth for the FSP 10 Hz for FFT filtering 1 Hz If the bandwidth is increased the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth The FSP has bandwidth settings in 1 3 10 sequence Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx 5 dB 4 77 dB precisely If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10 the displayed noise increases by a factor of 10 i e 10 dB Because of the way the resolution filters are 1093 4820 12 2 23 E 2 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise FSP designed the sensitivity of spectrum an
128. only gives correct results for RF sinewaves or discrete spectral lines To meet the specified measurement accuracy the marker should be more than 25 dB above noise 7 Switch the RF input again for normal operation of the analyzer gt Press the PRESET key or press the SETUP key and the SERVICE softkey gt Press the INPUT RF softkey The internal signal path of the FSP is switched back to the RF input in order to resume normal operation Hint For bandwidths between 300 kHz and 10 MHz the FSP uses a frequency counter at an IF of 20 4 MHz The time for measuring the frequency is therefore inversely proportional to the selected resolution i e at a resolution of 1 Hz a gate time of 1 second is required for the counter For digital bandwidths below 300 kHz the frequency is measured in the baseband by digital frequency approximation The time required for measuring the frequency is approx 30 ms irrespective of the selected resolution When measuring the frequency of a sinewave carrier at a high resolution it is therefore best to set a resolution bandwidth of 100 kHz or less The measurement time will then be reduced to a minimum 1093 4820 12 2 4 E 2 FSP Measurement of Harmonics Measurement of Harmonics Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best by means of a spectrum analyzer In general every signal contains harmonics which are larger than o
129. parameters are however the same for all tables Shown below is the typical entry of parameters into a table Note Most of the tables are coupled to a softkey menu which provides further functions for editing table entries such as deletion of tables copying of lines or columns marking of table elements restoring default states The definition of individual tables and the operation of particular editing functions can be looked up in the description of the corresponding softkey menu 1 Activating the table e f the menu has only one table the latter is activated automatically subsequent to calling this menu in most cases and the marking cursor is positioned to the top field of the left column e f the menu contains various tables the table of interest must be selected using the softkey which is labeled with the title of the table 2 Selection of the parameter marking cursor NAME COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECK TRACE MARGIN GSM22UP v off 1 0 dB V LP1GHz on 2 Y dB V LP1GHz off 1 MIL461A off 2 Selection of the parameter or the setting is made using the marking cursor gt Press the cursor keys to move to the wanted field or gt Rotate the roll key until the wanted field is marked The cursor keys are used to specify the direction of the roll key movement horizontal or vertical When shifting the cursor elements may be skipped which can not be edited Table eleme
130. power measurement Set the optimum span 5 MHz resolution bandwidth RBW 30 kHz video bandwidth VBW 300 kHz and detector RMS for the measurement automatically The absolute channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and alternate channels are displayed on the screen Set the reference level equal to the channel power measured Set the measured channel power as a reference for the subsequent measurements Select relative measurement related to the reference power set with SET REFERENCE result 0 dB Select power measurement related to 1 Hz bandwidth result 60 9 dB Set the center frequency to 805 MHz The FSP measures the channel power at 1 23 MHz bandwidth and outputs the result in dB relative to the reference power and 1 Hz bandwidth 4 102 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS Measurement of Occupied Bandwidth An important characteristics of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth In a radio communications system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distortion free transmission in adjacent channels The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power A percentage between 10 and 99 9 can be set on the FSP MEAS OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH menu gt OCCUP BW The OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH _ softkey activates OFF measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the POWER current configuration and opens the sub
131. ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 IEC IEEE bus command BAND RAT 0 1 This setting is only effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu The DEFAULT COUPLING softkey sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 3 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 50 in the COUPLING RATIO submenu default setting COUPLING RATIO softkey not highlighted IEC IEEE bus command BAND AUTO ON BAND VID AUTO ON SWE TIME AUTO ON The FILTER TYPE softkey opens the selection list for different filter types In the range up to 30 kHz digital band filters with Gaussian characteristic and filtering with FFT algorithm can be selected FILTER TYPE CHANNEL RRC NORMAL FFT For resolution bandwidths up to 100 kHz digital bandpasses are used An FFT is performed For that purpose the filtered IF signal is digitized and then transformed into the spectral domain via FFT The transformation range depends on the selected filter bandwidths and can be set between 4 kHz to 50 kHz If the span is larger than the transformation range several transformations are performed and the results are appended to each other in the spectral domain If the span is smaller than the transformation range the measurement results are interpolated when the number of measurement points provided by the FFT is smaller than the number of display points in x direction 501 A flattop window
132. rear panel only in case of using a keyboard without trackball see sections Connecting a Mouse and Connecting a Keyboard 2 Switching to Windows NT start menu and opening the system control The combination of keys lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt is used to switch to the Windows NT start menu The system control panel is then opened in the NT start menu using the sequence SETTINGS CONTROL PANEL 3 Configuration of the interface LPT Interface LPT needs no configuration COM The COM interface must first be assigned to the operating system owner OS in menu SETUP GENERAL SETUP The configuration of the serial interface can then be performed either in the Windows NT menu START SETTINGS CONTROL PANEL PORTS or in the FSP SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu The parameters Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control determine the transmission parameters of the interface They must correspond to the specifications of the printing device see the operating manual for the printer 1093 4820 12 1 23 E 3 Connecting an Output Device FSP Note The settings made for the serial interface in the menu SETUP GENERAL SETUP overwrite the settings in the NT menu However settings in the Windows NT menu do not overwrite those of the SETUP menu This means that the settings are only valid as long as the interface is assigned to the operating system 4 Selection and installation of the printer driver The selection and installation of the prin
133. resolution If there are large level differences between signals the resolution is determined by selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected The measure of selectivity used for spectrum analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth 2 shape factor For the FSP the shape factor for bandwidths up to 100 kHz is 5 and for larger bandwidths 15 i e the 60 dB bandwidth of the 30 kHz filter is 150 kHz and that of the 300 kHz filter is 4 5 MHz Although the 3 dB bandwidths only differ by a factor of 10 the 60 dB bandwidths differ by a factor of 30 The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths has to be traded off against longer sweep times for the same span The sweep time required to allow the resolution filters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed is given by the following formula SWT ke Span RBW 1 SWT max sweep time for correct measurement k factor depending on type of resolution filter 2 5 for analog IF filter 2300 kHz 1 for digital IF filters 100 kHz Span frequency display range RBW resolution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 3 the sweep time is increased by a factor of 9 Note The impact of the video bandwidth on the sweep time is not taken into account in 1 For the formula to be valid the video bandwidth must be x the resolution bandwidth For bandwi
134. selects the decimal separator between decimal point comma with floating point numerals for the function ASCII FILE EXPORT With the selection of the decimal separator different language versions of evaluation programs eg MS Excel can be supported IEC IEEE bus command FORM DEXP DSEP POIN The COPY TRACE softkey copies the screen contents of the current trace into another trace memory The desired memory is selected by entering the number 1 20r 3 Upon copying the contents of the selected memory is overwritten and the new contents displayed in view mode IEC IEEE bus command TRAC COPY TRACE1 TRACE2 1093 4820 12 4 48 E 3 FSP Analyzer Traces Selection of Detector The detectors of the FSP are implemented as pure digital devices The detectors available are the peak detectors which determine the maximum and or the minimum value from a number of samples the rms detector which measures the power within a pixel the average the quasipeak and the sample detector The sample detector routes through the sampled data without any modification or performs a data reduction by suppressing measured values that cannot be displayed The peak detectors compare the current level value with the maximum or minimum level from the previously sampled data When the number of samples defined by the instrument setting is reached the samples are combined in displayable pixels Each of the 501 pixels of the display
135. serves as a window in the time domain so that high amplitude precision with good selection is achieved A flat top window serves as a window in the time domain so that high amplitude accuracy as well as good selection are achieved 4 24 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time Sweep time Defined by the selected bandwidth and span reason FFT filtering is a block transformation It cannot be changed softkey deactivated Detector Sample detector and peak detector are available Peak detector is active when AUTO SELECT is selected Video bandwidth Not defined in case of FFT therefore cannot be set softkeys deactivated Compared to bandpasses FFT filters lead to significantly reduced sweep times For a span of 50 kHz and a bandwidth of 100 Hz for instance the sweep time is reduced from 5 s to 40 ms FFT filters are particularly suitable for stationary signals sinusoidal signals or signals that are continuously modulated in time For burst signals TDMA or pulsed signals normal filters are preferable Note As soon as the FFT filters are active RBW lt 30 kHz the sweep time display field SWT is replaced by the acquisition time AQT display field FFT is a block transformation so the result depends on the time relation between the data set to be transformed and the burst or pulsed signal A gated sweep measurement for TDMA signals is therefore not provided if FFT filters are used When th
136. sets the maximum power to be measured The function is identical to softkey REF LEVEL in menu AMPT For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the MEAN POWER measured IEC IEEE command CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV value 4 109 E 3 MEAS Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The X AXIS RANGE softkey changes the level range to be covered by the statistics measurement selected The function is identical to softkey RANGE LOG MANUAL in menu AMPT IEC IEEE command CALC STAT SCAL X RANG value The Y AXIS MAX VALUE softkey defines the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 As the y axis scaling has a logarithmic axis the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade IEC IEEE command CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP value The Y AXIS MIN VALUE softkey defines the lower limit of the displayed probability range As the y axis scaling has a logarithmic axis the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Valid values are in the range 0 value 1 IEC IEEE command CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW value see below The DEFAULT SETTINGS softkey resets the x and y axis scalings to their PRESET values x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range
137. short far iberr unsigned long far ibontl C format Unix short RSDLLibrsp short ud char spr short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle Spr Pointer to status byte Example RSDLLibrsp ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl 1093 4820 12 4 248 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface RSDLLibonl This function switches the device to online or offline mode When it is switched to offline mode the interface is released and the device handle becomes invalid By calling RSDLLibfind again the communication is set up again VB format Function RSDLLibonl ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibonl short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibontl C format short RSDLLibonl short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle v Device state 0 local 1 remote Example RSDLLibonl ud 0 ibsta iberr ibcntl RSDLLTestSRQ This function checks the status of the SRQ bit VB format Function RSDLLTestSrq ByVal ud Result ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLTestSrq short ud short far result short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLTestSrq short ud short result short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle result Reference to an integer value in wh
138. softkey in the menu of the TRACE key The traces can individually be activated for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activated are blanked The display mode can be selected for each trace Traces can be overwritten in each measurement CLEAR WRITE mode averaged over several measurements AVERAGE mode or a maximum or minimum value can be determined from several measurements and displayed MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD Individual detectors can be selected for the various traces The autopeak detector displays maximum and minimum values connected by a vertical line The max peak detector and min peak detector display the maximum and minimum value of the level within a pixel The sample detector displays the instantaneous value of the level at a pixel The rms detector displays the power rms value of the measured values within a pixel the average detector the average value Selection of Trace Function The trace functions are subdivided as follows e Display mode of trace CLEAR WRITE VIEW and BLANK e Evaluation of the trace as a whole AVERAGE MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD e Evaluation of individual pixels of a trace AUTOPEAK MAX PEAK MIN PEAK SAMPLE RMS AVERAGE and QUASIPEAK
139. stantaneous signal amplitude A relative maximum is given when the signal amplitude on both sides of the maximum is reduced by a certain amount ie the peak excursion The preset 6 dB level change can already be reached by the noise indication of the FSP Noise maxima are identified as peaks In this case PEAK EXCURSION has to be selected with a higher value than the difference be tween the highest and lowest noise indication values The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION set tings MARKER 1 380 kHz Marker 1 11 27 055 MHz UBH 3 kHz 8 21 dBm Ref 6 dBm Att 1 dB 15 ms 27 0550000 MHz Delta 2 T1 29 44 dB 1 00000000 kHz 141 58 46 dB 1717 00000000 kHz Detta 63 65 dB 245 00000000 kHz Center 27 105 MHz 5 kHz Span 588 kHz Fig 4 5 Example for level measurements at different peak excursion settings 4 78 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR gt Maximum relative level change of the measured signals Signal 2 42 dB Signal 3 30 dB Signal 4 46 dB The setting Peak Excursion 40 dB causes signals 2 and 4 to be detected with NEXT PEAK or NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 3 is not detected since it only decreases by 30 dB before the level rises again Order of signals found PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK Signal 2 NEXT PEAK Signal 4 or PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 2 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 4 The setting Pea
140. the PRINT TO FILE option in the DEVICE SETTINGS table is selected the printout is directed to a file Upon pressing one of the softkeys PRINT the file name to which the output data are to be written is requested For this an entry field is opened for entering the file name While a print job is in progress problems may occur in the output device If while printing the output device issues a PAPER OUT message i e no more paper is available the user will be prompted by the following message Paper out on device LPT ABORT to load paper into the output device The print job will then be either continued CONTINUE selected or aborted ABORT selected Similar SYSTEM MESSAGES appear if the printer is offline etc The HARDCOPY ABORT softkey aborts a print job in progress 1093 4820 12 4 172 E 3 FSP Measurement Documentation HCOPY menu PRINT INSTALL Option COLOR SELECT H OPY SCREEN PRINTER FSP B16 LON OFF OBJECT PRINT SCREEN TRACE COLORS BRIGHTNESS PRINT OPTIMIZED dium TABLE COLORS HARDCOPY USER ATURATION ABORT DEFINED SALU i DEVICE 1 PREDEFINED DEVICE 2 pte COLORS COMMENT SCREEN A COMMENT SET TO SCREEN B DEFAULT AN 4 The HCOPY key opens the HARDCOPY menu for starting and
141. the adjacent channels and a too large resolution bandwidth causes a too low selection of the channel filter The adjacent channel power would thus be measured too high With the exception of the 1595 CDMA standards the ADJUST SETTINGS softkey sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW lt 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey sets the video bandwidth VBW as a function of the channel bandwidth as follows VBW gt 3 x RBW The smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey selects the RMS detector The RMS detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of trace pixels used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable resu
142. the lower limit of the evaluation range IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT value 4 85 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP POWER HOLD AVERAGE ON 1093 4820 12 The STOP LIMIT softkey activates the entry of the upper limit of the evaluation range IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH value The SET REFERENCE softkey sets the power values currently measured as reference values for the calculation of the mean value MEAN and the rms value RMS The reference values are used to perform relative measurements If the calculation of the mean value MEAN and rms value RMS is not switched on 0 dBm is used as a reference value If the average value AVERAGE or maximum value MAX HOLD is calculated over several sweeps the current value is the measured value summed up at the actual time IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM REF AUTO ONCE The POWER ABS REL softkey selects the absolute power measurement default setting or relative power measurement The reference value for the relative power is defined by SET REFERENCE The value 0 dBm is used if the reference value is not defined IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MODE ABS The MAX HOLD ON OFF softkey switches the display of the maximum peak obtained from measurements at successive sweeps on and off The displayed maximum peak is only updated at the end of a sweep if a higher value has occurred Th
143. the printer you have just installed should be used as the standard printer for Windows NT applications Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as default printer Default setting is No 1093 4820 12 4 184 E 3 FSP Measurement Documentation Add Printer Wizard Start the printer driver installation with The network printer has been successfully installed Finish Note If after clicking on Finish you are requested to enter the printer driver path the Service Pack has to be reinstalled after the printer installation see chapter 1 Installing Windows NT Software i Cancel Finally the instrument must be configured for printouts of the measurement screen with this printer For details please refer to softkey DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the hardcopy menu 1093 4820 12 4 185 E 3 FSP Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 During normal operation without a frequency offset the tracking generator emits a signal exactly at the input frequency of the FSP For frequency converting measurements it is possible to set a constant frequency offset of 150 MHz between the receive frequency of the FSP and the output signal of the tracking generator Moreover an modulation or AM and FM modulation of the output signal can be provided using two analog input signals The output power is level controlled and can be set in 0 1 dB steps in a range from 30 dBm
144. the trace info of trace 1 and in the TRACE main menu the TRACE MATH softkey is highlighted IEC IEEE bus command CALC MA CALC MA TRACE1 TRACE2 1 The TRACE POSITION softkey activates the entry of the trace position for 0 difference The position is stated in of the diagram height The range of values extends from 100 to 200 IEC IEEE bus command DISP MATH POS 50PCT The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the math function off IEC IEEE bus command CALC MATH STAT OFF 4 54 E 3 FSP Calibration Recording the Correction Data of FSP CAL Key The FSP obtains its high measurement accuracy through its inbuitl self alignment method The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by comparison of the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the high precision calibration signal source of FSP at 128 MHz The correction data are then available in the instrument as a file and can be displayed by means of the CAL RESULTS softkey For service purposes the use of correction data can be deactivated by means of the CAL CORH ON OFF softkey If the correction data recording is aborted the last complete correction data set is restored Note The term Calibration formerly used for the integrated self alignment was often mistaken for the true calibration of the instrument at the test set in production and in service It is theref
145. third order intercept from the level spacing between normal markers and delta markers and outputs it in the marker info field IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC ON CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES 1093 4820 12 4 116 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MEAS Example A two tone signal with frequencies of 100 MHz and 101 MHz is applied to the RF input of the FSP The level of the two signals is 10 dBm PRESET The FSP is set to the default setting CENTER 100 5 MHz The center frequency is set to 100 5 MHz SPAN 3 MHz The span is set to 3 MHz AMPT 10 dBm The reference level is set to 10 dBm MKR MARKER 1 is switched on and set to the signal peak TOI The FSP sets the 4 markers to the useful signals and the intermodulation products and calculates the third order intercept The result is output in the marker info field The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of a marker for functions MODULATION DEPTH and TOI Thus the markers can be fine adjusted for these functions The markers are numerically selected in a data entry field Delta marker 1 is selected by entering O If the marker is in the switch off state it will be switched on and can thus be shifted IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK1 X value CALC MARK1 Y 4 117 E 3 Limit Lines FSP Setup of Limit Lines and Display Lines LINES Key Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or s
146. vertical line on the end of the burst by turning the spinwheel counterclockwise The FSP displays the mean power during the switch on phase of the burst see Fig 2 49 RBH MHz UBH 18 MHz Fig 2 49 Measuring mean power during the switch on phase of a GSM burst 1093 4820 12 2 62 E 2 FSP Time Domain Measurements Power Ramping Measurement for Burst Signals Since the FSP has a high time resolution at 0 Hz span the edges of the TDMA burst can be measured accurately The use of the trigger offset makes it possible to shift the edges onto the screen Measurement Example Measurements on GSM burst edges using a high time resolution Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one time slot is switched on Measurement using the FSP The settings of the example above are used to measure GSM burst power during the switch on phase 1 Switch off power measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the TIME DOM POWER 42 softkey gt In the submenu set the POWER softkey to OFF 2 Increase the time resolution to 100 us gt Press the SWEEP key and enter 100 ps 3 Shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the middle of the screen using the trigger offset Press the TRIG key Press the TRIGGER OFFSET softkey gt Set the trigger offset by turning the spinwheel counterclockwise until the burst edge is in the middle of th
147. y S LI dA 3 36 FSP E 3 FILE Key FILE SAVE RECALL EDIT COMMENT ITEMS TO SAVE RCL PEUEUT B Y ITEMS DATA SET EIST ENABLE ALL ITEMS DATA SET STSAHEE CLEAR ALL ITEMS DATA SET CLEAR ALL EDIT PATH STARTUP RECALL AKE DIRECTORY FILE MANAGER 1 FORMAT DISK RENAME SORT MODE DEFAULT CONFIG DELETE 1093 4820 12 3 37 E 3 Menu Overview FSP CAL Key CAL CAL TOTAL CAL ABORT CAL CORR EN CAL RESULTS PAGE UP PAGE DOWN 1093 4820 12 3 38 E 3 FSP Menu Overview SETUP Key REFERENCE FIRMWARE pe TRANSDUCER INSERT S TUP r UPDATE FACTOR LINE NOISE SRC RESTORE DELETE on FIRMWARE LINE NEW g Option FSP B25 PREAMP EDIT TRANSDUCER DELETE Uy GENERAL SETUP 0 SYSTEM SAVE TRD INFO amp FACTOR PAGE SERVIC
148. 0 option enter D 1386 After a couple of files have been copied there is a message indicating that the driver for the network card has been installed gt If required the network speed and the duplex mode can be set manually using PRO 100 PCI Adapter the Settings button gt Click on OK The settings are checked and processed Missing information on the installed network protocols e g the TCP IP address is queried 1093 4820 12 4 223 E 3 LAN Interface TCP IP Setup If there is a DHCP server on your network TCP IP can be configured to dynamically provide an address If you are not sure ask your system administrator Do you wish to use DHCP Microsoft TCP IP Properties 2 x IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing An IP address be automatically assigned to this network card by a DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in space Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Specify an IP address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Advanced Cancel Apply Network Setup Wizard You may use this page to disable network bindings or arrange the order in which this computer finds information on the network icc 15 NetBIOS Interface Server H Workstation Enable Disable Move
149. 0 12 4 144 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Configuration Setup FREQUENCY TDF dB Entry of values The scrollbar marks the first reference value The desired reference values must be entered in ascending order of frequencies After the frequency has been entered the scrollbar automatically goes to the associated level value The table can be edited after entry of the first value using the INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys To change individual values later on the value has to be selected and a new one entered IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN DATA lt freq gt lt level gt The INSERT LINE softkey inserts an empty line above the marked reference value When entering a new reference value in the line the ascending order of frequencies must be taken into consideration however The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked reference value complete line The reference values that follow move one line up IEC IEEE bus command The SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey saves the changed table in a file on the internal hard disk If there is already a transducer factor that has the same name confirmation query is output If the new factor is active the new values become immediately valid IEC IEEE bus command With IEC IEEE bus operation the save operation is performed automatically after the definition of the reference values 4 145 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Programming the Interface Configuration and Time Setup The GEN
150. 1 gated SW6e6pD oci chr te edet 4 35 LES DOWOE 4 32 O fSel iino e TEEPE e REX 4 32 POWER ieee 4 38 iso ME 4 32 SWOOD cits nnb b ise i ALME 4 31 4 31 TV MOJEN eed e 4 39 U o eret ae Eh 3 4 Unit leVel axis esie etr ee ir ead 4 14 limit h 4 125 Uniti indue ene 3 11 Universal command Upper User Interface rrr rr rit reine V Vertical sync signal 4 39 Video bandwiath esses 4 20 Video polarily aetas 4 40 Video triggering VIEW trace info View trace W White Space i epe eme 5 14 WiRdOWS MT ottenere vy 1 19 administrator 1 5 ie RARUS 1 19 p E 1 19 DASsSWOFd 3 itt ee nene EO ERR os 1 19 2 4 10 Dou E 4 63 amplitude et us 4 44 X AXIS gate signal 4 36 E 3
151. 1 T1 is the lower limit and the upper limit corresponds to the stop frequency If F2 T2 is also enabled it determines the upper limit IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 10MHZ CALC MARK X SLIM ON The THRESHOLD softkey defines the threshold line The threshold line represents a limit for the level range of the max search at the lower end and that of the min search at the upper end IEC IEEE bus command CALC THR 20dBm CALC THR ON The SEARCH LIMIT OFF softkey disables all limits of the search range 4 1 4 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK X SLIM OFF CALC THR OFF 1093 4820 12 4 77 E 3 MKR gt Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates an entry box for selecting the minimum amount by which a signal level must decrease increase before it is recognized by the NEXT PEAK and NEXT MIN search functions as a maxi mum or minimum Input values from 0 to 80 dB are allowed the resolution being 0 1 dB IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK PEXC 10dB The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB This is sufficient for the NEXT PEAK or NEXT MIN functions in the NEXT MODE ABS setting as always the next smaller or larger signal is searched for In the SEARCH NEXT LEFT or SEARCH NEXT RIGHT setting functions NEXT PEAK and NEXT MIN search for the next relative maximum or mini mum on the right or left of the current marker position irrespective of the in
152. 10180 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 4 47 Analyzer Traces Description Instrument model Firmware version Date of data set storage Instrument mode Center frequency Frequency offset Frequency range 0 Hz with zero span and statistics measurements Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span gt 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics measurements Reference level Level offset Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Display range in in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG with x axis LIN Input attenuation Input attenuation of el attenuator only with Option FSP B25 Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Sweep time Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVERAGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector set AUTOPEAK MAXPEAK MINPEAK AVERAGE RMS SAMPLE QUASIPEAK Number of sweeps set Selected trace Unit of x values Hz with span gt 0 s with span 0 dBm GB with statistics measurements Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Number of test points Measured values x values lt y1 gt lt y2 gt y2 being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a test point E 3 Traces Analyzer FSP The DECIM SEP softkey
153. 14 6 123 RANGE LOG 100 aB 4 13 6 121 6 123 RANGE LOG MANUAL 4 14 6 121 6 123 1093 4820 12 10 8 FSP RBW VBW 4 23 6 209 RBW VBW NOISE 10 v4 23 6 209 RBW VBW PULSE 1 2 4 23 6 209 RBW VBW SINE 1 3 4 22 6 209 REGCALL retta 4 166 4 210 6 162 6 217 RECEIVER 6 221 REF 4 61 6 14 REF EEVEL 2 4 13 6 122 REF LEVEL MKR LVL 4 75 6 64 REF LEVEL COUPLED 4 133 6 156 REF LEVEL OFFSET 4 16 6 122 REF LEVEL 4 16 6 123 REF POINT FREQUENCY 4 61 4 69 6 16 REF POINT LEVEL 4 61 4 68 6 15 REF POINT LVL OFFSET 4 61 4 68 6 15 REF 6 16 REF POINT 4 62 6 16 REF VALUE 4 194 4 209 6 122 REF VALUE POSITION 4 193 4 208 6 123 REFERENCE FIXED 4 61 6 14 REFERENCE INT EXT 3 REMOVE RENAME 4 171 6 164 RES hien 4 109 6 206 RES BW AUTO sese 4 21 6 207 RES
154. 2 3 9 E 2 Calling and Changing the Menus FSP Hotkey Area Hotkeys are allocated to the eight keys on the bottom margin of the screen They change between modes and the active diagrams The menu only shows the hotkeys which are actually used SPECTRUM SCREEN B _ A keystroke activates the associated hotkey An activated hotkey changes its frame IT Calling and Changing the Menus The operation of the FSP is menu controlled via keys and softkeys Various softkey menus are displayed depending on the instrument status The individual menus constitute the so called menu tree The top menu the root of the menu tree is always called by means of a keystroke Arrows at the lower edge of the softkey area indicate whether a supplementary menu can be entered or not Softkeys with an arrow allow for branching into further menus so called submenus The field Ed at the lower right side of the softkey area indicates that this menu has a side menu The menu change keys on the front panel below the softkey area allow for switching between the main menu and the side menus and submenus T The NEXT key calls the side menu PREV The PREVIOUS key returns to the next higher menu BE Several menus provide for automatic change i e return to the next higher menu is caused automatically after pressing a softkey Selection of a submen
155. 212 Frequency converting 4 213 Configuration of an External nennen 4 214 List of Generator Types Supported by the 4 216 1093 4820 12 4 2 E 3 FSP Contents Instrument Functions Option LAN Interface 16 4 219 Connecting the Instrument to the 4 219 Installing the 4 219 Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network 4 219 Selection of the Network 4 222 Selection of the Network 4 222 Completion of the 4 223 Examples of 4 227 Subsequent Changing of the Network Configuration Computer Name etc 4 227 Disabling the Autologin Mechanism 4 227 Reenabling the Autologin 4 228 Deinstallation of the Network Driver Installation of the MS Loopback Adapter 4 228 Operating the Instrument the 4 232 NOVEEL Networks eet D t D
156. 3 1093 4495 13 FSP30 1093 4495 30 39 FSP B3 1129 6491 02 Audio Modulator AM FM FSP B4 1129 6740 02 OCXO 10 MHz FSP B6 1129 8594 02 TV Trigger FSP B9 1129 6991 02 Tracking Generator FSP B10 1129 7246 02 External Generator Control FSP B16 1129 8042 02 Lan Interface 10 1000 Base T FSP B17 1129 8794 02 On Line IQ Interface FSP B25 1129 7746 02 Electronic Attenuator complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1993 2 1995 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 EN61326 1 1997 A1 1998 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1999 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 2002 01 31 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1093 4495 01 CE E 6 Safety Instructions This unit has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying w
157. 4 12 Dependence of intermodulation level on useful signal level The useful signals at the twoport output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the twoport is in the linear range A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output Beyond a certain input level the twoport goes into compression and the output level stops increasing The intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as much as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum twoport output power It can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing at a given level according to the following formula IP3 22 Py 3 The 3 order intercept point TOI for example is calculated for an intermodulation of 60 dB and an input level Py of 20 dBm according to the following formula IP3 E 20dBm 10dBm 4 The TOI softkey enables the measurement of the 3 order intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the FSP input MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals MARKER 3 and MARKER 4 both delta markers are placed on the intermodulation products When the function is enabled the frequency entry is activated for the delta markers They can be set manually The FSP calculates the
158. 50 kHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 50 kHz 3 Set the FSP s reference level to 0 dBm signal generator level gt Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 1093 4820 12 2 35 E 2 Noise Measurements FSP 4 Enable phase noise measurement gt Press the MKR FCTN key gt Press the PHASE NOISE 2 softkey The FSP activates phase noise measurement Marker 1 main marker and marker 2 delta marker are positioned on the signal maximum The position of the marker is the reference level and frequency for the phase noise measurement A horizontal line represents the level of the reference point and a vertical line the frequency of the reference point Data entry for the delta marker is activated so that the frequency offset at which the phase noise is to be measured can be entered directly 5 10kHz frequency offset for determining phase noise gt Enter 10 kHz The FSP displays the phase noise at a frequency offset of 10 kHz The magnitude of the phase noise in dBc Hz is displayed in the delta marker output field at the top right of the screen delta 2 T1 PHN 6 Stabilize the measurement result by activating trace averaging Press the TRACE key Press the AVEHAGE softkey Fig 2 29 Measuring phase noise with the phase noise marker function The frequency offset can be varied by moving the marker with the spinwheel or by entering a new frequency offset as a number 1093 4
159. 6 270 6 271 CLEAR WRITE e ede 4 42 6 124 CNT RESOL tO su nines anes 6 48 CNT 4 60 CODE CHAN 6 108 6 111 CODE CHAN PREDEFINED 6 108 6 111 COLOR 6 147 COLOR 0200 4 178 COLORS oit miris 4 177 4 178 10 6 E 3 FSP COM INTERFACE 4 147 6 267 COMMENT SCREEN 4 177 6 148 CONFIG DISPLAY 4 133 6 118 CONFIGURE 4 151 CONT AT REC FREQ es 6 150 CONT DEMOD ect 4 73 6 61 CONT 4 111 6 150 6 151 CONTINUE SGL SWEEP 4 29 6 150 6 151 CONTINUOUS SCAN s 6 150 CONTINUOUS SWEEP 4 27 4 28 6 150 6 151 ste ah ee 4 171 6 159 COPY CHAN CONF TABLE 6 109 6 112 COPY LIMIT 244 122 6 22 COPY 2 4 48 6 280 COUPLING 4 24 6 207 6 241 COUPLINGBATIO on 4 22 6 207 5 4 97 6 236 CP ACP 4 95 6 26 6 234 CP ACP 4 90 6 65 6 66 6 69 5 4 91 6 69 DATA SET CLEAR DATA SET
160. 820 12 2 36 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurements on Modulated Signals If RF signals are used to transmit information an RF carrier is modulated Analog modulation methods such as amplitude modulation frequency modulation and phase modulation have a long history and digital modulation methods are now used for modern systems Measuring the power and the spectrum of modulated signals is an important task to assure transmission quality and to ensure the integrity of other radio services This task can be performed easily with a spectrum analyzer Modern spectrum analyzers also provide the test routines that are essential to simplify complex measurements Measurements on AM signals The spectrum analyzer detects the RF input signal and displays the magnitudes of its components as a spectrum AM modulated signals are also demodulated by this process The AF voltage can be displayed in the time domain if the modulation sidebands are within the resolution bandwidth In the frequency domain the AM sidebands can be resolved with a small bandwidth and can be measured separately This means that the modulation depth of a carrier modulated with a sinewave signal can be measured Since the dynamic range of a spectrum analyzer is very wide even extremely small modulation depths can be measured accurately The FSP has a test routine which measures the modulation depth in Measurement Example 1 Displaying the AF of an AM signal in the t
161. 93 4820 12 FSP gt Press the BACK key For numerous parameters the data administration of the instrument stores the previously valid parameter value in addition to the current value The BACK key can be used to toggle between these two values This applies for terminated entries as long as the data entry window is displayed gt Press ESC key The original parameter value is restored The new entry is deleted gt Press ESC key again The entry window is closed the original value remains active or gt Press any key or any softkey even the softkey which has opened the entry window The entry is aborted and the entry window is closed The original value remains active 3 18 E 2 FSP Setting Parameters Entry of Alphanumeric Parameter A help line editor or an external keyboard optional are provided for the entry of alphanumeric instrument parameters The roll key and the exponent key have no function with alphanumeric entry All unit keys assume the function of an ENTER key The entry is always made in a data entry window which is displayed automatically upon selection of the parameter The editing line comprises 60 characters Up to 256 characters may be entered If a text exceeds 60 characters the contents is shifted automatically 20 characters left or right when the left or right margin of the editing line is touched by the cursor Editing with External Keyboard BANDPASS FILTER TEST 23A input lin Entry of
162. A CA IN STAT IN 20dBm C D C SD The FREQUENCY LINE 1 2 softkeys enable or disable the frequency lines 1 2 and allow the user to enter the position of the lines The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement window Note The two softkeys cannot be used in the time domain span 0 IEC IEEE bus command CALC FLIN STAT ON CALC FLIN 120MHz 1093 4820 12 4 129 E 3 Limit Lines 1093 4820 12 FSP The TIME LINE 1 2 softkeys enable or disable the time lines 1 and allow the user to enter the position of the lines The time lines mark the selected times or define search ranges see section Marker Functions Note The two softkeys cannot be used in the frequency domain span gt 0 IEC IEEE bus command CALC TLIN STAT ON CALC TLIN 10ms 4 130 E 3 FSP Display Configuration of Screen Display DISP Key The DISPLAY menu allows the configuration of the diagram display on the screen and also the selection of the display elements and colors The POWER SAVE mode is also configured in this menu for the display The test results are displayed on the screen of the FSP either in a full screen window or in two overlapping windows The two windows are called diagram A and diagram B In the default setting the two windows are completely decoupled from each other ie they behave like two separate instruments This is very useful for exampl
163. A and W are directly convertible IEC IEEE bus command CALC UNIT POW DBM 4 14 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Level Display RF Input The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey allows the attenuation to be entered irrespective of the reference level The attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps between 0 and 70 dB in 5 dB steps between 0 and 75 dB if option FSP B25 Electronic Attenuator is fitted Other entries will be rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached will be output Note The 0 aB value can be entered only via the numeric keypad in order to protect the input mixer against occasional overload IEC IEEE bus command INP ATT 40 DB The RF ATTEN AUTO softkey sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation desired by the user is always used HF ATTEN AUTO is the default setting IEC IEEE bus command INP ATT AUTO ON 4 15 E 3 Level Display RF Input Analyzer FSP AMPT NEXT menu GRID 1093 4820 12 The REF LEVEL POSITION softkey allows the reference level position to be entered The setting range is from 200 to 4200956 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RPOS 100PCT The REF LEVEL OFF
164. ALL operations The simplest example for the input of a data set name is illustrated by the following key strokes lt RECALL gt 1 units key 2 Selecting the data set from a selection list gt Select from submenu TEMS TO SAVE RCL the data subsets which should be loaded configurations measurement and calibration data softkey TEMS TO SAVE RCL Select the data set which should be loaded Softkey DATA SET LIST and confirm with ENTER The data set is taken over in the RECALL DATA SET table gt Press the RECALL softkey The entry field for the data set name is opened and contains the desired data set gt Initiate the loading of the selected data set by pressing the ENTER key 1093 4820 12 4 164 E 3 FSP Recalling Data Sets Note If the set directory does not correspond to the required directory for loading it can be changed as follows gt Press the RECALL softkey gt Close the entry field for the data set name with ESC Selectthe PATH filed with the cursor keys gt Open the entry field for the directory name with ENTER Enterthe directory name and confirm with ENTER Then proceed with the selection list as described above Any settings not restored when data subsets are loaded will remain unchanged in the instrument During recall operations the FSP recognises which subsets are present in the recalled data set and ignores selected data subsets that are not available FILE Menu FILE
165. AMPT key cannot be operated if the transducer is on XNEHET The NEW and EDIT softkeys give access to the LINE submenu for editing and generating transducer factors DELETE LINE SAVE TRD FACTOR 1093 4820 12 4 142 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup EDIT TRANSDUCER FACTOR Name Unit Interpolation Cable LIN Comment FREQUENCY TDF dB FREQUENCY TDF dB 1 0000000 MHz 1 000 1 0000000 GHz 5 500 Depending on the softkey selected either the table with the data of the factor marked softkey EDIT or an empty table softkey NEW appears This table is empty except for the following entries Unit dB Interpolation LIN for linear frequency scaling LOG for logarithmic frequency scaling The features of the factor are entered in the header of the table and the frequency and the transducer factor are entered in the columns Name Entry of name Unit Selection of unit Interpolation Selection of interpolation Comment Entry of comment FREQUENCY Entry of frequency of reference values TDF dB Entry of transducer factor During editing a transducer factor remains stored in the background until the factor edited is saved with the SAVE TRD FACTORH softkey or until the table is closed A factor that was edited by mistake can be restored by leaving the entry function Name Entry of name The name may consist of a maximum of 8 characters that have to comply with the conventions for DOS file na
166. ARD DMA SIGNAL CP ACP 5 HOLD STATISTICO CONFIG 0 ON C N SET CP STANDARD AVERAGE C No REFERENCE DEVIATION ON SWEEP LIMITS NUMBER OF TIME ON SWEEPS m NOISE CORR START ON LIMIT TOI FAST ACP STOP LIMIT SELECT FULL SIZE MARKER DIAGRAM 27 ADJUST gt 1 REF LVL L C N p ON X AXIS C No POWER NO OF ACP LIMIT REF LEVEL BANDWIDTH ADJ CHAN CHECK X AXIS CHANNEL EDIT RANGE BANDWIDTH ACP LIMIT CHANNEL CHANNEL ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH Y AXIS ADJ CHAN MAX VALUE SPACING Y AXIS NOISE CORR CP ACP MIN VALUE ON ABS ADJUST ADJUST CHAN PWR SETTINGS REF LVL ADJUST ADJUST SELECT SETTINGS SETTINGS TRACE os DEFAULT ADJUST SETTINGS SETTINGS Z Ss E N 4 E P FSP BW Key RES BW MANUAL VIDEO BW ANUAL SWEEPTIME MANUAL COUPLING VBW MODE LOG RBW VBW SINE 1 3 RBW VBW PULSE 1 RBW VBW NOISE 10 RBW VBW MANUAL SPAN RBW AUTO 50 RATIO lt gt DEFAULT COUPLING FILTER 1093 4820 12 MANUAL 3 31 Menu Overview E 3 Menu Overview FSP SWEEP Key SWEEP F SINGLE SWEEP CONTINUE SGL SWEEP SWEEPTIME AUTO SWEEP COUNT SW
167. ATOR 22 SRC TYPE GPIB ADDR MODE MIN P HIN Prax y SELECT GENERATOR i 28 REMOTE 5kHz 3GHz i44dBm 16dBm GEHERRTOR 2 SMIQ 3 GPIB 28 LOCAL 3 3GHz 140dBm 13dBm mmu SWEEP FREQUENCY SWEEP SOURCE FREQ REC FREQ NUN DEN OFFSET SRC STATE POMEREdBal NUM DEN OFFSET RESULT 1 882 Hi 1 QHz QHz 38Hz 2 1 al Hz Hz 3 2GHz Start Hz 320 Stop 3 2 GHz SPECTRUN _NETHORK SCREEN 2 The EXT SOURCE softkey opens submenu for configuration of the external generator The FSP is able to manage two generators one of which can be active at the time EXT SRC The EXT SRC ON OFF softkey switches the external generator or off ON It can only be switched on successfully if the generator has been selected by means of SELECT GENERATOR and configured correctly by means of FREQUENCY SWEEP If one of these conditions is not fulfilled an error message will be output Notes When switching on the external generator the FSP switches off the internal tracking generator and starts programming the generator settings via the IECBUS At the same time the maximum stop frequency is limited to the maximum generator frequency This upper limit is automatically reduced by the set frequency offset of the generator and a set multiplication factor With the external g
168. Attenuator Besides the mechanical attenuator at the RF input the FSP also offers an electronic attenuation setting option ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR FSP B25 The attenuation range is 0 to 30 dB with the default attenuation being preset by the mechanical attenuator 1093 4820 12 The EL ATTEN MANUAL softkey switches the electronic attenuator on and allows the attenuation of the electronic attenuator to be set The attenuation can be varied in 5 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached will be output IEC IEEE bus command INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EA 10 DB This function is only available with option ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR FSP B25 The EL ATTEN AUTO softkey switches the electronic attenuator on and automatically sets its attenuation to O dB The allowed setting range of the reference level ranges from the current reference level on switching on the electronic attenuator to over 30 dB If a reference level is set outside the allowed 30 dB range setting is performed by means of the mechanical attenuator From this new reference level to over 30 dB the setting is again performed with the electronic attenuator IEC IEEE bus command INP EATT AUTO ON This function is only available with option ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR FSP B25 The
169. Before the network can be used this system must be restarted i Pinih 73 Cancel Network Settings Change A You must shut down and restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now 1093 4820 12 4 226 gt gt FSP Terminate the installation by clicking on Finish Answer the prompt You must shutdown with No since the Service Pack 5 of Windows NT must be reinstalled after the installation of the driver software see chapter 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software Notes gt It is not necessary to install the Service Pack 5 if the instrument is equipped with the B20 option If the service pack is not installed although there is no B20 option the following error message will be displayed At least one service or driver failed during system startup In this case the network installation is not fully operational To prevent faults it is therefore indispensable to reinstall the service pack see chapter 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software E 3 FSP LAN Interface Examples of Configurations NOVELL Netware NWLink IPX SPX Client Service for In folder Protocols Properties the frame type Compatible NetWare used in the network is to be set Transport IP Networks TCP IP Protocol Simple TCP IP In folder Protocols Properties an IP address FTP
170. Bus failed CPU 04 Jan 99 15 58 05 IEC IEEE bus command SYST ERR The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey deletes all messages in the table The softkey is only available when table SYSTEM INFO is active IEC IEEE bus command SYST ERR 4 158 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Service Menu The service menu offers a variety of additional functions which are used for maintenance and or trouble shooting Caution The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation However incorrect use can affect correct operation and or data integrity of the FSP Therefore many of the functions can only be used after entering a password They are described in the instrument service manual SETUP menu The SERVICE softkey opens a submenu for gt EE selection of the service function INPUT The NPUT HF and INPUT CAL softkeys are CAL mutually exclusive selection switches Only one SBIPTEST switch can be active at any one time SELFTEST CAL GEN RESULTS COMB ENTER PASSWORD qo Ga 1093 4820 12 4 159 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP General Service Functions SETUP SERVICE submenu The INPUT softkey switches the input of the FSP to the input connector normal position After PRESET RECALL or FSP power on the INPUT RF is always selected IEC IEEE bus command DIAG SERV INP RF The NPUT CAL softkey switches the RF input of the FSP to the in
171. E 5 UP PAGE DOWN ZN gt js GPIB SOFT ADDRESS FRONTPANEL HARDWARE INPUT m CAL STATISTICS COM SELFTEST INTERFACE SYSTEM TIME SELFTEST MESSAGES DATE RESULTS CONFIGURE NETWORK CLEAR ALL NETWORK MESSAGES ENTER OPTIONS PASSWORD L gt lt AN gt LI 2 LI 1093 4820 12 3 39 Menu Overview FSP HCOPY Key PRINT INSTALL Option COLOR SELECT m SCREEN PRINTER FSP B16 ON OFF OBJECT PRINT SCREEN TRACE COLORS BRIGHTNESS PRINT OPTIMIZED TINT TABLE COLORS HARDCOPY USER SATURATION ABORT DEFINEDS DEVICE 1 PREDEFINED DEVICE 2 COLORS COLORS COMMENT SCREEN A COMMENT SET TO SCREEN B DEFAULT ir 1093 4820 12 3 40 E 3 SL Hotkey Menu SPECTRUM SCREEN B 2005 LOCAL Menu 1093 4820 12 3 41 E 3 Menu Overview FSP Menu Overview Network Mode SOURCE CAL _ gt gt i7 ON
172. EAK TRACE DETECTOR POSITION MIN PEAK DETECTOR SAMPLE DETECTOR RMS DETECTOR AVERAGE DETECTOR QPK TRACE MATH OFF 2 U 1093 4820 12 3 34 E 3 FSP Menu Overview LINES Key LINES SELECT te i IMIT LINE gt NEW LIMIT LINE 11 VALUES EDIT LIMIT INSERT LINE liL VALUE COPY DELETE IMIT LINE VALUE DELETE SHIFT IMIT LINE RIT GIN SHIFT Y X OFFSE PM Y OFFSE DISPLAY SAVE LINES LIMIT LINE __ DISPLAY LINE 1 DISPLAY FREQUENCY LINE 1 FREQUENCY LINE 2 TIME LINE TIME LINE 2 1093 4820 12 3 35 E 3 Menu Overview DISP Key r gt 1093 4820 12 SPLIT SCREEN REF LEVE COUPLED MAR MAR ti 2 D CENTI Ap ral UJ CONFIG DISPLAY SCREEN SELECT TITLE OBJECT TOM TE BRIGHTNESS ON LOGO e OFF ANNOTATION SATURATION OFF DATA ENTRY OPAQUE DEFAULT PREDEFINED COLORS 1 COLORS DEFAULT COLORS 2 DISPLAY PWR SAVE 2 N 1
173. EC IEEE bus command CMAP DEF1 The OPTIMIZED COLORS softkey selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors on the hardcopy Trace 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise The other colors correspond to the display colors of the DISP CONFIG DISPLAY DEFAULT COLORS 1 softkey Note The background is always printed in white and the grid in black IEC IEEE bus command CMAP DEF 2 The USER DEFINED softkey opens a submenu for user defined color selection see submenu USER DEFINED COLORS IEC IEEE bus command CMAP DEF 3 4 178 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Measurement Documentation The SELECT OBJECT softkey allows picture elements to be selected to change their color setting After selection the PREDEFINED COLORS BRIGHTNESS TINT and SATURATION softkeys enable the user to change the colors or the brightness the hue and the color saturation of the element selected SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT V Background Grid Function field status field data entry text Function field LED on Function field LED warn Enhancement label text Status field background Trace 1 Trace 3 Marker Lines Measurement status limit check pass Limit check fail Table softkey text Table softkey background Table selected field text Table selected field background Table data entry field titlebar Data entry fiel
174. ECEIVER SCREEN SPECTRUM Hue Screen Hz aBi Key mne 3 11 modulation ee tenen 4 201 IEC Bus Interface ii o metr 8 13 IEC IEEE bus address io p eee 4 146 command description esee 6 1 interface interface functions programming 7 FOV eo a SER NE 3 5 4 16 Indication hardware 95 3 3 instrument settings eene 3 5 marker information 84 Initial configuration 4 2 Input EXT 4 32 8 12 Instrument 8 2 2222 2 000000000 0008 41 Interface functions IEC IEEE bUS iio e eee hs 8 4 Interfaces oca ciere teo We YO Nt HERE IEEE Year 8 2 Intermodulation product 4 115 Interm pi iv die e a o E n eee tee dr 5 31 IST ese TG LEE 5 22 K 10 3 4 82 3 11 E 4 57 eee 4 64 MK Fat nt tbe ed 4 74 PHESET insieme 4 2 6 7 6 272 TOUR OY 3 12 SETUP Li buen 4 137 SPAN sees H C 4 10 SWEEPS sess esas Sick Ente ete
175. EEP POINTS SGL SWEEP DISP OFF 1093 4820 12 332 FSP TRIG Key Option FSP B6 1093 4820 12 FREE RUN VIDEO EXTERN IF POWER RF POWER TRIGGER OFFSET POLARITY NEG GATED TRIGGER GATE SETTINGS amp Option FSP B6 Option FSP B6 TV TRIG gt 5 ON VERT SYNC VERT SYNC ODD FIELD VERT SYNC EVEN FIELD HOR SYNC 3 33 VIDEO POL POS LINES 525 CCVS EXT Menu Overview GATE LEVEL POLARITY NEG GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH SWEEPTIME PRINT SCREEN 27 Menu Overview FSP TRACE Key TRACE FS BEES MIN HOLD m TRACE MAX HOLD AVERAGE AVG MODE VIEW 5 BLANK SWEEP ASCII FILE COUNT EXPORT DETECTOR DECIM SEP TRACE COPY MATH 47 TRACE N AX T1 T2 gt T1 RUTO SELECT T1 T3 gt T1 2 DETECTOR MAX P
176. EL ATTEN OFF softkey switches the electronic attenuator off IEC IEEE bus command INP EATT STAT OFF This function is only available with option ELECTRONIC ATTENUATOR FSP B25 4 17 E 3 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time FSP Setting Bandwidths and Sweep Time BW Key The BW key calls a menu for setting the resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VBW and sweep time SWT for the frequency sweep The parameters may be coupled dependent on the span stop minus start frequency or freely set by the user When working with a split screen display the settings always refer to the active window The FSP offers resolution bandwidths from 10 Hz to 10 MHz in 1 3 10 steps Resolution bandwidths up to 100 kHz are realized using digital bandpasses with Gaussian characteristics As far as the attenuation characteristic is concerned they behave like analog filters but have a much higher measurement speed than comparable analog filters This is due to the fact that the transient response can be compensated as a result of an accurately defined filter behaviour Bandwidths above 100 kHz are realized using decoupled 4 circuit LC filters As an alternative to the analog filters FFT filters are available for the bandwidths between 1 Hz and 30 kHz When working with bandwidths up to 30 kHz the FFT algorithm offers considerably higher measurement speeds with all the other settings remaining the same The reason is that with analog filter
177. ENCY SWEEP table IEC bus commands SYST COMM RDEV GEN2 TYPE SMEO2 SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN1 ADDR 28 1093 4820 12 4 215 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control FSP List of Generator Types Supported by the FSP Generator Interface Generator Generator Generator Generator Type Min Freq Max Freq Min Power Max Power dBm dBm SMEo2 TTL 5 kHz 1 5 GHz 144 16 SME03 TTL 5 kHz 3 0 GHz 144 16 SME06 TTL 5 kHz 6 0 GHz 144 16 SMG GPIB 100 kHz 1 0 GHz 137 13 SMGL GPIB 9 kHz 1 0 GHz 118 30 SMGU GPIB 100 kHz 216 GHz 140 13 SMH GPIB 100 kHz 2 0 GHz 140 13 SMHU GPIB 100 kHz 4 32 GHz 140 13 SMIQ02B TTL 300 kHz 2 2 GHz 144 13 SMIQO2E GPIB 300 kHz 2 2 GHz 144 13 SMIQ03B TTL 300 kHz 3 3 GHz 144 13 SMIQO3E GPIB 300 kHz 3 3 GHz 144 13 SMIQ04B TTL 300 kHz 4 4 GHz 144 10 SMIQO6B TTL 300 kHz 6 4 GHz 144 10 SMLO1 GPIB 9 kHz 1 1 GHz 140 13 SMLO2 GPIB 9 kHz 2 2 GHz 140 13 5 103 GPIB 9 kHz 3 3 GHz 140 13 11 413 11 122 SMR20 TTL 1 GHz 20 GHz 130 2 SMR20B11 TTL 10 MHz 20 GHz 130 SMR27 TTL 1GHz 27 GHz 41302 SMR27B11 TTL 10 MHz 27 GHz 130 2 SMR30 TTL 1 GHz 30 GHz 130 2 11 iss ae TAE 12 SMR40 TTL 1 GHz 40 GHz 1302 9 ae acere Se 3127
178. ERAL SETUP softkey opens a sub menu in which the general instrument parameters can be set up In addition to the configuration of the digital interfaces ECBUS COM the date and time may be entered The current settings are displayed in tabular form on the display screen where they may be edited SETUP GENERAL SETUP submenu TIME amp DATE GPIB ADDRESS TIME 14 38 COM INTERFACE TIME DATE CONFIGURE NETWORK NETWORK LOGIN SCREEN B n n n Jn n d Selecting the IEC IEEE Bus Address SETUP GENERAL SETUP submenu The GPIB ADDRESS softkey activates the entry of the IEC Bus address Valid addresses are 0 through 30 The default setting is address 20 IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 1093 4820 12 4 146 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Serial Interface Configuration SETUP GENERAL SETUP submenu 1093 4820 12 The COM INTERFACE softkey activates the COM INTERFACE table for entry of the serial interface parameters The following parameters can be configured in the table Baud rate data transmission rate Bits number of data bits Parity bit parity check Stop bits number of stop bits HW Handshake hardware handshake protocol SW Handshake software handshake protocol Owner assignment to the measuring instrument or computer Baud 9600 Bits 8 Parity None Stopbits 1 HW Handshake
179. ERE WA 1093 4820 12 Option FSP B25 INPUT 750 3 26 FSP E 3 FSP MKR Key wes 1093 4820 12 Menu Overview MARKER 1 gt CNT RESOL MARKER 4 10 kHz ER CNT RESOL WORM peta 1 kHz SIGNAL CNT RESOL COUNT 100 Hz REFERENCE CNT RESOL FIXED 2 10 Hz CNT RESOL 1 Hz MARKER 200 ALL MARKER CNT RESOL OFF 0 1 Hz x REF FXD REF POINT LEVEL REF POINT LVL OFFSET EQUENCY Hy ye REF POINT TIME PEAK SEARCH 3 27 E 3 Menu Overview MKR gt Key SELECT MKR gt STEPSIZE MIN CENTER NEXT MIN MKR FREQ RER LEVEL NEXT MODE MKR LVL Ti NEXT PEAK NEXT ODE SEARCH _ LIMITS PEAK EXCLUDE EXCURSIO LO MRK gt TRACE A ri v LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD SEARCH LI OFF 4T 1093 4820 12 3 28 tj ABSOLUT PEAK MIN SEARCH NEXT LEFT
180. FSP Limit Lines Selection of Limit Lines The LINES key opens the menu for fixing the limit lines and the display lines LINES menu LIMIT LINES Center 4 GHz 800 2 The SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the marked limit lines In the LIMIT LINES table the limit lines compatible to the settings of the active screen can be enabled New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE sub menus respectively The horizontal and vertical lines of the DISPLAY LINES submenu mark individual levels or frequencies span gt 0 or times span 0 in the diagram 1093 4820 12 4 119 E 3 Limit Lines 1093 4820 12 FSP The SELECTED LIMIT LINE table provides information about the characteristics of the marked limit line Name name Domain frequency or time Unit vertical scale X Axis interpolation Limit upper lower limit X Scaling absolute or relative frequencies times Y Scaling absolute or relative Y units Threshold absolute limit with relative Y units Comment commentary The characteristics of the limit line set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE NEW LIMIT LINE sub menu The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the L MIT LINES table and the selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table The following information is offered in the columns of the table Name Enable the limit line Compatible Indicates
181. FSP may generate contains a list of error messages contains an index for the operating manual 0 1 E 2 Manuals FSP Service Manual Instrument The service manual instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for the maintenance of FSP by exchanging modules 1093 4820 12 0 2 E 2 FSP Contents Preparing for Operation Contents Chapter 1 Preparing for Operation 1 Preparing for Operation unco dui noxio eder Do Kid gab Sa FoU KU I ENERO NUES 1 1 Description of Front and Rear Panel Views 1 1 bea pedi 1 1 HearMIew Leute caet tret esM ade be a 1 9 Getting Started with the Instrument eese 1 14 Preparing the Instrument for Operation sse 1 14 Setting Up the 1 14 Standalone 1 14 Safety Instruction for Instruments with Tiltable 27 1 15 RACKMOUNTING e 1 15 EMI Protection 1 16 Connecting the Instrument to the AC
182. Fig 4 24 modulation modulation is performed by means of the built in quadrature modulator The RF signal is divided into two orthogonal and Q components inphase and quadrature phase Amplitude and phase are controlled in each path by the and Q modulation signal By adding the two components an RF output signal is generated that can be controlled in amplitude and phase IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM STAT ON The MODULATION OFF softkey switches off the modulation of the tracking generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM STAT OFF SOUR FM STAT OFF SOUR DM STAT OFE 4 201 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration Option External Generator Control FSP B10 The external generator control option permits to operate a number of commercially available generators as tracking generator on the FSP Thus scalar network analysis with the FSP is also possible outside the frequency range of the internal tracking generator when the appropriate generators are used The FSP also permits to set a frequency offset for frequency converting measurements when external generators are used For harmonics measurements or frequency converting measurements it is also possible to enter a factor by which the generator frequency is increased or reduced compared with the receive frequency of the FSP Only make sure that the resulting generator frequencies do not exceed the allowed setting range of the generator The settable l
183. Generator Control Configuration Frequency converting Measurements For frequency converting measurements e g on converters the external generator is able to set a constant frequency offset between the output frequency of the generator and the receive frequency of the analyzer and in addition the generator frequency as a multiple of the analyzer GEN OUTPUT Fig 4 34 Test setup for frequency converting measurements NETWORK Ment 1093 4820 12 The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of the frequency offset between the output signal of the generator and the input frequency of the analyzer The value range depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label FRQ If a positive frequency offset is entered the tracking generator generates an output signal above the receive frequency of the analyzer In case of a negative frequency offset it generates a signal below the receive frequency of the analyzer The output frequency of the generator is calculated as follows Generator frequency receive frequency frequency offset IEC IEEE bus command SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 1GHZ 4 213 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control FSP Configuration of an External Generator NETWORK menu RBH 3 MHz gt a UBU 10 MHz EXT SRC ON OFF Ref 20 dBn att 10 dB OFF SS I I MM ss SELECT GENER
184. ID ALT2 14kHz 4 96 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS The ADJ CHAN SPACING softkey opens a table for defining the channel spacings ACP CHANNEL SPACING Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other the entry of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes channel spacing ALT1 to be set to twice and channel spacing ALT2 to three times the adjacent channel spacing Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal channel spacing The same holds true for the ALT2 channels when the bandwidth of the ALT1 channel is entered Note The channel spacings can be set separately by overwriting the table from top to bottom IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH SPAC ACH 20kHz SENS POW ACH SPAC ALT1 40kHz SENS POW ACH SPAC ALT2 60kHz CP ACP The CP ACP ABS REL softkey channel power REL absolute relative switches between absolute and relative power y measurement in the channel CP ACP ABS The absolute power in the transmission channel and in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the Y axis e g in dBm dBuV REL In case of adjacent channel power measurement NO OF ADJ CHAN gt 0 the level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc In case of channel power measurement NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 the power of a transmission channel is displayed relative to the power of a reference channel defined by SET CP
185. L SPAN RBW AUTO 50 COUPLING SPAN RBW RATIO g MANUAL DEFAULT COUPLING FILTER TYPE N EM AU The BW key opens a menu for setting the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth the sweep time and their couplings The BW AUTO softkeys are used to couple the functions The coupling ratios are selected by means of the COUPLING RATIO softkey The BW MANUAL softkeys allow a parameter to be entered This parameter is not coupled to the other parameters Note With the BW AUTO softkeys the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth and the sweep time can be entered separately for the frequency domain span 0 Hz and the time domain span 0 Hz But with BW MANUAL softkeys the selected values apply to both the frequency and time domain 1093 4820 12 4 19 E 3 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time FSP 1093 4820 12 The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual data entry for the resolution bandwidth The resolution bandwidth can be selected in 1 3 10 steps in the range between 10 Hz and 10 MHz The nominal resolution bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth When FFT filters are used the lower limit of the bandwidth is 1 Hz FFT filters may be used with bandwidths up to 30 kHz For numeric inputs the values are always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rollkey or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards For filter type CHA
186. NGTH 4 36 6 243 GATE MODE LEVEL EDGE 4 35 6 243 GATE SETTINGS 4 35 6 242 GATED TRIGGER eene 4 34 6 242 6 244 GENERAL SETUP eiie uS EI 4 146 GPIB 5 4 146 6 264 GRID ABS REL uuu ccccsssccccccccccosscesscesscosscesece 4 16 6 121 GRID RANGE LOG 100 6 121 GRID RANGE LOG 6 121 HARDCOPY 4 175 6 144 HARDWARE INFO 4 156 6 6 6 116 HOED SCANESP Iz iei ette cota ee retia caa 6 8 4 39 6 294 IF 4 32 6 244 6 291 6 293 INACT CHAN 5 70000000 6 212 INPUT 4 159 4 160 6 114 6 115 INPUT RF 2 Ee 4 159 4 160 6 114 INSERT VALUE 4 127 INSTALL 4 153 INSTALL 4 177 INVERT Qs 6 214 ITEMS TO 4 167 6 166 LAST SPAN uoo uia 4 10 LEFTLMIEI ee 2 4 71 4 77 6 46 6 47 LEVEL AUTO ADJUST eee 6 212 LIMIT LINE AUTO 9 nnn 6 24 LIMIT LINE 202 8888 6 24 6 24 LIMIT ON OEF iii bedienen keen 4 85 6 46 LINES
187. NNEL or RRC the bandwidth is selected from the list of available channel filters given at the end of this chapter For data entry the cursor keys T and J scroll through this list The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green terisk on the display IEC IEEE bus command BAND AUTO OFF BAND 1MHz The VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual data entry for the video bandwidth The video bandwidth can be selected in 1 3 10 steps in the range between 1 Hz and 10 MHz For numeric inputs the values are always rounded to the nearest possible allowed bandwidth For rollkey or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green terisk on the display IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID AUTO OFF BAND VID 10 kHz 4 20 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the manual data entry for the sweep time At the same time the coupling of the sweep time is cancelled Other couplings VIDEO BW RES BW remain effective In the frequency domain span gt 0 Hz and for resolution bandwidths above 1 kHz the allowed sweep times for spans gt 3 2 kHz range from 2 5 ms through to 16000 s With spans below 3 2 kHz the maximum allowed sweep time is reduced to 5 s span Hz If FFT filters are used the sweep time is fixed by the span and the bandwidth an
188. None SW Handshake XON XOFF Owner Instrument Baud Data transmission rate The FSP supports baud rates between 110 and 19200 baud The default setting is 9600 baud BAUD RATE 19200 9600 4800 1200 IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600 Bits Number of data bits per word For the transmission of text without special characters 7 bits are adequate For binary data as well as for text with special characters 8 bits must be selected default setting IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER BITS 7 4 147 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Parity Bit parity check NONE no parity check default setting EVEN even parity check ODD odd parity check IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PAR NONE Stop bits Number of stop bits Available are 1 and 2 The default setting is 1 stop bit STOPBITS 1 2 IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER SBIT 1 HW Handshake Hardware handshake protocol The integrity of data transmission can be improved by the use of a hardware handshake mechanism which effectively prevents uncontrolled transmission of data and the resulting loss of data bytes For hardware handshake additional interface lines are used to transmit acknowledge signals with which the data transmission can be controlled and if necessary stopped until the receiver is ready to receive data again A prerequisite for using hardware handshaking is however that t
189. P ON CALC LIM ACP ACH RES CALC LIM ACP ALT RES The EDIT ACP LIMITS softkey opens a table for defining the limits for the ACP measurement ACP LIMITS The following rules apply for the limits A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel The limit applies to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel e Arelative and or absolute limit can be defined The check of both limit values can be activated independently e The FSP checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or relative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is exceeded the measured value is marked accordingly Note Measured values exceeding the limit are marked by a preceding asterisk IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM ACP ON CALC LIM ACP ACH OdB 0dB CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT1 OdB 0 CALC LIM ACP ALT1 STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT2 OdB OdB CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON PPP gt gt C 4 99 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Examples 1 Measurement of adjacent channel power for a specific standard The adjacent channel power is to be measured for a
190. PSK for example CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large compared to the average power For signals of this kind the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion The crest factor is defined as the peak power mean power ratio or logarithmically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal To reduce power consumption and cut costs transmitters are not designed for the largest power that could ever occur but for a power that has a specified probability of being exceeded e g 0 01 To measure the amplitude distribution the FSP has simple measurement functions to determine both the APD Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function In the APD display mode the probability of occurrence of a certain level is plotted against the level In the CCDF display mode the probability that the mean signal power will be exceeded is shown in percent Measurement Example Measuring the APD and CCDF of white noise generated by the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Configure the FSP for APD measurement Press the AMPT key and enter 60 dBm The FSP s intrinsi
191. RACE DETECTOR RMS Submenu MEAS C N C N The C N C No softkey opens the submenu for configuring the BH carrier noise ratio measurement The user can choose between measurement without C N and C No measurement with reference to the bandwidth C No In addition itis possible to select the bandwidth of the channel and to adapt the span CHANNEL Note BANDWIDTH The measurements are only available in the frequency domain span 0 ADJUST SETTINGS 1093 4820 12 4 112 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS 1093 4820 12 The C N and C No softkeys enable and disable the measurement of the carrier noise ratio the C No measurement also being referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth The maximum value of the current trace is determined when the function is activated and is marked by means of the REFERENCE FIXED marker Note The measurement is performed on the trace where MARKER 1 is located To measure another trace MARKER 1 has to be shifted to the trace in question using the SELECT TRACE softkey in the MKR menu If no marker is active MARKER 1 is activated when the function is switched on IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC POW CALC MARK FUNC POW CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CNO CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CNO CALC MARK FUNC POW OFF EL CN ES CN The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a window for selecting the measurement channel bandwidth The default setting is 14 kHz
192. REFL CORR COLL OPEN The CAL REFL SHORT softkey starts the short circuit calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration curve is calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory The order of the two calibration measurements is free After the calibration the following message is displayed NOTE calibration complete The message is cleared after approx 3 seconds IEC IEEE bus command CORR METH REFL 4 196 E 3 FSP Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 Calibration mechanism Calibration means a calculation of the difference between the currently measured power and a reference curve independent of the selected type of measurement transmission reflection The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are included in the reference dataset Even with normalization switched on the device settings can be changed in a wide area without stopping the normalization This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum For this purpose the reference dataset trace with 501 measured values is stored internally as a table of 501 points frequency level Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current device settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or
193. RSDLLibwrt short ud char far Wrt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibwrt short ud char Wrt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle file File the contents of which are sent to the device Example RSDLLibwrtf ud C db sav ibsta iberr 1 This function allows to send setting and query commands to the measuring instruments Whether the data is interpreted as complete command can be set using the function RSDLLibeot RSDLLibrd The function reads data from the device with the handle ud into the string Rd VB format Function RSDLLibrd ByVal ud ByVal Rd ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibrd short ud char far Rd short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibrd short ud char Rd short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Rd String into which the read data is copied Example RSDLLibrd ud Rd ibsta iberr 1 This function fetches the responses of the GPIB parser to a query In the case of Visual Basic programming a string of sufficient length must be generated before This can be done during the definition of the string or using the command Spaces Generation of a string of the length 100 Dim Rd as String 100 Dim Rd as String Rd Space 100 RSDLL
194. S SOURCE CAL DATA COMMENT GSM MASK The DATA SET LIST column lists all of the data sets which are stored in the selected directory The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the DATA SET CONTENTS column indicate the saved data subsets and the comment for the currently selected data set A prefixed to a data subset means that the latter is available in the instrument but that it has not been selected see SELECT ITEMS softkey IEC IEEE command 4 168 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Recalling Data Sets The DATA SET CLEAR softkey deletes the selected data set IEC IEEE command MMEM CLE STAT 1 test03 The DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkey deletes all data sets in the current directory Since in this case all available data sets are lost confirmation by the user is required IEC IEEE command MMEM CLE ALL The STARTUP HECALL softkey activates the selection of a data set which is automatically loaded when the instrument is powered on For that purpose the table DATA SET LIST CONTENT is opened analog to DATA SET LIST DATA SET 1151 DATA SET CONTENTS DATASET1 CONTENT S DATASET2 DATASET3 CURRENT SETTINGS ALL LIMIT LINES ALL TRACES SOURCE CAL DATA COMMENT GSM MASK The DATA SET LIST column displays all data sets present in the selected directory The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the STARTUP RECALL column indicate the saved data s
195. SET softkey allows the arithmetic level offset to be entered This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the Y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB The GRID ABS REL softkey switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis GRID ABS is the default setting ABS The labelling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level REL The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit dBm dBuV For setting RANGE LINEAR linear scaling labelling of axes in 96 the softkey is not displayed since the unit 96 itself implies a relative scale IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE ABS The HF INPUT 50 75 Q softkey switches the input impedance of the instrument between 50 default setting and 75 O The setting 75 should be used if the input impedance 50 Q is transformed to 75 using the corresponding adapter unit of type RAZ 25 in series to the input impedance of the analyzer The correction value used for the adaption is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 All levels specified in this operating manual refer to the default setting of the instrument 50 Q IEC IEEE bus command INP IMP 500HM 4 16 E 3 FSP Analyzer Level Display RF Input Electronic
196. The following figure shows the passband characteristics of the 30 kHz channel filter in the FSP Fig 2 38 Frequency response of the 30 kHz channel filter for measuring the power in the IS 95 adjacent channel 1093 4820 12 2 47 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Measurement Example 2 Measuring the adjacent channel power of an 15136 TDMA signal Test setup Ext Ref Out I Ref IN Note As the modulation spectrum of the IS136 signal leaks into the adjacent channel it makes a contribution to the power in the adjacent channel Exact tuning of the spectrum analyzer to the transmit frequency is therefore critical If tuning is not precise the adjacent channel power ratios in the lower and upper adjacent channels become asymmetrical The FSP s frequency and the generator frequency are therefore synchronized Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 850 MHz Level 20 dBm Modulation IS136 NADC Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Setup the FSP for synchronization to an external reference frequency Press the SETUP key gt Set the REFERENCE softkey to EXT 3 Set the center frequency to 850 MHz Press the FREQ key and enter 850 MHz 4 Configure adjacent channel power measurement for 15136 signals gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the CHAN PWR
197. UE RBH 3 MHz 10 dB UBI 18 MHz CAL Ref 0 att 30 dB SUT 100 ms TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN _HETUORK SCREEN B Fig 4 21 gt Measurement of 10dB attenuator pad with 1dB DIV IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RVAL 10dB The RECALL softkey restores the FSP settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if device settings were changed after calibration eg center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc The softkey is only available if the NETWORK mode has been selected e the memory contains a calibration dataset IEC IEEE bus command CORR REC 1093 4820 12 4 195 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out by means of a reflection coefficient measurement bridge w us wy ug UN UN UN f 9 9 08 CE ES E CE 89 1 Mess br cke Fig 4 22 Test Setup for Reflection Measurement Calibration of Reflection Measurement The calibration mechanism for reflection measurement is basically the same as the one used for transmission measurement NETWORK SOURCE CAL submenu 1093 4820 12 The CAL REFL OPEN softkey starts the open circuit calibration During calibration the following message is displayed SOURCE CAL in progress IEC IEEE bus command CORR METH
198. Up Move 0207 lt Back ancal 1093 4820 12 4 224 FSP gt The answer is Yes if the network comprises a DHCP server In this case you do not have to enter an IP address gt The answer is No if there is no DHCP server in the network In this case enter the IP address assigned to the instrument The IP address and the subnet mask are available from the network administrator Ask the network administrator whether a DHCP server is used Manual entry of an IP address not if a DHCP server is used gt Do change the Adapter setting gt Click on Specify an IP address gt Enter the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the instrument These addresses are assigned by your network administrator Note If the network card has been installed in the factory the default settings are IP Address 10 0 0 10 and Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Click on OK to leave the dialog The network bindings display opens next gt Do not change the settings and click Next E 3 FSP LAN Interface Network Setup Wizard gt The preselected computer and workgroup names ANALYZER and WORKGROUP can be confirmed using NEXT Note In Windows networks the computer name must be unique WORKGROUP E Computer accounting tre Warren 1093 4820 12 4 225 E 3 LAN Interface Network Setup Wizard Networking has been installed on this computer
199. V etc IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm The RANGE LOG 100 softkey sets the level display range to 100 dB IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 13 DISP WIND 1 RAC Y SPAC LOG DISP WIND 1 100DB E 3 Level Display RF Input Analyzer FSP 1093 4820 12 The RANGE LOG MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry of the level display range Display ranges from 10 to 200 dB are allowed in 10 dB steps Inputs which are not allowed are rounded to the next valid value The default setting is 100 dB IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG DISP WIND TRAC Y 120DB The RANGE LINEAR softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to linear scaling The horizontal lines are labelled in The grid has a decadic scaling IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LIN au dBmV dBpW VOLT AMPERE WATT The UNIT softkey opens a sub menu allowing to select the unit for the level axis The default setting is dBm In general the spectrum analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in rms values of an unmodulated sinewave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input resistance of 50 Q or 75Q conversion to other units is possible The units dBm dBmV dBuV dBuA dBpW V
200. WEEP 4 Example SWEEP COUNT parameter gt Press SWEEP key gt Press SWEEP COUNT softkey The window for entering the number of sweeps for the SINGLE SWEEP mode is opened The softkey is colored factory set red Data entry is described in the next section SWEEP COUNT 100 3 14 E 2 FSP 4 The softkey is used to select the parameter the setting is made in an alpha numeric data entry window The softkey function is switched on To switch off the function the softkey has to be pressed again 5 The softkey selects the parameter the setting is made in a selection table 1093 4820 12 Setting Parameters Example parameter MARKER gt Press MRK key gt Press MARKER 1 softkey The window for entering the marker frequency is opened The softkey is colored factory set red Marker1 is switched on and the peak search is started MARKER 1 5 42 03456788 MHz gt Press MARKER 2 softkey The entry window for the marker frequency of marker 2 is opened The softkey is colored red marker 2 is switched on and the MARKER 1 softkey turns green DELTA MARKER 2 5 1 746729018 2 gt Press MARKER 1 softkey again Marker 1 is switched off Example Selection of the sorting criteria of a file list gt Press FILE key gt Press FILE MANAGER softkey gt Press SORT MODE softkey A selection table is displayed The softkey is colored factory set red operation see be
201. a maximum search PEAK softkey is performed The marker can be set to the desired trace by means of MKR gt TRACE softkey Menu MKR FCTN 1093 4820 12 UR SELECT MARKER PEAK NOISE MEAS PHASE NOISE amp N DB DOWN PEAK LIST MARKER DEMOD 8 gt MKR DEMOD ON FM MKR STOP TIME CONT DEMOD fr 4 64 NEW SEARCH PH NOISE ON REF POINT LEVEL SORT MODE EVEL REF POINT LVL OFFSE REF POINT FREQUENCY PEAK EXCURSION PEAK SEARCH LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD PEAK LIST OFF 27 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR FCTN Activating the Markers Menu MKR FCTN The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the numerical selection of the marker in the data entry field Delta marker 1 is selected by input of O If the marker is switched off then it is switched on and can be moved later on IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK1 X value CALC MARK1 Y The PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the peak of the trace IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 MAX CALC DELT1 MAX Measurement of Noise Density The NOISE MEAS softkey switches the noise measurement for the active marker on
202. a of complex Signals Intermodulation Measurements If several signals are applied to a DUT with non linear characteristics unwanted mixing products are generated mostly by active components such as amplifiers or mixers The products created by 3 order intermodulation are particularly troublesome as they have frequencies close to the useful signals and compared with other products are closest in level to the useful signals The fundamental wave of one signal is mixed with the 27 harmonic of the other signal fst 2 fui fu2 1 fs2 2 fu2 fut 2 where fs1 and 152 are the frequencies of the intermodulation products and fu1 and fu2 the frequencies of the useful signals The following diagram shows the position of the intermodulation products in the frequency domain Level A Put Pu2 Psi Ps2 Af Af Af gt fst fui fu2 fs2 Frequency Fig 2 13 39 order intermodulation products Example f ui 100 MHz f u2 100 03 MHz fs1 2 f u1 f u2 2 100 MHz 100 03 MHz 99 97 MHz fs2 2 f u2 f u1 2 100 03 MHz 100 MHz 100 06 MHz The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the level of the two useful signals is increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products is increased by 3 dB The intermodulation distance ds is therefore reduced by 2 dB Fig 2 14 shows how the levels of the useful signals and the 3rd order intermodulation products
203. able ibcnt1 is updated with the number of transferred bytes each time a read or write function is called 1093 4820 12 4 244 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface Description of Interface Functions RSDLLibfind The function provides a handle for access to the device with the name udName VB format Function RSDLLibfind ByVal udName ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibfind char far udName short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibontl C format Unix short RSDLLibfind char udName short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter udName IP address of device Example ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl The function must be called prior to all other functions of the interface As return value the function provides a handle that must be indicated in all functions for access to the device If the device with the name udName is not found the handle has a negative value RSDLLibwrt This function sends data to the device with the handle ua VB format Function RSDLLibwrt ByVal ud ByVal Wrt ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibwrt short ud char far Wrt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibwrt short ud char Wrt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Wrt String sent to the device Example RSDLLibwr
204. ack Cancel 1093 4820 12 4183 E 3 Measurement Documentation FSP gt Mark printer and select it with OK gt Confirm the following request for the Cancel installation of a suitable printer driver with Shared Printers Expand by Default Help OK lt 3 Microsoft Windows Network NetWare or Compatible Network The list of printer drivers is displayed The manufacturers are listed in the window at the left the available printer drivers at the right Printer Information Description Status Documents Waiting gt Select the manufacturer in the Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with Manufacturers window and then the installation disk click Have Disk If pour printer is not listed consult your printer driver in the Printers window printer documentation for a compatible printer Note If the desired printer type is not listed the EE driver has not been installed In this case HP DeskJet 850C click HAVE DISK You are requested to HE Desce T insert a floppy with the respective printer HP DeskJet Portable driver Subsequently press OK and select the Hie ae desired driver After this the Service Pack 5 WERTE has to be newly installed see chapter Install Heo Windows NT Software Back Cancel gt Click Next If one or more printers have been installed a query is displayed in this window whether
205. ain and opens a submenu for configuration of the en EN power measurement The submenu allows selection of the type of RMS power measurement rms or mean power the settings for max hold and averaging as well as MEAN Lu b the definition of limits AVERAGE The power evaluation range can be limited by DEVIATION OP input of limit values D Note This softkey is only available in time 2 domain SPAN 0 START LIMIT STOP LIMIT E 1093 4820 12 4 83 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP POWER 1093 4820 12 The POWER ON OFF softkey switches the power measurement on and off When entering the submenu it is ON since the power measurement is already switched on with the TIME DOM POWER softkey in the main menu Note The measurement is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is placed To evaluate another trace marker 1 should be set on another trace using the SELECT TRACE softkey in menu MKR IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON CALC MARK FUNC SU PPE RES CALC MARK FUNC SU RMS ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS RES CALC MARK FUNC SU MEAN ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN RES CALC MARK FUNC SU SDEV ON CALC MARK FUNC SU SDEV RES The PEAK softkey switches on the calculation of the peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof For the maximum peak the largest peak value obtained since the activat
206. alibration functions for the transmission and reflection measurement CAL REFL E S SHORT The calibration of the reflection measurement CAL REFL and its functioning are described in separate CAL REFL sections OPEN To carry out a calibration for transmission measurements NORMALIZE the whole test setup is through connected THRU REF VALUE POSITION REF VALUE RECALL 1093 4820 12 4 205 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control FSP The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration of the transmission measurement It starts a sweep that records a reference trace This trace is then used to obtain the differences to the normalized values e RBU 3 MHz TG 20 dBm 10 MHz Ref dBm Att dB SUT 100 ms 1 SA CLRUR Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz Fig 4 28 Calibration curve for transmission measurement During the calibration the following message is displayed SOURCE CRL in progress After the calibration sweep the following message is displayed NOTE calibration complete This message is cleared after approx 3 seconds IEC bus command CORR METH TRAN 1093 4820 12 4 206 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration Normalization NETWORK SOURCE CAL menu The NORMALIZE softkey switches normalization on or off The softkey is only available if the memory contains a correction trace It is possible to shift the relativ
207. alling Windows NT Software gt Open Windows NT start menu by pressing lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt Select RUN Enter the command c sp sp5i386 lt ENTER gt The installation of the service pack begins the archive file being unpacked gt Check the box Accept the License Agreement gt Uncheck the box Backup files necessary and then click Install The service pack files installed Installation takes approx 5 minutes After installation has been completed you are requested to restart the instrument gt Click the Restart button The instrument restarts E 3 FSP Contents Getting Started Contents Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Getting coros ace Ge OU UID ES RES VO AOL ERU NOE S ULM SUD S CUPS 2 1 Level and Frequency Measurements 2 1 Measurement Example 1 Measuring Frequency Level using Markers 2 1 Measurement Example 2 Measuring Frequency with the Frequency Counter 2 3 Measurement of Harmonics eese essen 2 5 Measuring Harmonics with Frequency Sweeps sse nennen 2 7 Measurement Example Measuring the distance between fundamental wave and the 27 and 3 harmonics of the internal reference signal 2 7 High Sensitivity Harmonics 2 10 Measurement Exa
208. alue of the displayed spectrum Set marker to desired frequency using the rotary knob NOISE The FSP switches the sample detector on and sets the video bandwidth to 300 kHz 0 1 x RBW The power density level of inherent noise is displayed in dBm Hz in the marker info field Note The FSP noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density level It is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation RF Att from the displayed noise level 174 is to be added to the result to obtain the FSP noise figure 1093 4820 12 4 66 E 3 FSP Phase Noise Measurement Menu MKR FCTN 1093 4820 12 PHASE NOISE OFF REF POINT LVL OFFSET PEAK SEARCH Analyzer MKR FCTN The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE function on off Additionally the softkey opens the submenu for manually setting the reference point The phase noise measurement can be switched off in the submenu MARKER 1 reference marker is used as a reference for the phase noise measurement The frequency and level of the reference marker are used as fixed reference values i e the REFERENCE FIXED function is activated After switching on the phase noise measurement the reference level or the center frequency can thus be set in a way that the carrier is outside the displayed frequency range or for example a notch filter is switched on to suppress the carrier A noise power density mea
209. alue is displayed in the CH PWR REF field the default value is 0 dBm During the adjacent channel power measurement the power in the transmission channel becomes the reference value The display CH PWR REF is not required IEC IEEE bus command POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE The SWEEP TIME softkey activates the entry of the sweep time With the RMS detector a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results The function of the softkey is identical to the softkey SWEEP TIME MANUAL in the menu BW IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIM value If the NOISE CORR ON OFF softkey is activated the results will be corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range When the function is switched on a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen To enable the correction function in conjunction with the changed setting press the softkey once more A new reference measurement is carried out IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW NCOR ON 4 92 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS FAST ACP ON The FAST ACP softkey s
210. alyzers often depends on the selected resolution bandwidth In data sheets the displayed average noise level is often indicated for the smallest available bandwidth for the FSP 10 Hz The extra sensitivity obtained if the bandwidth is reduced may therefore deviate from the values indicated above The following table illustrates typical deviations from the noise figure for a resolution bandwidth of 10 kHz which is used as a reference value 0 Noise figure offset dB digital RBW 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 RBW kHz Fig 2 20 Change in FSP noise figure at various bandwidths The reference bandwidth is 10 kHz Impact of the video bandwidth The displayed noise of a spectrum analyzer is also influenced by the selected video bandwidth If the video bandwidth is considerably smaller than the resolution bandwidth noise spikes are suppressed i e the trace becomes much smoother The level of a sinewave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth A sinewave signal can therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small compared with the resolution bandwidth and thus be measured more accurately Impact of the detector Noise is evaluated differently by the different detectors The noise display is therefore influenced by the choice of detector Sinewave signals are weighted in the same way by all detectors i e the level display for a sinewave RF signal does not depend on the sele
211. amp As Integer 1093 4820 12 4 251 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP Example Dim ibsta As Integer Status variable Dim iberr As Integer Error variable Dim ibcntl As Long Count variable Dim ud As Integer Handle for measuring instrument Dim Result As String Buffer for simple results Dim Digits As Byte Number of digits of length indication Dim TraceBytes As Long Length of trace data in bytes Dim TraceData 501 As Single Buffer for floating point Binary data Set up connection to instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl Query trace data in real format Call RSDLLibwrt ud FORM DATA REAL 32 ibsta iberr ibcntl Call RSDLLibwrt ud TRACE TRACE1 ibsta iberr ibcntl Read number of digits of length indication Result Space 20 Call RSDLLilrd ud Result 2 ibsta iberr ibcntl Digits Val Result 2 1 Read length indication Result Space 20 Call RSDLLilrd ud Result Digits ibsta iberr 1 TraceBytes Val Left Result Digits and store Read out trace data Call RSDLLilrdTraceReal ud TraceData 0 TraceBytes ibsta iberr ibontl Programming examples Inthis example the start frequency of the instrument is queried Dim ibsta As Integer Status variable Dim iberr As Integer Error variable Dim ibcntl As Long Count variable Dim ud As Integer Handle
212. an case ates ae ae 4 122 phase noise oos 4 68 reference levalo 4 16 EE 4 32 Operating mode analyzer ed ae e 4 5 Operating 4 157 Option FSP B10 External Generator 4 203 FSP B16 LAN Interface 4 219 FSP B6 TV and HF 9 4 38 FSP B9 Tracking 4 187 Order n mber ite aeo ie eee cates 4 156 Orientation iie edet 4 177 Output AF OUTPUT iier rere meten IF 20 4 MHz noise source control Output level Overwrite mode OV ED ei ema 3 5 4 197 4 212 Packing tee bone pA Ie 8 1 1 55 02 Parallel poll enable register PPE 5 22 Parameter block dala did es 5 14 DOOM ANR C 5 13 COMING betes nr repr ete Le tee ertet 3 16 numerical values 5 13 Selection iia proie 3 13 ino 5 14 PK trace negotiis 3 5 Polarity external trigger gate sess 4 35 trigger edge iiri e ee irt eroi genre 4 32 VIJE X ucc tete Power bandwidth percentage a Power Cables aat A ee Power measurement esses CP ACP iain occupied bandwiath
213. an optimum mixer level is 64 dBc Since at a given signal level the mixer level is set in 10 dB steps with the 10 dB RF attenuator the optimum 10 dB range is shown in the figure it spreads from 11 dBm to 21 dBm The obtainable dynamic range in this range is 60 dB To set the attenuation parameter manually the following method is recommended RF attenuation so that the mixer level measured channel power RF attenuation is between 11 dBm and 21 dBm e Setthe reference level so that it is 20 dB less than the RF attenuation which has been set This method is automated with the FSP s ADJUST REF LEVEL function Especially in remote control mode e g in production environments it is best to correctly set the attenuation parameters prior to the measurement as the time required for automatic setting can be saved Note To measure the FSP s intrinsic dynamic range for W CDMA adjacent channel power measurements a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is required at the output of the transmitter A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz for example can be used 1093 4820 12 2 57 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Amplitude distribution measurements If modulation types that do not have a constant envelope in the time domain are used the transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation Q
214. and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT LIMIT LINE sub menu used for editing limit lines In the table heading the characteristics of the limit line can be entered The data points for frequency time and level values are entered in the columns Name Enter name Domain Select domain Unit Select units X Axis Select interpolation Limit Select upper and lower limit value X Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the X axis Y Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y axis Margin Entry of margin Threshold Entry of vertical threshold only with relative vertical scaling Comment Enter comments Time Frequency gt Enter time frequency for the data points Limit dBm Enter magnitudes for the data points Note Domain unit X scaling and Y scaling cannot be modified as soon as reference values have been entered in the data section of the table The NAME softkey enables the entry of characteristics in the table heading Name Enter name A maximum of 8 characters is permitted for each name All names must be compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names The instrument stores all limit lines with the LIM extension IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 NAME GSM1 Domain Select time or frequency domain The default setting is frequency Note A change in domain frequency time is only permitted when the data point table is empty IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT DOM FREQ
215. annel bandwidth These subspectra are then combined by integration of the trace pixels With the IBW method the transmission channel or adjacent channels are marked by vertical lines at a distance of half the channel bandwidth to the left and to the right of the corresponding channel center frequency see Fig 4 6 In the time domain method the power trace in the different channels is shown see Fig 4 7 For both methods the results are listed in tables in the lower half of the screen The FSP offers predefined standard settings which can be selected from a table for the common mobile radio standards Thus channel configuration is performed automatically without the need to enter the corresponding parameters manually For some standards the channel power and the adjacent channel power are to be weighted by means of a root raised cosine filter corresponding to a receive filter This type of filtering is switched on automatically for both methods on selecting the standard e g NADC TETRA or 3GPP W CDMA RBH 10 kHz xUBI 300 kHz Ref 23 2 dBm Att 10 dB 100 ms 1 CLRHR CP RCP OFF COHFIG 5 enm serae a 511 7 kHz Span 5 117 MHz Tx Channel 2 4 dBm Bandwidth 1 2288 MHz HOISE CORR OH REFERENCE Adjacent Channel Lower 52 36 dBc Bandwidth 38 kHz Upper 52 14 dBc Spacina 75 kHz Alternate Channel Lower 78 77 dB
216. apable of identifying a defective module in case of failure During the selftest a message box appears in which the current test and its result is shown The test sequence can be aborted by pressing ENTER ABORT All modules are checked consecutively and the test result selftest PASSED or FAILED is output in the message box IEC IEEE bus command TST The SELFTEST RESULTS softkey calls the SELFTEST table in which the results of the module test are displayed In case of failure a short description of the failed test the defective module the associated value range and the corresponding test results are indicated SELFTEST SELFTEST FAILED 24 APR 1999 14 25 Service level 0 TEST RESULT VALID RANGE VALUE Voltages OK Pretune DAC OK Synthesizer FAIL Frontend2 128MHz Ref unlock FAIL 1 25V 3 5V 1 14V Frontendl 384MHz Ref Input OK 0 5 0 6V ov Signal Path OK IEC IEEE bus command DIAG SERV STE RES The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the SELFTEST HESULTS table to the next or previous page IEC IEEE bus command 4 161 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Hardware Adjustment Some of the FSP modules can be realigned This realignment can become necessary after calibration due to temperature drift or aging of components see service manual instrument Caution The realignment should be carried out by qualified personnel since the changes considerably influence the measuremen
217. ard including trackball to the front panel is recommended If no trackball is available a PS 2 mouse should be connected additionally to the rear panel see section Connecting a Mouse and Connecting a Keyboard 1093 4820 12 4 180 E 3 FSP Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by All settings will be managed and configured on this computer Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator lt Back emen Add Printer Wizard Click the check box next to the 5 vou want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description v Local Port LPT2 Local Port LPT3 Local Port COM1 Local Port Local Local Add Pott Configure Port Enable printer pooling Add Printer Wizard xz Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your Printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Gestetner Printers HP DeskJet 850C HP DeskJet 855C HP DeskJet Plus HP DeskJet Portable
218. arker and at the delta markers When the powers of the two AM side bands are unequal the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation depth calculation Measurement example The AM modulation depth of a carrier modulated with 1 kHz is to be measured at 100 MHz PRESET The FSP is set to the default setting CENTER 100 MHz center frequency is set to 100 MHz SPAN 5 kHz The span is set to 5 kHz AMPT 0 dBm The reference level is set to 0 dBm MKR FCTN MARKER 1 is switched on and positioned at the maximum of the displayed trace MODULATION The measurement of the AM modulation depth is DEPTH 1 kHz switched on MARKERS 2 and 3 delta markers are set to the adjacent peak values of the trace and are activated for the frequency entry The AM modulation depth is output in in the marker info field When 1 kHz is entered MARKER 2 can be exactly positioned on 1 kHz and MARKER 3 at 1 kHz from the reference marker IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC MDEP ON CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES 1093 4820 12 4 114 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS Measurement of the Third Order Intercept If several signals are applied to a transmission twoport with nonlinear characteristic intermodulation products appear at its output by the sums and differences of the signals The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic The intermodu
219. armonic of the signal The frequency and level related to marker 1 on the fundamental wave are displayed in the marker info field at the top of the screen see Fig 2 3 Start 188 MHz 38 MHz Stop 488 MHz Fig 2 3 Measuring the harmonic distance of the internal reference generator Delta marker 2 1 and Delta marker 3 T1 indicate the distance between the fundamental wave and the 27 and 39 harmonics In order to make the harmonics grow out of the noise the following things can be done e Reducing the video bandwidth e Averaging the trace e Reducing the resolution bandwidth The noise of the analyzer or the DUT depending on which one is higher is suppressed by reducing the video bandwidth and by averaging the trace Especially for low S N ratios the measurement uncertainty is reduced using the two averaging methods since the signal under test is also freed from noise 8 Reduce noise by reducing the video bandwidth gt Press the BWkey gt Press the VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey gt Reduce the video bandwidth e g to 10 kHz using the spinwheel turn knob counterclockwise or enter 10 kHz 1093 4820 12 2 8 E 2 FSP Measurement of Harmonics The noise is clearly smoothed and the sweep time is increased to 25 ms i e the measurement lasts longer The displayed video bandwidth is marked with an asterisk to indicate that it is no longer coupled to the resolution bandwidth see F
220. ased to obtain stable measurement results 1093 4820 12 4 65 E 3 MKR FCTN Analyzer FSP The FSP uses the following correction factors to evaluate the noise density from the marker level e Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth the bandwidth correction value is deducted from the marker level It is 10 x Ig 1 Hz BW noise where BW noise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter RBW Sample detector e As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging 1 05 dB is added to the marker level This is the difference between the average value and the RMS value of white noise e With a logarithmic level axis 1 45 dB is added additionally Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value that is 1 45 dB lower than that of linear averaging RMS detector e With the exception of bandwidth correction no further corrections are required for the RMS detector since it already indicates the power with every point of the trace To allow a more stable noise display the adjacent symmetric to the measurement frequency points of the trace are averaged In time domain mode the measured values are averaged versus time after a sweep IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON CALC MARK FUNC NOIS RES Example Measurement of inherent FSP noise PRESET The FSP is set to default setting MARKER Marker 1 is switched on and set to the maximum v
221. ate Mode LEVEL Gate Mode EDGE Ext Gate Meas active lt gt lt gt lt gt Delay Length Fig 4 3 Timing diagram for GATE GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH This softkey requires the EXTERN or IF POWER trigger mode If a different mode is active IF POWER is automatically selected Gated sweep operation is also possible in the time domain This enables e g in burst signals level variations of individual slots to be displayed versus time To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep the enhancement label GAT is displayed on the screen This label appears to the right of the window for which the gate is configured IEC IEEE bus command SWE EGA ON SWE EGAT SOUR IFP SWE EGAT SOUR EXT 4 34 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 GATE MODE LEVEL POLARITY POS NEG GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH SWEEPTIME PRINT SCREEN GATE MODE POLARITY NEG Analyzer Triggering the Sweep The GATE SETTINGS softkey calls a submenu for making all the settings required for gated sweep operation At the same time a transition is made to the time domain span 0 and the time parameters GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH are represented as vertical lines This allows the required gate time parameters to be set easily For highly accur
222. ate setting of gate delay and gate length the x axis can be altered using the ZOOM x AXIS softkey in a way that the signal range concerned e g one full burst is displayed Then the sampling time and duration can be set by GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH in a way that the desired portion of the signal is shown When quitting the submenu the program will return to the frequency domain provided it was active before The original span is restored so the desired measurement can now be performed with the accurately set gate IEC IEEE bus command The GATE MODE LEVEL EDGE softkey selects the trigger mode Gated sweep is possible in the level triggered as well as in the edge triggered mode If level triggering is selected the GATE LENGTH softkey becomes inactive and cannot be operated IEC IEEE bus command SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE The POLARITY POS NEG softkey controls the polarity of the EXT TRIGGER GATE control line In case of level triggering the sweep is stopped by POLARITY POS and logic 0 signal the signal 717 will restart the sweep after the GATE DELAY time has elapsed In case of edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the duration of GATE LENGTH after a delay GATE DELAY has elapsed Changing the polarity automatically implies a transition of the trigger edge polarity POLARITY softkey in the higher menu IEC IEEE bus command SWE EGAT POL POS
223. ate the roll key until reaching the required value The variation step size increases with increasing rotational speed Turning the roll key clockwise increases the value turning it counterclockwise decreases the value Example md 1 75 GHz Note When the value is modified by means of the roll key or the cursor keys the new value is immediately set Press one of the unit keys The unit is entered in the entry window and the new setting is accepted by the instrument For dimensionless quantities Press the ENTER key or the roll key The new setting is accepted by the instrument A few data entry windows close automatically whereas others like the entry window for the start frequency remain open even after termination of the entry They can be closed by pressing the ESC key If an error occurs a corresponding error message is displayed in the status line of the entry window e g Out of range Value adjusted etc In this case the new value is not accepted for the instrument setting Example o d 0 Hz out of range Position the cursor beside the digit which is to be deleted using the cursor keys or 9 Press the BACK key The entry left to the cursor is deleted Deleting an entry Enter new numbers The number is inserted to the left of the cursor the other numbers are shifted right 3 17 E 2 Setting Parameters Restoring the original value Aborting the entry 10
224. ation in the lower part of the screen The various channels are represented by vertical lines on the graph The frequency span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct results To obtain stable results especially in the adjacent channels 30 kHz bandwidth which are narrow in comparison with the transmission channel bandwidth 1 23 MHz the RMS detector is used 1093 4820 12 2 44 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals 5 Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level gt Press the ADJUST REF LVL softkey The FSP sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range The following figure shows the result of the measurement 500 kHz Fig 2 34 Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA 1595 signal The repeatability of the results especially in the narrow adjacent channels strongly depends on the measurement time since the dwell time within the 30 kHz channels is only a fraction of the complete sweep time A longer sweep time may increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value of the adjacent channel power but this increases measurement time To avoid long measurement times the FSP measures the adjacent channel power in the time domain FAST ACP In the FAST ACP mode the FSP measures the power of each channel at the defined channel
225. automatically adapt itself to the applied AC voltage range 100 to 240 V AC 40 to 400 Hz External voltage selection or adaptation of the fuses are not necessary The AC power connector is located on the rear panel see below gt Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered with the instrument Power connector As the instrument is designed according to the regulations for safety class EN61010 it must be connected to a power with earthing contact Switching the Instrument On Off Caution Do not power down during booting Such a switch off may lead to corruption of the hard disk files AC power switch on the rear panel Power switch Position ON Power switch Power connector In the position the instrument is in standby mode or in operation depending on position of the ON STANDBY key at the front of the instrument Note The AC power switch may remain ON continuously Switching to OFF is only required when the instrument must be completely removed from the AC power source Position O OFF The 0 position implies an all pole disconnection of the instrument from the AC power source 1093 4820 12 1 16 E 3 FSP Getting Started with the Instrument ON STANDBY switch on the front panel Standby switch ON STANDBY The ON STANDBY switch activates two different operating modes indicated by coloured LEDs cap Operation ON ON STANDBY is depress
226. ays it If a trace is frozen by VIEW the instrument settings can be changed without the displayed trace being modified exception level display range and reference level see below The fact that the trace and the current instrument setting do not agree any more is indicated by an enhancement label at the right edge of the grid If in the VIEW display mode the level display range RANGE or the reference level REF LEVEL are changed FSP automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC MODE VIEW The BLANK softkey activates the blanking of the trace on the screen IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC OFF The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps used for averaging The allowed range of values is 0 to 30000 and the following should be observed Sweep Count 0 means running averaging Sweep Count 1 means no averaging being carried out Sweep Count gt 1 means averaging over the selected number of sweeps in the continuous sweep mode averaging is performed until the set number of sweeps is attained and is then continued as running averaging The default setting is running averaging Sweep Count 0 The number of sweeps used for averaging is the same for all active traces in the selected diagram Note The setting of the swee
227. bandwidth while being tuned to the center frequency of the channel in question The digital implementation of the resolution bandwidths makes it possible to select a filter characteristics that is precisely tailored to the signal In case of CDMA 1895 the power in the useful channel is measured with a bandwidth of 1 23 MHz and that of the adjacent channels with a bandwidth of 30 kHz Therefore the FSP jumps from one channel to the other and measures the power at a bandwidth of 1 23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector The measurement time per channel is set with the sweep time It is equal to the selected measurement time divided by the selected number of channels The five channels from the above example and the sweep time of 100 ms give a measurement time per channel of 20 ms Compared to the measurement time per channel given by the span 5 MHz and sweep time 100 ms equal to 1 66 ms per 30 kHz channel used in the example this is a far longer dwell time on the adjacent channels factor of 12 In terms of the number of uncorrelated samples this means 20000 33 us 606 samples per channel measurement compared to 1667 33us 50 5 samples per channel measurement Repeatability with a confidence level of 95 is increased from 1 4 dB to 0 38 dB as shown in Fig 2 28 For the same repeatability the sweep time would have to be set to 1 2 s with the integration method The following figure shows the standard deviation of the results as a funct
228. bandwidth above the level threshold This can be achieved by manually modifying the center frequency for example On switching on the softkey is highlighted and the search bandwidth and the threshold value are marked on the diagram by two vertical lines and one horizontal line All these lines are allocated the designation TRK At the same time a submenu is opened in which the search bandwidth the threshold value and the trace can be modified for the maximum search The softkey is only available in the frequency domain span 0 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC STR OFF The TRACK ON OFF softkey switches on and off signal tracking IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC STR OFF The TRACK BW softkey defines the search bandwidth for signal tracking The frequency range is symmetrical with respect to the center frequency IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC STR BAND 10KHZ The TRACK THRESHOLD softkey defines the threshold value for signal detection The value is always entered as an absolute level value IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC STR THR 70DBM The SELECT TRACE softkey selects the trace on which signal tracking is to be performed 145 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC STR TRAC 1 4 10 E 1 FSP Analyzer Frequency and Span Setting the Frequency Span SPAN Key SPAN menu 1093 4820 12 FREQ SPAN EA The SPAN key opens a menu which offers various options for setting the span
229. be used in all operating modes Recording of test setup calibration values SOURCE CAL and normalization with the correction values NORMALIZE are only possible in the NETWORK mode Note In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the FSP and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended to connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the FSP and to enable usage of the external Reference on the FSP via SETUP REFERENCE EXT Like the internal tracking generator the external generator is activated by means of the NETWORK hotkey in the hotkey bar at the screen bottom SPECTRUN METHORK SCREEH B 1093 4820 12 4 203 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control FSP External Generator Settings The NETWORK hotkey opens the menu for setting the functions of the external generator CAL EXT SRC gt gt TRANS ON OFF CAL REFL SELECT SHORT GENERATOR CAL REFL FREQUENCY OPEN SWEEP SOURCE NORMALIZE CAL 3 REF VALUE POSITION REF VALUE RECALL EXT SOURCE 8 Note Other softkeys are available in the displayed menus for controlling the internal tracking generator when o
230. between 0 and 1 In contrary to use of marker in frequency or time domain marker is input in level values and the output is in percentage values Example Measurement of CCDF 1595 BTS signal level 0 dBm frequency 800 MHz PRESET Switch on preset settings FREQ CENTER 800 MHz Set center frequency to 800 MHz AMPT 10 dBm Set reference level to 10 dBm BW 3 MHz Set resolution bandwidth to 3 MHz resolution bandwidth shall be wider then signal bandwidth 1 25 MHz in order to have the complete signal within the resolution bandwidth MEAS Call the menu for measurement functions SIGNAL STATISTIC Call the menu for signal statistics measurement CCDF ON OFF Switch on measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function The FSP switches to zero span mode The power of the signal and the CCDF is calculated for the number of samples selected With the CCDF function sample detector and video bandwidth are set automatically NO OF SAMPLES 10000 Set the number of measurement samples to 10000 SINGLE MEAS Start the measurement sequence At the end the resulting trace will display the CCDF for the measured 10000 samples 1093 4820 12 4 111 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Measurement of Carrier Noise Ratio C N and C N Using the carrier noise measurement function the FSP determines the C N ratio which can also be shown normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth function C N To determine the noise power a cha
231. bus command FREQ CENT LINK RBW FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT The X RBW softkey allows the factor defining the center frequency step size to be entered as of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT FREQ CENT LINK RBW LINK FACT 20PCT The CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and the step size to the value of the center frequency This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic content because by entering the center frequency each stroke of the STEP key selects the center frequency of another harmonic IEC IEEE bus command The MARKER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and the step size to the value of the marker This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic content at the marker position because by entering the center frequency each stroke of the STEP key selects the center frequency of another harmonic IEC IEEE bus command The MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering fixed step size IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT STEP 120MHz 4 8 1 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Frequency and Span The START softkey activates the window for manually entering the start frequency The allow
232. c Bandwidth 38 kHz Upper 77 30 dBc Spacing 1 98 MHz Fig 4 6 Screen display of adjacent channel power measurement using the IBW method 1093 4820 12 4 88 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS Ref 9 5 dBm Att 10 dB SUT 100 ms Center 805 MHz 10 msz j Tx Channel Pouer 20 12 dBm Bandwidth 1 2288 MHz Adjacent Channel Lower 52 29 dBc Bandwidth 3 kHz Upper 52 10 dBc Spacing 750 kHz Alternate Channel Loner 72 86 dBc Bandwidth 3 kHz Upper 72 91 dBc Spacing 1 98 MHz Fig 4 7 Screen display of adjacent channel power measurement using the time domain method Limit values for the adjacent channel power can be defined for the measurement If limit checking is switched on a pass fail information indicating that the power has been exceeded is displayed during the measurement in the table in the lower half of the screen Note With the CP ACP measurement switched on the functions SPLIT SCREEN and FULL SCREEN are inhibited 1093 4820 12 4 89 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP The channel configuration is defined in the MEAS CHAN POWER ACP menu CP ACP OFF 1093 4820 12 CP ACP NO OF ACP LIMIT ON OFF ADJ CHAN CHECK CP ACP CHANNEL EDIT STANDARD BANDWIDTH LIMIT CP ACP ADJ CHAN CONFIGg BANDWIDTH SET CP ADJ CHAN REFERENCE SPACING SWEEP CP ACP TIME ABS NOISE RR ON FAST ACP CHAN PWR ON HZ FULL SIZE SELECT DIAGRAM TRACE ADJUST
233. c noise is displayed at the top of the screen Press the MEAS key gt Press the SIGNAL STATISTIC 2 softkey gt Set the APD softkey to ON The FSP sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the amplitude probability distribution APD The number of uncorrelated level measurements used for the measurement is 100000 The mean power and the peak power are displayed in dBm The crest factor peak power mean power is output as well see Fig 2 47 1 In the literature APD is also used for the probability of amplitude violation This is the complimentary function to the APD function of FSP The term PDF Probability Density Function which is frequently used in the literature corresponds to the APD function of FSP 1093 4820 12 2 58 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Fig 2 47 Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 3 Switch to the CCDF display mode gt Set the CCDF softkey to ON The APD measurement is switched off and the CCDF display mode is switched on Att 20 dB Fig 2 48 The CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power The level above the mean power is plotted along the X axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the Y axis 1093 4820 12 2 59 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP 4 Bandwidth selection If the amplitude dis
234. c transmission standard the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered The default setting is 14 KHz The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters of the FSP with ADJUST SETTINGS IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH BWID 14kHz 1093 4820 12 4 103 E 3 MEAS Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The ADJUST REF LVL softkey adjusts the reference level of the FSP to the measured total power of the signal The softkey is activated after the first sweep with the measurement of the occupied bandwidth has been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path of the FSP will not be overloaded and the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the reference level If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level the signal path cannot be overloaded IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH PRES RLEV The ADJUST SETTINGS softkey optimizes the instrument settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the specified channel bandwidth All instrument settings relevant for power measurement within a specific frequency range such as frequency span 3 x channel bandwidth e re
235. ccording to the currently set configuration gt Press the CP ACP CONFIG 4 softkey The FSP enters the submenu for configuring the channel gt Press the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey and enter 1 23 MHz The FSP displays the 1 23 MHz channel as two vertical lines which are symmetrical to the center frequency gt Press the PREV key The FSP returns to the main menu for channel and adjacent channel power measurement gt Press the ADJUST SETTINGS softkey The settings for the frequency span the bandwidth RBW and VBW and the detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measurement 1093 4820 12 2 31 E 2 Noise Measurements FSP Fig 2 26 Measurement of the FSP s intrinsic noise power in a 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth 5 Stabilizing the measurement result by increasing the sweep time gt Press the SWEEP TIME softkey and enter 7 5 By increasing the sweep time to 15 the trace becomes much smoother thanks to the RMS detector and the channel power measurement display is much more stable 6 Referring the measured channel power to a bandwidth of 1 Hz gt Press the CHAN PWR Hz softkey The channel power is referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz The measurement is corrected by 10 log ChanBW with ChanBW being the channel bandwidth that was selected Method of calculating the channel power When measuring the channel power the FSP integrates the linear power which corresponds to the levels of the pixel
236. command CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Measurement example Small span harmonics measurement to increase sensitivity CW signal eg 100 MHz 0 dBm with harmonics at the RF input of FSP PRESET CENTER 100 MHz SPAN 1 MHz AMPL 3 dBm MKR MARKER 2 REFERENCE FIXED CENTER 200 MHz MKR gt PEAK 1093 4820 12 FSP is set to the default setting The center frequency of FSP is set to 100 MHz The span is set to 1 MHz The reference level is set to 3 dBm 3 dB above the ex pected level MARKER 1 is switched on 1 highlighted in the softkey and set to the signal peak MARKER 2 is switched on and automatically defined as the delta marker DELTA is highlighted on MARKER NORM DELTA softkey The frequency and level of MARKER 1 are a reference for the delta marker The center frequency is set to 200 MHz frequency of the 2nd harmonic The reference level may have to be re duced to see the 2nd harmonic from the noise This does not affect the reference level set with REFERENCE FIXED The delta marker jumps to the 2nd harmonic of the signal The level spacing of the harmonic to the fundamental is displayed in the marker info field 4 62 E 3 FSP MKR Analyzer 1093 4820 12 The MARKER ZOOM softkey expands the area around MARKER 1 With the zoom function more details of the spectrum can be seen The desired display range can be defined in an entry window The following sweep is s
237. cted detector provided that the signal to noise ratio is high enough The measurement accuracy for signals in the vicinity of intrinsic spectrum analyzer noise is also influenced by the detector which has been selected The FSP has the following detectors Maximum peak detector If the max peak detector s selected the largest noise display is obtained since the spectrum analyzer displays the highest value of the IF envelope in the frequency range assigned to a pixel at each pixel in the trace With longer sweep times the trace indicates higher noise levels since the probability of obtaining a high noise amplitude increases with the dwell time on a pixel For short sweep times the display approaches that of the sample detector since the dwell time on a pixel is only sufficient to obtain an instantaneous value Minimum peak detector The min peak detector indicates the minimum voltage of the IF envelope in the frequency range assigned to a pixel at each pixel in the trace The noise is strongly suppressed by the minimum peak detector since the lowest noise amplitude that occurs is displayed for each test point If the signal to noise ratio is low the minimum of the noise overlaying the signal is displayed too low At longer sweep times the trace shows smaller noise levels since the probability of obtaining a low noise amplitude increases with the dwell time on a pixel For short sweep times the display approaches that of the sample detector sinc
238. ction measurement CAL REFL and its mechanisms are described in separate BECA sections OPEN To carry out a calibration for transmission measurements NORMALIZE the whole test setup is through connected THRU REF VALUE POSITION REF VALUE RECALL 1093 4820 12 4 190 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration of the transmission measurement It starts a sweep that records a reference trace This trace is then used to calculate the difference for the normalized values e RBH 3 MHz TG 20 dBm UBH 18 MHz SOURCE Ref dBm Att dB 100 ns OFF 1 SA CLRUR Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz Fig 4 17 Calibration curve for transmission measurement During the calibration the following message is displayed SOURCE CAL in proaress After the calibration the following message is displayed NOTE calibration complete This message will be cleared automatically after approx 3 seconds IEC IEEE bus command CORR METH TRAN 4 191 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP Normalization NETWORK SOURCE CAL menu The NORMALIZE softkey switches the normalization on or off The softkey is only available if the memory contains a correction trace It is possible to shift the relative reference point within the grid using the REF VALUE POSITION softkey Thus the trace can be shifted from the upper border of the
239. ction of the Network Protocols Note The network administrator knows the protocols to be used For the RSIB interface the TCP IP protocol must be installed in any case Network Setup Wizard gt Select the desired protocols and confirm using NEXT Select the networking protocols that are used on your network IF you are unsure contact your system administrator Y NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport F NetBEUI Protocol Select from list lt Back Next gt Cancel Selection of the Network Services To be able to utilize the resources in the network it is necessary to install the respective services Note The network administrator knows the services to be used Network Setup Wizard gt During the first installation the selected services cannot be changed Listed below are the services that will be installed by the system You may add to this list by clicking the Select from list button Further services can be added after completion of the installation NetBIOS Interface m Workstation 8 Server Select from list lt Back en 1093 4820 12 4 222 E 3 FSP LAN Interface Completion of the Installation Network Setup Wizard gt Start the installation by clicking on NEXT lt p Windows NT Setup gt Enter drive 386 and click on Continue Note If the instrument is equipped with the B2
240. ctivates the input of a value which is assigned to the reference line With default settings the reference line corresponds to a difference of 0 dB between the currently measured trace and the reference trace Setting the REF VALUE to a different value helps to compensate for changes to the level conditions in the signal path after the calibration data have been recorded If eg after a source calibration a 10 dB attenuation is inserted into the signal path between DUT and FSP input the measurement trace will be moved by 10 dB down Entering REF VALUE of 10 will then result in the reference line for difference calculation being moved by 10 dB down as well This means that the measured trace will be placed on it as displayed in figure 4 17 REF VALUE always refers to the active window REF POSITION RBH 3 MHz 54 x 18 MHz Ref dBm Att dB SUT 1s TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN SCREEN B Fig 4 20 Measurement with REF VALUE 10 dB and REF VALUE POSITION 50 1093 4820 12 4 194 E 3 FSP Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 After the reference line has been moved by entering a REF VALUE of 10 dB the deviation from the nominal power level can be displayed with high resolution eg 1 dB div The power is still displayed in absolute values which means that in the above example 1 dB below the nominal power reference line 11 dB attenuation REF VAL
241. d as described below Existing software may only be modified using update software released by Rohde amp Schwarz Additionally only programs authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz for use on the FSP may be run on the instrument Do not power down during booting Such a switch off may lead to corruption of the hard disk files The instrument runs under the operating system Windows NT The computer can be used to install and configure device drivers that were authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Any further use of the computer function is only allowed under the conditions described in this operating manual Login Windows NT requires a login process during which the user is asked for identification by entering his name and password As a factory default the instrument is configured for Auto Login i e the login is performed automatically and in the background The user name used for this is instrument and the password is also instrument in small letters Administrator level The NT user account used for the autologin function has administrator access rights After a software installation that requires administrator rights e g the installation of new printer drivers Service Pack 5 of Windows NT has to be re installed The necessity to re install the service pack is indicated in the corresponding operating manual chapters The installation of the Service Pack is described in the section Installing Windows NT Software Calling the Windows NT star
242. d in the diagram as a horizontal line To indicate that a trigger mode other than FREE RUN has been set the enhancement label TRG is displayed on the screen If two windows are displayed TRG appears next to the appropriate window The option and HF Trigger FSP B6 adds a number of trigger functions for the analysis of TV signals to this menu see section Option FSP B6 TV and RF Trigger page 4 38 TRIGGER menu Option FSP B6 Option FSP B6 TV TRIG TV TRIGGER GATE TRIG FREE RUN gt J 5 SETTINGS ON OFF LEVEL POLARITY VIDEO VERT SYNC et VERT SYNC GATE EXTERN ODD FIELD DELAY VERT SYNC GATE IF POWER EVEN FIELD LENGTH Option FSP B6 RF POWER HOR SYNC TRIGGER SWEEP OFFSET TIME POLARITY VIDEO POL NEG LINES TRIGGER 525 GATE CCVS SETTINGS amp EXT 1 The FREE RUN softkey activates the free run sweep mode i e start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately FREE RUN 15 the default setting of FSP IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR IMM The VIDEO softkey activates triggering through the displayed voltage For the video triggering mode a horizontal trigger line is shown in the diagram It may be used to set the trigger threshold between 0 and 100
243. d opaq text Data entry field opaq background 3D shade bright part 3D shade dark part Softkey state on Softkey state data entry Logo IEC IEEE bus command The BRIGHTNESS softkey serves for determining the brightness of the graphic element selected A value between 0 and 10096 can be entered IEC IEEE bus command HCOP CMAP5 HSL lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt The TINT softkey serves for determining the hue of the element selected The percentage entered refers to a continuous color spectrum from red 096 to blue 10096 IEC IEEE bus command HCOP CMAP5 HSL lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt 4 179 E 3 FSP Measurement Documentation Installation of a Local Printer The SATURATION softkey serves for determining the saturation of the element selected A value between 0 and 100 can be entered IEC IEEE bus command HCOP CMAP5 HSL lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey opens a list from which predefined colors for the elements displayed can be selected COLOR BLACK BLUE BROWN GREEN CYAN RED MAGENTA YELLOW WHITE GRAY LIGHT GRAY LIGHT BLUE LIGHT GREEN LIGHT CYAN LIGHT RED LIGHT MAGENTA IEC IEEE bus command HCOP CMAP1 26 PDEF color The SET TO DEFAULT softkey reactivates the default color setting OPTIMIZED COLORS IEC IEEE bus command Note For an easy operation of the subsequent dialogs connection of a PS 2 keybo
244. d therefore cannot be set In time domain span 0 Hz the range of sweep times is 1 us to 16000 s is selectable in steps of max 5 of the sweep time For numeric inputs rounding is made to the nearest possible sweep time For rollkey or UP DOWN key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green asterisk on the display If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur This happens because the available settling time for the resolution or video filters is too short In this case the FSP outputs UNCAL on the display and marks the indicated sweep time with a red asterisk IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIME AUTO OFF SWE TIME 10s The RES BW AUTO softkey couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span Changing the span causes automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth Automatic coupling of resolution bandwidth to span is always recommended when a favourable setting of the resolution bandwidth in relation to the selected span is desired for the measurement under request The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO submenu The RES BW AUTO softkey is only available in the frequency domain span gt 0 Hz The softkey is blanked in the time domain IEC IEEE bus command BAND AUTO ON The VIDEO BW AUTO softkey couples the video bandwidth to the resol
245. dditionally available Import library for RSIB DLL RSIB LIB D R_S Instr RSIB Import library for RSIB32 DLL RSIB32 LIB D R_S Instr RSIB The control is performed using the Visual C or Visual Basic programs WinWord Excel LabView LabWindows CVI or Agilent VEE Every application that can load a DLL is able to use the RSIB interface The programs use the IP address of the instrument or its host name to set up the connection Via VisualBasic ud RSDLLibfind 82 1 1 200 ibsta iberr ibcntl Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel LOCAL key or via the RSIB interface Via RSIB ud RSDLLibloc ud ibsta iberr ibcntl or RSDLLibon ud 0 ibsta iberr ibcntl 1093 4820 12 4 241 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP Unix Environment In order to access the measuring equipment the RSIB interface copy the 1ibrsib so X Yfiletoa directory for which the control application has read rights x y in the file name indicates the version number of the library for example 1 0 The librsib so x yY library is created as a shared library The applications using the library need consider its version They simply link the library with the 1rsib option The following instructions have to be observed so that linking can be successfully performed and the library can be found during program execution File link e Use the operating system command n to create a file with the link name 1ibrsib so and pointing to
246. deo filter that is narrower than the resolution bandwidth can be selected gt Press the CLEAR WRITE softkey in the trace menu gt Press the BW key gt Press the VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey and enter 10 kHz The RF signal can be more clearly distinguished from noise VIDEO BANDHIDTH RBW 3 MHz kHz 18 kHz F 2i 3 Ref 2 dBm Att 6 dB Fig 2 23 RF sinewave signal with low S N ratio if a smaller video bandwidth is selected 7 reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 the noise is reduced by 10 dB gt Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 300 kHz The displayed noise is reduced by approx 10 dB The signal therefore emerges from noise by about 10 dB Compared to the previous setting the video bandwidth has remained the same i e it has increased relative to the smaller resolution bandwidth The averaging effect is therefore reduced by the video bandwidth The trace will be noisier Fig 2 24 Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth 1093 4820 12 2 27 E 2 Noise Measurements FSP Noise Measurements Noise measurements play an important role in spectrum analysis Noise e g affects the sensitivity of radiocommunication systems and their components Noise power is specified either as the total power in the transmission channel or as the power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz The sources of noise are for example amplifier noise or noise generated by oscillators used for th
247. des demodulators for AM and FM signals when equipped with the AF demodulator option FSP B3 With these demodulators a displayed signal can be identified acoustically through the use of the internal loudspeaker or with headphones The frequency at which the demodulation is enabled is coupled to the markers The sweep stops at the frequency determined by the active marker for the selected time and the RF signal is demodulated During a measurement in the time domain span 0 Hz the demodulation is continuously on The threshold line MKR SEARCH LIMITS THRESHOLD performs a squelch function in the demodulator If the threshold is set the FSP LF demodulation is switched on only when the signal to be demodulated exceeds the set threshold Menu MKR FCTN MARKER The MARKER DEMOD softkey switches on the audio demodulator DEMOD and calls a submenu in which the demodulation mode and the MKR DEMOD duration of the demodulation can be selected OFF ow IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM ON FM MKR STOP TIME CONT DEMOD MKR DEMOD The MKH DEMOD ON OFF softkey switches the demodulation ON on off In the frequency range span 0 the frequency scan is stopped at the frequency of the active marker with demodulation switched on provided that the level is above the threshold line and the signal is demodulated during the given stop time In the time domain span 0 de
248. description of the operating concept The IEC IEEE bus commands if any are indicated for each softkey For a fast overview a list of softkeys with the associated IEC IEEE bus commands is given at the end of Chapter 6 An index at the end of the handbook serves as further help for the user 1093 4820 12 4 1 E 2 FSP Initial Configuration FSP FSP Initial Configuration PRESET Key PRESET Notes Using the PRESET key the FSP can be set to a predefined initial state The settings are selected in a way that the RF input is always protected against overload provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instrument The initial instrument state set by the PRESET key can be adapted to arbitrary applications using the STARTUP RECALL function With this function the STARTUP RECALL dataset is loaded upon pressing the PRESET key For further information refer to section Saving and Recalling Data Sets Pressing the PRESET key causes the FSP to enter its initial state according to the following table Table 4 1 Initial State of FSP Parameter Mode Center frequency Center frequency step size Span RF attenuation Reference level Level range Level unit Sweep time Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth FFT filters Span RBW RBW VBW Sweep Trigger Trace 1 Trace 2 3 Detector Trace math Frequency offset Reference level offset Reference level position Grid Cal correctio
249. driver After installation Service Pack 5 must be installed see section Installing Windows NT lt Back SET Software gt Click Next If one or more printers are already installed a prompt is displayed in this window to ask if the printer last installed as default printer should be selected for the Windows NT applications Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as default printer The default selection is 1093 4820 12 1 30 E 3 FSP Add Printer Wizard The network printer has been successfully installed lt Back i Cancel Connecting an Output Device gt Start the printer driver installation with Finish Note If a prompt for the printer driver path appears after pressing Finish the Service Pack must be re installed after this printer installation see Chapter 1 section Installing Windows NT Software Finally the instrument has to be configured for printout with this printer using the DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 softkeys in the hardcopy menu 1093 4820 12 1 31 E 3 Installing Windows NT Software FSP Installing Windows NT Software Authorized Windows NT Software for the Instrument The driver software and the system settings of Windows NT are adapted to the measurement functions of the instrument Correct operation of the instrument can therefore only be guaranteed if the software and hardware used is authorized or supplied by
250. dth is to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz Press the BW key Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 30 kHz gt Press the VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey and enter 1 kHz The two signals are clearly separated by a 3 dB level dip in the middle of the screen Note The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz to clearly display the level dip in the middle between the two signals At larger video bandwidths the video voltage which arises from envelope detection is not sufficiently suppressed Therefore additional voltages occur between the two signals and can be seen on the trace 1093 4820 12 2 14 E 2 FSP Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals Fig 2 9 Measurement of two RF sinewave signals with the same level using a resolution bandwidth which corresponds to the frequency difference of the signals Note The level dip is only exactly in the middle of the screen if the generator frequencies exactly correspond with the frequency display of FSP To ensure this the generators and the FSP must have their frequencies synchronized 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz gt Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 100 kHz The two generator signals can no longer be clearly distinguished RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 188 kHz 188 kHz UBU 1 kHz R dBm Att 3 SHUT 10 ms i Fig 2 10 Measurement on two RF sinewave signals with the same level using a resolution ban
251. dths 300 kHz the FSP uses 4pole single section filters They require a k factor of 2 5 to settle during the frequency sweep Digital filters with a Gaussian characteristic are used below a bandwidth of 300 kHz up to 100 kHz These filters settle at a k factor of 1 i e the sweep time is 2 5 times shorter than with conventional 4 or 5 pole single section filters FFT filters can be used for resolution bandwidths up to 30 kHz Like digital filters they have a shape factor of less than 5 up to 30 kHz For FFT filters however the sweep time is given by the following formula SWT k span RBW 2 i e if the resolution bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 3 the sweep time is increased by a factor of 3 only 1093 4820 12 2 13 E 2 Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals FSP Measurement Example Resolving two signals with a level of 30 dBm each and a frequency difference of 30 kHz Example Fig 2 8 Test setup for generating two signals Signal generator settings e g SMIQ Level Frequency 30 dBm Signal generator 1 100 00 MHz Signal generator 2 30 dBm 100 03 MHz FSP measurement sequence 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default settings Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 015 MHz and the frequency span to 300 kHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 015 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 300 kHz 3 the resolution bandwi
252. dths the video signal is averaged and the power readout will be too small Sweep time selection If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest sweep time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obtained if the setting is coupled This means that the time per measurement is minimal Extending the measurement time does not have any advantages as the number of samples for calculating the power is defined by the number of trace pixels in the channel When using the RMS detector the repeatability of the measurement results can be influenced by the selection of sweep times Repeatability is increased at longer sweep times Repeatability can be estimated from the following diagram max error dB 10000 100000 Number of samples Fig 2 28 Repeatability of channel power measurements as a function of the number of samples used for power calculation The curves in Fig 2 28 indicates the repeatability obtained with a probability of 95 and 99 depending on the number of samples used The repeatability with 600 samples is 0 5 dB This means that if the sample detector and a channel bandwidth over the whole diagram channel bandwidth span is used the measured value lies within 0 5 dB of the true value with a probability of 99 If the RMS detector is used the number of samples can be estimated as
253. dure the power supply will be switched to STANDBY mode The yellow LED must be illuminated Only when removing the FSP completely from the AC power source gt Set the power switch at the rear panel to position 0 1093 4820 12 1 17 E 3 Functional Test FSP Power Save Mode Display The FSP offers the possibility of switching on a power save mode for the screen display The screen is blanked out if no entry is made on the front panel key softkey or hotkey and rollkey during the selected response time In order to switch on the power save mode 1 Call the DISPLAY CONFIG DISPLAY submenu to configure the screen display gt Press DISP key gt Press CONFIG DISPLAY softkey 2 Activate the save mode gt Press DISPLAY PWR SAVE softkey The softkey is highlighted in colour thus indicating that the power save mode is on At the same time the data entry for the delay time is opened 3 Define the delay time gt Enter the required response time in minutes and confirm the entry using the ENTER key The screen will be blanked out after the selected time period has elapsed Hard disk A power save mode is preset for the built in hard disk which is automatically closed down 15 minutes after the last access Recalling the Most Recent Instrument Settings The FSP is equipped with a battery powered read write memory CMOS RAM where instrument settings are saved at power off After each power on the FSP is reloaded with the o
254. dwidth which is greater than their frequency difference The resolution bandwidth RBW can be reduced again by turning the spinwheel counterclockwise to obtain a higher frequency resolution 1093 4820 12 2 15 E 2 Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals FSP 5 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz gt Turn the spinwheel counterclockwise until a bandwidth of 1 kHz is displayed The two generator signals are displayed at high resolution The sweep time increases considerably 600 ms because it increases by 1 RBW The noise floor also goes down at small resolution bandwidths 10 dB per bandwidth factor of 10 RESOLUTION RBH 1 kHz kHz UBH 1 kHz 5 7 688 ms Ref 2 dBm Att 10 dB Fig 2 11 Measurement on two RF sinewave signals with the same level using a resolution bandwidth 1 kHz which is far below their frequency difference 6 Switch on the FFT bandwidths Setthe FILTER softkey to FFT IF filtering is now carried out with the FFT algorithm The sweep time is considerably reduced from 600 ms to 15 ms factor of 40 The update rate of the display is increased in almost the same proportion RBW 1 kHz SUT 18 T H H T RE P eo 2n a w e gt s 5 5 Fig 2 12 Measurement with FFT filters gives a considerably shorter sweep time and higher refresh rate 1093 4820 12 2 16 E 2 FSP Measuring the Spectr
255. e CLEAR WRITE the other traces 2 and 3 are switched off BLANK The CLEAR WRITE MAX HOLD MIN HOLD AVERAGE VIEW and BLANK softkeys are mutually exclusive selection keys The SELECT TRACE softkey activates the entry for the active trace 1 2 3 IEC IEEE bus command selected via numeric suffix of TRACe The CLEAR WRITE softkey activates the overwrite mode for the collected measured values ie the trace is overwritten by each sweep In the CLEAR WRITE display mode all the available detectors can be selected In the default mode the autopeak detector setting AUTO is selected Each time the CLEAR WRITE softkey is actuated FSP clears the selected trace memory and starts the measurement anew IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC MODE WRIT The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max peak detector FSP saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to MAX PEAK The maximum value of a signal can thus be determined over several sweeps This is especially useful with modulated or impulsive signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Pressing the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts the max hold mode IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC MODE MAXH 1093 4820 12 4 42 E 3 FSP Analyzer Traces The AVERAGE softkey activates the trace
256. e DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point complete line at the cursor position All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly IEC IEEE bus command The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete limit line may be shifted parallel in the horizontal direction The shift takes place according to the horizontal scale in frequency domain in Hz kHz MHz or GHz in the time domain in ns us ms or s In this manner a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally and stored SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey under a new name NAME softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT SHIF 50KHz The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete limit line may be shifted parallel in the vertical direction The shift takes place according to the vertical scale for logarithmic units relative in dB for linear units as a factor In this manner a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted vertically and stored SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey under a new name NAME softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT UPP SHIF 20dB CALC LIM3 CONT LOW SHIF 20dB The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line The name can be entered in an input window max 8 characters IEC IEEE bus command 4 127 E 3 Limit Lines FSP Display
257. e TG IN AM connector An input voltage of 1 V corresponds to 10096 amplitude modulation Switching on an external AM disables the following function active modulation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM STAT ON The EXT FM softkey activates the FM modulation of the tracking generator output signal The modulation frequency range is 1 kHz to 100 kHz the deviation can be set in 1 decade steps in the range of 100 Hz to 10 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V The phase deviation n should not exceed the value 100 Phase deviation n deviation modulation frequency The modulation signal is applied to the TG IN Q FM connector Switching on an external FM disables the following function active modulation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM STAT SOUR FM DEV 10MHz 4 200 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 The EXT Q softkey activates the external I Q modulation of the tracking generator The signals for modulation are applied to the two input connectors TG IN land TG IN Qat the rear panel of the unit The input voltage range is 1 V into 50 Q Switching on an external modulation disables the following functions active external AM active external FM Functional description of the quadrature modulator I channel I mod RF IN A N N OUT N 90 Q channel Q mod
258. e connecting the instrument to the network it is recommended to contact the network administrator in particular larger LAN installations are affected Faults in the connection may have a negative effect on the entire network The instrument is connected to a network hub of the desired LAN segment via a commercially available RJ45 cable not supplied with the instrument at the instrument rear panel Since RJ45 provides no bus but a star network topology no other precautions need to be taken for the connection The connection procedure does not produce any disturbances in the network traffic Disconnection from the network is easily possible provided that there is no more data traffic from and to the instrument Installing the Software The data transfer in the network takes place in data blocks called packets In addition to the useful data further information on the operation i e protocol data transmitter receiver type of data sequence is transferred in the packets For processing the protocol information suitable drivers must be installed For the network services file transfer directory services printing in the network a network operating system needs to be installed Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network Card Notes e The WINDOWS NT files required for the installation of network drivers protocols or services are included in the directory 386 e For the installation a PC keyboard with trackball
259. e connection to network printers On a server data are organized in directories as under DOS and mapped to the workstation as virtual drives A virtual drive behaves like an additional hard disk on the workstation and the data can be edited accordingly Network printers can also be addressed like normal printers There are two versions of the NOVELL network operating system bindary based NETWARE 3 and NDS based more recent versions of NETWARE With the older version NETWARE 3 each server manages its resources on its own and is independent A user must be managed on each server separately In the case of NDS based versions all resources in the network are managed together in the NDS NOVELL DIRECTORY SERVICE The user must log into the network only once and is given access to the resources according to his her access rights The individual resources and users are managed as objects in a hierarchical tree NDS TREE The position of the object in the tree is referred to as CONTEXT with NETWARE and must be known for access to the resources MICROSOFT Network In case of a MICROSOFT network data can be exchanged both between workstations peer to peer and between workstations and servers The latter can supply access to files and connection to the printers On a server data are organized in directories as under DOS and mapped to the workstation as virtual drives A virtual drive behaves like an additional hard disk on the workstation and the
260. e desired directory can be given a prefix to the data set name the directory is then automatically set for further SAVE and RECALL operations The simplest example for the input of a data set name is illustrated by the following key strokes SAVE l1 units key Note Ifthe current instrument configuration is to be stored under an existing name a selection list is available via the DATA SET LIST softkey The storage is performed as follows Press a units key after selecting a data set in table DATA SET LIST The name and the selection of the data subsets for the currently selected data set will be placed in the SAVE DATA SET table Press the SAVE softkey The entry field EDIT NAME with the name of the selected data set is opened Press aunits key The current instrument configuration is saved as a data set under this name Recalling a Data Set The data set can be loaded in two ways 1 Direct entry of the data name gt Select data subsets which should be loaded configurations measurement and calibration data with softkey ITEMS TO SAVE RCL in sub menu ITEMS TO SAVE RCL gt Enter the name of the data set to be saved softkey RECALL and recall the data set by pressing the ENTER key Data set names may contain both letters and numbers in the simplest case only numbers If required the desired directory can be prefixed to the data set name the directory is then automatically set for further SAVE and REC
261. e frequency conversion of useful signals in receivers or transmitters The noise at the output of an amplifier is determined by its noise figure and gain The noise of an oscillator is determined by phase noise near the oscillator frequency and by thermal noise of the active elements far from the oscillator frequency Phase noise can mask weak signals near the oscillator frequency and make them impossible to detect Measuring noise power density To measure noise power referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz at a certain frequency the FSP has an easy to use marker function This marker function calculates the noise power density from the measured marker level Measurement example Measuring the intrinsic noise power density of the FSP at 1 GHz and calculating the FSP s noise figure 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 7 MHz 3 Switch on marker and set the marker frequency to 1 GHz gt Press the MKH key and enter 1 GHz 4 Switch on the noise marker function gt Press the NOISE MARKER softkey The FSP displays the noise power at 1 GHz in dBm 1Hz Since noise is random a sufficiently long measurement time has to be selected to obtain stable measurement results This can be achieved by averaging the trace or by select
262. e is switched on softkey with red background and the data input function is activated The position of the display line can be selected by means of the rollkey the step keys or a numerical entry in the appropriate field The data input function is disabled if another function is activated The line however remains switched on softkey with green background 2nd press The line is switched off softkey with gray background Initial situation The line is on softkey with green background ist press The data input function is activated softkey with red background The position of the display line can be selected by means of the rollkey the step keys or a numerical entry in the appropriate field The data input function is disabled if another function is activated The line however remains switched on softkey with green background 2nd press The line is switched off softkey with gray background 1093 4820 12 4 128 E 3 FSP Limit Lines LINES menu DISPLAY LINE 1 DISPLAY LINE 2 FREQUENCY LINE E Frequency Domain Span gt 0 Hz FREQUENCY INE 1 Time Domain Span 0 Hz The DISPLAY LINE 1 2 softkeys enable or disable the level lines and allow the user to enter the position of the lines The level lines mark the selected level in the measurement window IEC IEEE bus command C
263. e maximum value can be reset by switching the MAX HOLD ON OFF softkey off and on again IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PHOL ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE PHOL RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS PHOL RES M S CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN PHOL RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV PHOL RES The AVERAGE ON OFF softkey switches averaging over successive sweep measurements on and off The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE ON OFF softkey off and on again IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM AVER ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE AVER RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS AVER RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN AVER RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV AVER RES 4 86 E 3 FSP SINGLE SWEEP mode CONTINUOUS SWEEP mode Analyzer MEAS The NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps for maximum or average value calculation The FSP performs sweeps until the selected number of sweeps is reached and stops then Averaging is carried out until the selected number of sweeps is reached After that averaging is performed in continuous mode and is then continued as running averaging Calculation of the maximum peak MAX HOLD is performed continuously irrespective of the selected number of sweeps The valid range values is 0 to 32767 Depending on the specified number of sweeps averaging is carried out according to the fo
264. e power measurement at 500 us The GSM specifications require the power to be measured between 50 and 90 of the TDMA burst The time limits set above approximately correspond to the required time domain 1093 4820 12 4 87 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Channel and Adjacent Channel Power Measurements For all channel and adjacent channel power measurements a specified channel configuration is assumed which is for instance based on a specific radiocommunication system This configuration is defined by the nominal channel frequency center frequency of the FSP channel bandwidth adjacent channel bandwidth and adjacent channel spacing The FSP is able to simultaneously measure the power in up to three adjacent channels 7 channels transmission channel 3 lower and 3 upper adjacent channels It offers two methods for channel and adjacent channel power measurement e The integrated bandwidth method IBW method i e the integration of trace pixels within the bandwidth of the channel to be measured to the total power of the channel e The measurement in time domain Fast ACP by means of steep resolution filters simulating the channel The two measurements yield the same results The measurement in time domain can be performed much faster since the complete signal is measured within a channel at the same time With the IBW method the channel is divided into subspectra This is done by means of a bandwidth which is small compared to the ch
265. e reference point within the grid using the REF VALUE POSITION softkey Thus the trace can be shifted from the top grid margin to the middle of the grid RBH 3 MHz TG 20 dBm UBM 18 MHz Att dB 1s Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN _HETUORK SCREEN B Fig 4 29 Normalized display In the SPLIT SCREEN setting the normalization is switched on in the current window Different normalizations can be active in the two windows Normalization is aborted when the NETWORK mode is quit IEC IEEE bus command CORR ON 1093 4820 12 4 207 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control 1093 4820 12 o The REF VALUE POSITION softkey reference position marks a reference position in the active window on which the normalization difference formation with a reference curve is performed When pressed for the first time the softkey switches on the reference line and activates the input of its position The line can be shifted within the grid limits The reference line is switched off by pressing the softkey again The function of the reference line is explained in the section Functioning of Calibration REF POSITION RBH 3 MHz 58 x UBI 10 MHz CAL Ref 8 dBm att 30 dB SUT 1s TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 2 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN EHETHORKS SCREEH B Fig 4 30 Normalized measurement shifted with REF VALUE POSITION 50 IEC bus com
266. e screen or enter 50 us The FSP displays the rising edge of the GSM burst see Fig 2 50 1093 4820 12 2 63 E 2 Time Domain Measurements FSP RBW 3 MHz UBM 18 MHz 188 15 Center 188 MHz _srecrun Fig 2 50 Rising edge of GSM burst at high time resolution 4 Shift the falling edge of burst to the middle of the screen using the trigger offset Set the POLARITY softkey to NEG The FSP displays the falling edge of the GSM burst see Fig 2 51 TRIGGER OFFSET 3 MHz 50 NT MEUM EE le dem Att 40 0 100 us 9 Center 100 MHz _Srecreun Fig 2 51 Falling edge of GSM burst at high time resolution 1093 4820 12 2 64 E 2 FSP Time Domain Measurements Measuring the S N Ratio of Burst Signals For TDMA transmission methods the S N ratio or the switch off range can be measured by comparing the powers during the switch on and switch off phase of the transmission burst The FSP therefore has a function to perform absolute and relative power measurements in the time domain The measurement is carried out as follows using a GSM burst as an example Measurement Example S N ratio of a GSM signal Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one time slot is switched on Measurement using the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its d
267. e start of the sweep Triggering is delayed by the entered time with respect to the trigger signal time entered gt 0 or is started earlier time entered lt 0 The time may be entered in multiples of 125 ns in the range 100 s to 100 s default 0 s Note A negative offset pretrigger can be set in the time domain only SPAN 0 Hz provided GATED TRIGGER is not active in that domain The maximum allowed range and the maximum resolution of the pretrigger is limited by the set sweep time max range 499 500 x sweep time max resolution sweep time 500 Pretriggering is not possible when the rms or the average detector is activated As a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate when selecting EXTERN and IF POWER changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay TRIGGER OFFSET as well IEC IEEE bus command TRIG HOLD 10US The POLARITY POS NEG softkey selects the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The selected setting is highlighted The selection is valid for all trigger modes with the exception of FREE RUN in the gate mode it also applies to the gate polarity The default setting is POLARITY POS IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SLOP POS 4 32 E 3 FSP Analyzer Triggering the Sweep By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed wi
268. e the dwell time on a pixel is only sufficient to obtain an instantaneous value 1093 4820 12 2 24 E 2 FSP Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise Autopeak detector The Autopeak detector displays the maximum and minimum peak value at the same time Both values are measured and their levels are displayed on the screen joint by a vertical line Sample detector The sample detector samples the logarithm of the IF envelope for each pixel of the trace only once and displays the resulting value If the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer is considerably higher than the resolution bandwidth span RBW gt 500 there is no guarantee that useful signals will be detected They are lost due to undersampling This does not happen with noise because in this case it is not the instantaneous amplitude that is relevant but only the probability distribution RMS detector For each pixel of the trace the RMS detector outputs the RMS value of the IF envelope for the frequency range assigned to each test point It therefore measures noise power The display for small signals is however the sum of signal power and noise power For short sweep times i e if only one uncorrelated sample value contributes to the RMS value measurement the RMS detector is equivalent to the sample detector If the sweep time is longer more and more uncorrelated RMS values contribute to the RMS value measurement The trace is therefore smoothed The level of sinewave signals i
269. e the function of an ENTEH key The same applies for an alphanumeric entry Open and close the selection windows of tables BACK key Deletes the character left to the cursor with numeric entry Allows for toggling between the current and the previous values subsequent or prior to entry UNDO function ESC CANCEL key Aborts the entry before it has been terminated The previous value is restored Closes the entry field after termination of input Closes system messages e ENTER key Terminates the input of dimensionless quantities The new value is set Note The ENTER keys assumes the function of the Hz key for frequency input and the function of the us kHz key for time input 1093 4820 12 3 11 E 2 Setting Parameters FSP Roll key and Cursor Keys The roll key and the cursor keys are arranged besides the numeric keypad The roll key has various functions e With numeric entry the instrument parameter is incremented turning clockwise or decremented turning counterclockwise at a defined step size e In tables the roll key can be used to shift the cursor horizontally or vertically when no entry window is open The direction horizontal vertical is switched over using the cursor keys e The roll key is used with the help line editor to select the individual letters t can be used to shift markers display lines limit lines etc Pressing t
270. e trace at the upper diagram border Overrange Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the tracking generator SOURCE POWER NETWORK menu e Increasing the reference level REF LEVEL AMPT menu 1093 4820 12 4 197 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP Frequency Converting Measurements For frequency converting measurements eg on converter units the tracking generator is able to set a constant frequency offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the receive frequency of the FSP Up to an output frequency of 150 MHz the measurement can be carried out in both inverted and normal positions SPECTRUM ANALYZER 9kHz 3GHz FSP 1093 4495 03 Fig 4 23 Test setup for frequency converting measurements NETWORK menu The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of the frequency offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the input frequency of the FSP Possible offsets are in a range of 150 MHz in 0 1 Hz steps The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are marked with the enhancement label FRQ If a positive frequency offset is entered the tracking generator generates an output signal above the receive frequency of the FSP In case of a negative frequency offset it generates a signal below the receive frequency of the FSP The output frequency of the tracking generator is calc
271. e tracking generator option FSP B9 is used as signal source for the DUT filtering with the FFT algorithm is not useful The selection FFT is thus not available if the tracking generator is switched on Additionally a number of especially steep edged channel filters are available for power measurement since firmware version 1 10 A distinction is made between the following filter types CHANNEL RRC general steep edged channel filters filters with root raised cosine characteristic RRC Root Raised Cosine When selecting these filter types the automatic coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span is not available The filters are selected via the RES BW softkey A list of all available channel filters with their associated applications can be found at the end of this chapter IEC IEEE bus command BAND TYPE NORM 4 25 E 3 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time FSP List of available channel filters The channel filters included in the following table are can be activated via the FILTER TYPE softkey and are then available as resolution filters softkey RES available for firmware version 1 10 or higher They BW Note For filters of type RRC Root Raised Cosine the filter bandwidth indicated describes the sampling rate of the filter For all other filters CFILter the filter bandwidth is the dB bandwidth Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application Hz CFILter Hz CFILter Hz CFILter Hz CFILter
272. e with harmonics measurements or measurements on frequency converting DUTs since the input signal and the output signal lie in different frequency ranges However specific settings of the two windows reference level center frequency can be coupled if required so that with CENTER B MARKER A for example the shift of the marker in diagram A causes the frequency range zoomed in some cases to be shifted along diagram B New setttings are performed in the diagram selected via hotkey SCREEN A or SCREEN B If only one window is displayed it is the diagram in which the measurements are performed the diagram not displayed is not active for measurements RBH 1 MHz Marker 1 T4 UBH 10 MHz 13 04 dBm FULL Ref 10 dBm Att 20 dB 1 ms 287 000000 ps 1 CLRHR 100 RBH 38 kHz 100 kHz 1 AP CLRHR Center 935 2 MHz 368 kHz Span 3 6 MHz COHFIG screen B DISPLAY Fig 4 15 Typical split screen display settings are uncoupled 1093 4820 12 4 131 E 3 Display FSP The DISP key opens the menu for configuring the screen display and selecting the active diagram in SPLIT SCREEN mode 1093 4820 12 SCREEN SELECT TITLE OBJECT oe BRIGHTNESS SCREEN ON LOGO num OFF REF LEVEL COUPLED AAO TATION SATURATION OFF
273. early seen 5 Measuring intermodulation by means of the 3 order intercept measurement function gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the TOI softkey The FSP activates four markers for measuring the intermodulation distance Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation products The 3 order intercept is calculated from the level difference between the useful signals and the intermodulation products It is then displayed on the screen 1093 4820 12 2 19 E 2 Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals FSP HARKER 2 RBU 18 kHz 1 8001 GHz kHz 10 dBm Att dB SM 05 Ref 18 dBm Fig 2 15 Result of intrinsic intermodulation measurement on the FSP The 3 order intercept TOI is displayed at the top right corner of the grid The level of a spectrum analyzer s intrinsic intermodulation products depends the level of the useful signals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB 6 Increasing RF attenuation to 10 dB to reduce intermodulation products gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 10 dB The FSP s intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor RF 18 kHz
274. easures the frequency of the RF signal at the intermediate frequency Using the measured IF FSP calculates the frequency of the RF input signal by applying the known frequency conversion factors The frequency measurement error depends only upon the accuracy of the frequency standard used external or internal reference Although FSP always operates synchronously irrespective of the set span the frequency counter delivers a more exact result than a measurement performed with a marker This is due to the following e The marker measures only the position of the pixel on the trace and infers the frequency of the sig nal from this value The trace however contains only a limited number of pixels Depending upon the selected span each pixel may contain many measurement values which therefore limits the frequency resolution e resolution with which the frequency can be measured is proportional to the measurement time For this reason the bandwidth is normally made as wide as possible and the sweep time as short as possible This results in a loss of frequency resolution For the measurement with the frequency counter the sweep is stopped at the reference marker the frequency is counted with the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to continue 1093 4820 12 4 59 E 3 MKR Analyzer MARKER NEXT menu FSP The SIGNAL COUNT softkey switches the frequency counter on off The frequency is counted at the position of the r
275. ection in the help line editor Entry of text Select parameter The data entry is active automatically upon calling the data entry window The cursor is positioned on the left in the editing line gt Position the cursor in the help line editor using the cursor key gt The cursor marks the first letter of the editor gt Locate the cursor on the character which is to be entered into the editing line using the cursor keys or the roll key gt Press the ENTER key or the roll key The character is entered in the editing line Correcting the entry gt Locate the cursor in the editing line using the cursor key Position the cursor after the character which is to be deleted using the cursor keys 2 Press the BACK key The entry left to the cursor is deleted Terminaingihe nny gt Locate the cursor in the editing line using the cursor key gt Press any unit key or the roll key The data entry window is closed the new entry is accepted by the instrument Aborting the ent gt Press the CLR key The data entry window is closed the previous entry is retained 1093 4820 12 3 20 E 2 FSP Setting Parameters Selection and Setting of Parameters via Tables The FSP uses numerous tables for display and configuration of instrument parameters The tables differ considerably in the number of lines columns and inscriptions The basic steps of operation for the selection and setting of
276. ed The green LED ON is illuminated The instrument is ready for operation All modules within the instrument are supplied with power Caution STANDBY ON STANDBY switch is not pressed The yellow LED STANDBY is illuminated Only the power supply is supplied with power and the quartz oven is maintained at normal operating temperature In standby mode the AC power voltage is present within the instrument Switching On the Instrument gt In order to switch on the FSP set the power switch on the rear panel to position I Set the FSP to operating mode by pressing the ON STANDBY key on the front panel The green LED must be illuminated Startup Menu and Booting After switching on the instrument a message indicating the installed BIOS version e g Analyzer BIOS Rev 1 2 appears on the screen for a few seconds Subsequently Windows NT is booted first and after that the instrument firmware will boot As soon as the boot process is finished the instrument will start measuring The settings used will be the one that was active when the instrument was previously switched off provided no other device configuration than FACTORY had been selected with STARTUP RECALL in the FILE menu Switching Off the FSP gt Switch the ON STANDBY key on the front panel to standby mode by pressing it once The FSP will write the current instrument settings to disk before performing a Windows NT shutdown At the end of the shutdown proce
277. ed automatically c Opening a selection table entry may have various states e g colors from a table color pallet fixed filter bandwidths etc a table indicating all possible states is displayed with selection The current state is and marked by a checkmark and by the cursor gt Set the cursor to the desired setting gt Press one of the unit keys The setting is switched on and marked V The selection table closes and the value is transferred to the original table The cursor is positioned automatically on the next table element Abortion of entry Press the ESC key The current entry selection is aborted and the original setting is restored Scrolling Some tables contain more entries than can be displayed on one screen page In this case a scrollbar is displayed at the right margin of the table whose slider shows the current position in the text Actuate the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkeys The table is paged forward or back by one page gt Press cursor key or The table is scrolled up or down by one line 1093 4820 12 3 23 E 2 Menu Overview FSP Menu Overview The following section gives a graphical overview of the FSP menus Side menus are marked by an arrow directed to the left right submenus by an arrow showing upwards The menus appear in the order corresponding to the arrangement of keys on the front panel The available hotkeys and the LOCAL menu appearing during the remote control o
278. ed by ADJUST SETTINGS 4 105 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Measurement of Signal Amplitude Statistics Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel but are different in their amplitude distribution In order to transmit the modulated signal without distortion all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly e g from the output power amplifier Most critical are the peak amplitude values of course Degradation in transmit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of the peak values as well as on their probability The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function Amplitude Probability Distribution During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range The number of amplitude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured amplitudes within the specific amplitude range video _ gt apc address EM voltage write E logic CPU display clock Fig 4 8 Simplified block diagram for APD measurement e RBH 3 kHz Marker 1 T1 9 018175410 Ref 20 dBm Att 20 dB SUT 680 ms 33 00 dBm Center 802 MHz 5 dB Amplitude Probability Distribution Samples 1 1 Power 37 29 dBm Peak Poner 27 53 dBm Crest Factor 9 75
279. ed by using CP ACP STANDARD PRESET FREQ CENTER 800 MHz AMPT 0 dBm MEAS CHAN PWR CONFIG NO OF ADJ CHAN 2 ENTER CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 1 23 MHz ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH 30 kHz ADJ CHAN SPACING 885 kHz 1 98 2 PREV ADJUST SETTINGS ADJUST REF LVL 1093 4820 12 Set the FSP to the default setting Set the center frequency to 800 MHz Set the reference level to 0 dBm Call the menu for the measurement functions Select the channel and adjacent channel power measurement function The measurement is carried out with the default settings or a previously defined setting The submenu for setting the desired new configuration is opened Call the submenu for defining the channel configuration Select two adjacent channels for the measurement i e the adjacent channel and the alternate channel are measured Set the channel bandwidth to 1 23 MHz according to IS95 Open the list for setting the bandwidth of the adjacent channels ACP CHANNEL BW Upon entry of 30 kHz for the adjacent channel the alternate channels are also set to 30 kHz Open the list for entering the adjacent channel spacings ACP CHANNEL SPACING Upon entry of 885 kHz for the adjacent channel the channels ALT1 and ALT2 are set to 1770 kHz and 2655 kHz Upon entry of 1 98 MHz for the alternate channel 1 the alternate channel 2 is set to 2 97 MHz Go to the main menu for chann
280. ed on the screen The marker is always on Trace 1 on switching on MKR gt TRACE lt ENTER gt marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains at the previous frequency or time MKR gt TRACE 3 lt ENTER gt The marker jumps to Trace 3 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK TRAC 2 4 73 E 3 MKR gt Analyzer FSP Change of Settings via Markers MKR Key The MKR menu offers functions through which instrument parameters can be changed with the aid of the currently active marker The functions can be used on markers and delta markers On opening the menu the entry for the last active marker is activated if no marker was enabled MARKER 1 is activated and a peak search is performed MKR menu SELECT MER MARKER STEPSIZE PEAK IN ABSOLUTE LEFT 4 _ oa i NEXT MIN Ed SEARCH NEXT LEF RIGHT REF LEVEL NEXT MODE T MKR LVL 21 LIMI SEARCH THRESHOLD NEXT PEAK NEXT MODE 2 SEARCH LIMITS 8 PEAK EXCURSION gt SEARCH LI OFF The SELECT MARKER softkey acti
281. ed range of values for the start frequency is 0 Hz lt fstart Sfmax minspan fstart start frequency minspan smallest selectable span 10 Hz f max frequency max IEC IEEE bus command FREQ STAR 20MHz The STOP softkey activates the window for entering the The allowed range of values for the stop frequency is minspan Sfstop lt fmax fstop stop frequency minspan smallest selectable span 10 Hz fmax max frequency IEC IEEE bus command FREQ STOP 2000MHz The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the window for entering an arithmetical frequency offset which is added to the frequency axis labelling The allowed range of values for the offset is 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz IEC IEEE bus command FREQ OFFS 10 MHz 4 9 E 1 Frequency and Span Analyzer FSP 1093 4820 12 The SIGNAL TRACK softkey switches on the tracking of a signal near the center frequency The signal is tracked as long it is in the search bandwidth around the center frequency defined with TRACK BW and above the level threshold defined with TRACK THRESHOLD For that purpose the maximum signal is searched PEAK SEARCH on the screen and the center frequency set to this signal MARKER gt CENTER after each frequency sweep within the search bandwidth If the signal falls below the level threshold or jumps out of the search bandwidth around the center frequency the center frequency is not varied until a signal is in the search
282. ee a Yee deas 4 232 MICROSOFT tr co eR eene eo ine E en e beds 4 232 Defining eet A 4 233 Login in the 4 234 Disabling the Autologin Mechanism 4 234 Reenabling the Autologin 4 4 234 Using Network 4 235 Printing on a Network 4 237 Remote Data Transfer with TCP IP Services 4 239 File Transfer viaiF aie trien tite e o Eee 4 239 RSIB Interface irrito tetur nep ce coe ex desi erae Hanan es ie ce So EE peu 4 241 Remote Control via RSIB 4 241 Windows 4 4 222 1 11 4141 1 440 4 241 Unix Environment eese eedem te tpe Eve neveu ve np re Ege uie ca Ee nace Equo 4 242 RSIB Interface 4 243 Overview of Interface 4 243 Variables ibsta rv rte e c eee a n a nee ess 4 244 Description of Interface
283. efault state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 MHz the span to 0 Hz and the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or gt press the ZEROSPAN softkey gt Press the BWkey and enter 7 MHz 3 Set the reference level of the FSP to 0 dBm signal generator level and the RF attenuation to 10 dB for maximum sensitivity gt Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm gt Press the RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 10 dB 4 Set the sweep time to 2 ms gt Press the SWEEP key and enter 2 ms The FSP displays the GSM burst running across the display 1093 4820 12 2 65 E 2 Time Domain Measurements FSP 5 Trigger on the rising edge of the burst using the video trigger and shift beginning of burst to the middle of the screen gt Press the TRIG key gt Press the VIDEO softkey and enter 70 The FSP displays a stable image with the GSM burst at the start of the trace gt Press the TRIGGER OFFSET softkey and enter 1 ms The FSP displays the GSM burst in the right half of the graph 6 Configure the power measurement in the time domain gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the TIME DOM POWER 5 softkey gt Set the LIMITS softkey to ON gt Press the START LIMIT softkey gt Place the vertical line on the start of the burst using the spinwheel gt Press the STOP LIMIT softkey gt Place the second vertical line on the end of the burst using the spinwheel
284. eference marker VARKER 1 The sweep stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter has delivered a result The time required for a frequency measurement depends on the selected frequency resolution The resolution is set in the side menu If no marker is enabled when the SIGNAL COUNT softkey is pressed MARKER 1 is switched on and set at the largest signal In addition the SIGNAL COUNT function is displayed in the marker info field on the screen with Tx CNT Switching the SIGNAL COUNT function off is accomplished by pressing the softkey again IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 COUN ON CALC MARK COUN FREQ The resolution of the frequency counter is set in the NEXT menu of the MARKER menu FSP offers counter resolutions between 0 1 Hz and 10 kHz MARKER CNT RESOL 10 kHz CNT RESOL 100 Hz CNT RESOL 0 Hz CNT RESOL 1 Hz CNT RESOL 0 1 Hz 1093 4820 12 The CNT RESOL softkeys select the counter resolution They are selection switches i e only one of the can be active at any one time The marker stop time ie the frequency measurement time depends on the selected resolution IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 COUN RES value Measurement example The frequency of a CW signal is to be determined by means of the frequency counter with a resolution of 10 Hz PRESET FSP is set to the default setting MARKER MARKER 1 is switched on and set
285. el connector REF OUT e g to synchronize other instruments to the reference of the FSP In the setting REFERENCE EXT the connector REF IN is used as input connector for an external frequency standard In this case all internal oscillators of the FSP are synchronized to the external reference frequency also 10 MHz SETUP menu REFERENCE The REFERENCE INT EXT softkey switches between the internal and EXT external reference Note If the reference signal is missing when switching to external reference the message EXHEF appears after a while to indicate that there is no synchronization On switching to internal reference please ensure that the external reference signal is de activated to avoid interactions with the internal reference signal IEC IEEE bus command ROSC SOUR INT External Noise Source SETUP menu NOISE SRC The NOISE SRC ON OFF softkey switches on or off the supply voltage for an OFF external noise source which is connected to the NOISE SOURCE connector on the rear panel of the instrument IEC IEEE bus command DIAG SERV NSO ON 1093 4820 12 4 138 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup RF Preamplifier To improve the noise figure a low noise preamplifier with variable gain at the RF input can be switched into the signal path SETUP menu The PREAMP softkey switches the preamplifier on and activates the entry of the preamplifier gain The preamplifier is switched off by pressing the softkey again The only p
286. el is set to 0 dBm MARKER 1 is switched on and positioned at the maximum of the displayed trace The phase noise measurement is switched on The delta marker is positioned on the main marker and the measured phase noise value is displayed in the marker info field The sample detector is used and the video bandwidth is set to 3 x RBW When the phase noise measurement function is enabled the entry of the delta marker frequency is activated It can be entered directly Measurement of the Filter or Signal Bandwidth Menu MKR FCTN 1093 4820 12 The N dB DOWN softkey activates the temporary markers T1 and T2 which are n dB below the active reference marker Marker T1 is placed to the left and marker T2 at the right of the reference marker The value n can be input in a window The default setting is 3 dB The frequency spacing of the two temporary markers is indicated in the marker info field If for example it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value because of the noise display dashes are indicated instead of a measured value IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD STAT ON CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD 3dB CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD RES CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD FREQ 4 69 E 3 MKR FCTN Analyzer FSP Measurement of a Peak List Menu MKR FCTN The PEAK LIST softkey allows the peak values of the trace to be p NEW determi
287. el power measurement Automatically set the optimum span 5 MHz resolution bandwidth RBW 30 kHz video bandwidth VBW 300 kHz and detector RMS for the measurement The absolute channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and alternate channels are displayed on the screen Set the reference level equal to the channel power measured 4 101 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP 3 Measurement of signal noise power density C No of an 1595 CDMA signal frequency 800 MHz level 0 dBm PRESET FREQ CENTER 800 MHz AMPT 0 dBm MEAS CHAN PWR CP ACP CONFIG NO OF ADJ CHAN ENTER CHANNEL BANDWIDTH 1 23 MHz PREV ADJUST SETTINGS ADJUST REF LVL SET CP REFERENCE CP ACP ABS CHAN PWR FREQ CENTER 805 MHz 1093 4820 12 Set the FSP to the default setting Set the center frequency to 800 MHz Set the reference level to 0 dBm Call the menu for the measurement functions Select the channel and adjacent channel power measurement The measurement is performed with the default setting or a previously defined setting The submenu for setting the desired new configuration is opened Call the submenu for defining the channel configuration Do not select an adjacent channel for the measurement i e the measurement is carried out in one channel only Set the channel bandwidth to 1 23 MHz in line with IS95 Go to the main menu for channel
288. ency and also sets step size adaptation to MANUAL CF STEPSIZE remains at this value until the center frequency entry mode in the STEP menu is switched from MANUAL to AUTO again The gt STEPSIZE function is above all useful in the measurement of harmonics with large dynamic range narrow bandwidth and narrow span The softkey is not available in the time domain span 0 Hz IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC CST Example The harmonics levels of a CW carrier are to be measured at 100 MHz PRESET FSP is set to the default setting CENTER 100 MHz FSP sets the center frequency to 100 MHz The span is set to 200 MHz SPAN 1 MHz The span is set to 100 MHz MKR gt MARKER 1 is switched on and set to the maximum value of the signal NEXT FSP switches to the submenu MKR gt CF STEPSIZE The step size of the center frequency setting equals the marker frequency 100 MHz CENTER The center frequency entry mode is activated Right key The center frequency is set to 200 MHz The first harmonic of the test signal is displayed MKR gt PEAK The marker is set to the harmonic and the level of the latter is output in the marker info field 4 80 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR gt The MIN softkey sets the active marker to the minimum value on the corre sponding trace IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK MIN CALC DELT MIN The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher min
289. enerator switched on the FFT filters FILTER TYPE FFT in the menu BW are not available If there is an error on the IECBUS during programming of the external generator the generator is automatically switched off and the following error message output SYSTEM MESSAGE IEC2 handshake error IEC bus command SOUR EXT ON The SELECT GENERATOR softkey opens a table for selection of the generator and definition of IECBUS address and control interface The table permits configuration of two generators so that switching between two different configurations is easily possible SELECT GENERATOR SRC TYPE IFC GPIB ADDR MODE F MIN F MAX P MIN P MAX 1 TIL 28 REMOTE 2 3GHz 144dBm 169 2 SHIQU3 GPIB 28 LOCAL 3 kHz 3 3GHz 140dBm 13dBm 1093 4820 12 4 214 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration The individual fields contain the following settings SRC Index of generator selected TYPE The field opens the list with the available generators After completion of the selection the remaining fields of the table are filled with the generator characteristics A list of generator types supported by the FSP is to be found at the end of section Softkey SELECT GENERATOR IFC This field selects the interface type of external generator 1or 2 The following types are available GPIB IECBUS suitable for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwarz instruments or TTL 1
290. entered The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels 0 Only the channel power is measured 1 The channel power and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adjacent channel alternate channel 2 are measured IEC IEEE bus command POW ACH ACP 1 4 95 E 3 MEAS Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey activates the entry of the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel The useful channel bandwidth is generally defined by the transmission method It is automatically adjusted correctly on measurements according to a given standard see CP ACP STANDARD softkey When measuring according to the IBW method FAST ACP OFF the channel bandwidth is displayed by two vertical lines to the left and right of the screen center It can thus be visually checked whether the whole power of the signal to be measured is within the selected channel bandwidth With the time domain method FAST ACP ON the measurement is performed in zero span The channel limits are not marked in this case The FSP offers all available channel
291. ents univeral 8 5 white space 5 14 Common commands 26 4 CONDition register 5 19 Configuration 4 137 4 163 Continue single sweep 4 29 Continuous 2 4 28 Control output 4 189 Conirol characlers ete Ree des 8 9 Copy file limit line 4 tace Ar 4 48 Correction 2000 000 4 55 Correction of entry esee 3 17 Correction values normalization e cR a 4 187 4 203 Counter resolution eeeessesssee eene 4 60 Coupling bandwidths 4 18 default settings sss 4 22 4 24 frequency of diagrams 4 133 reference level of diagramms 4 133 resolution bandWwiath sss 4 21 SWCD LING rh seen Pe rn dee 4 22 video bandwidth 1 scccccccessssccccsesssseceeessstsnsceeeeees 4 21 CP Cumulative distribution function D Ip c 4 134 input 4 150 tei ene emen 5 16 Decimal point t p ees 3 11 Default COUpling ralios uu 4 22 1093 4820 12 FSP display settings ae eil 4 134 scalings of x and y axis 4 110 Delay gate 4 36 Delete M M 4 171 limit line 4 122
292. eorr eases 4 180 split screen 3 8 4 133 SUDGIVISIONT EE AOT TANTA 3 2 Screens COONS x i oet 4 180 Search bandwidth ia a 4 9 direction sess esa Sans ieee ites 4 81 Jer a 4 65 4 75 peak excursion PEAK EXCURSION e SOMOS ias cea b eee ke Sensitivity APD measurement esses 4 110 CCDF 4 110 5 ee rens configuration Serial number lt nice iere rr eps Service functions ih etienne A Service request 5 21 5 31 Service request enable register SRE 5 21 Setting Up the Instrument 1 14 Settings indication sss 3 5 Sel p s dome 4 137 general ee 4 146 SGL enhancement 3 6 Sigh Keys uiii ere icio e A ose e aes 3 11 Signal amplitude statistics 4 106 SIghal COUlL ics ses Sen hae Ue ES 4 60 Signal tracking 4 9 search 4 9 Signal noise ratio 6 212 Single sweep esses nennt 4 28 1093 4820 12 FSP Softkey POWER 4 103 6 238
293. equently There is no data reduction ie no summing up of measured values of neighbouring frequencies or time samples If during a frequency sweep more measured values are obtained than can be displayed measured values will be lost This means that discrete signals might be lost The sample detector therefore can only be recommended for a span to resolution bandwidth ratio of up to approx 250 in order to ensure that no signal will be suppressed example span 1 MHz gt min bandwidth 5 kHz 1093 4820 12 4 49 E 3 Traces Analyzer RMS detector Average detector Quasipeak detector FSP The RMS detector forms the rms value of the measured values within a pixel To this effect FSP uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are squared summed and the sum is divided by the number of samples root mean square For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the square sum For linear display the root mean square value is displayed Each pixel thus corresponds to the power of the measured values summed up in the pixel The rms detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correction factors as needed for other detectors for measuring the power of the different signal classes are not required The average detector forms the average value of the measured values within a pixel To this effect FSP
294. eration with external reference The RF preamplification is switched on option FSP B25 The data entry window is superimposed in the left upper corner of the diagram area if required It covers the display of the title and the time The field is used to enter numeric or alphanumeric device parameters The tables are superimposed in the diagram area if required Sie dienen der Anzeige und Konfiguration von Gerateparametern 3 6 E 2 FSP Message windows Message field System messages Traces 1103 Limit lines The Screen Message fields provide notes on measurements e g results of the limit check PASS FAIL These notes are no error messages which are indicated as system messages They can be masked out by pressing the ESC key System messages indicate warnings and error messages Message without action field These system messages contain only arbitrary information They hint at events which are of interest for the user but do not affect the measurement or functioning of the instrument They are deleted either automatically after a predefined time has passed 3 seconds or upon any keystroke or mouse click Message with action field These system messages require a decision to be taken by the user They are not deleted until any action has been selected Deletion of the message initiates the action selected and appropriate measures to be taken The action field consists of one OK two OK CANCEL or three
295. erface as standard which allows the instrument to be controlled by means of Visual C and Visual Basic programs but also by means of the Windows applications WinWord and Excel as well as National Instruments LabView LabWindows CVI and Agilent VEE The control applications run on an external computer in the network A Unix operating system can be installed on an external computer in addition to a Windows operating system In this case the control applications are created either in C or C The supported Unix operating systems include e Solaris 2 6 Sparc Station e Solaris 2 6 Intel Platform Red Linux 6 2 x86 Processors Remote Control via RSIB Interface Windows Environment In order to be able to access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the file RSIB32 DLL must be copied into the Windows system32 directory or into the directory of the control applications For 16 bit applications the file RSIB DLL must be additionally copied into the directories mentioned The files RSIB DLL and RSIB32 DLL are included on the instrument in directory D R_S Instr RSIB For the different programming languages there are files available that contain the declarations of the DLL functions and the definition of the error codes Visual Basic 16 bit RSIB BAS D R_S Instr RSIB Visual Basic 32 bit RSIB32 BAS D R_S Instr RSIB RSIB H D R_S Instr RSIB For C C programs import libraries are a
296. et 660C gt Click button R amp S Analyzer Interface The measurement screen is displayed 1093 4820 12 1 27 E 3 Connecting an Output Device FSP gt Press the HCOPY key The HCOPY menu is opened DEVICE 1 DOP DEVICE 2 COLOR gt Press softkey DEVICE2 DEVICE 2 is activated as printing device HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS DEVICE2 Devicel WINDOWS METAFILE scs ZES The HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS table is opened and the current settings of PERT the two output devices displayed The current selection in line DEVICE2 is highlighted by the selection bar Print to File Orientation HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS gt Press the ENTER key Devicel WINDOWS METAFILE INTER Print to File YES The selection box DEVICE is displayed on Orientation the screen The current selection is po CLIP BORED marked by a tick Device2 CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File ENHANCED METAFILE Orientation BITMAP FILE HP DeskJet 660C VARIATION gt Press cursor key until the entry HP DeskJet 660C is highlighted by the selection bar gt Press the ENTER key Devicel WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File YES Orientation Device2 HP Deskjet 660C Print to File NO Orientation PORTRAIT 1093 4820 12
297. evel range also depends on the generator used The generator is controlled via the optional second IECBUS interface of the FSP IEC2 supplied with the option and with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators additionally via the TTL synchronization interface included in the AUX interface of the FSP Note The use of the TTL interface enables considerably higher measurement rates as pure IECBUS control because the frequency stepping of the FSP is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator Therefore the frequency sweep differs according to the capabilities of the generator used n the case of generators without TTL interface the generator frequency is first set for each frequency point via IECBUS then the setting procedure has to be completed before recording of measured values is possible e n the case of generators with TTL interface a list of the frequencies to be set is entered into the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the sweep is started and the next frequency point selected by means of the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The recording of measured values is only enabled when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal This method is considerably faster than pure IECBUS control With the SELECT GENERATOR softkey a list of the supported generators with the frequency and level range as well as the capabilities used is included The external generator can
298. f the instrument are also displayed The functions of menus are described in detail in Chapter 4 The IEC IEEE bus command associated with each softkey is indicated In addition the softkey list at the of Chapter 6 gives the assignment of IEC IEEE bus commands to softkeys FREQUENCY Key CENTER E CENTER Span lt gt 0 Span 0 STEPSIZEV 0 5 SPA 0 5 RBW START x SPA x RBW STOP CENTER CENTER MARKER MARKER TRACK FREQUENCY o OFF MANUAL MANUAL OFFSET TRACK SIGNAL BW TRACK TRACK THRESHOLD SELECT TRACE 1093 4820 12 3 24 E 3 FSP Menu Overview SPAN Key SWEEP TIME ANUAL FULL SPAN ZERO SPAN LAST SPAN 1093 4820 12 3 25 E 3 Menu Overview AMPT Key AMPT TO am RANGE LOG MANUAL RANGE LINEAR UNIT lt gt RE ATIE MANUAL POSITION OFFSE GRID EL ATTEN AUTO Option FSP B25 EL ATTEN MANUAL Option FSP B25 dBmV VOLT AMP
299. f the signal With shorter sweep times level dips can be seen in the time domain traces These level dips come from the burst characterics of the signal The numerical results however indicate the peak amplitudes during the measurement in the corresponding channel 1093 4820 12 2 54 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurement Example 5 Measuring adjacent channel power of a W CDMA uplink signal Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 1950 MHz Level 4 dBm Modulation W CDMA Reverse Link NTT DoCoMo 4 096 Mcps Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 1950 MHz 3 Switch on the ACP measurement for W CDMA gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the CHAN PWR softkey gt Press the CP ACP STANDARD softkey gt From the list of standards select W CDMA 4 096 REV using the spinwheel or the cursor down key below the spinwheel and press ENTER The FSP sets the channel configuration to the W CDMA standard NTT DoCoMo and ARIB 4 096 Mcps for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel The frequency span the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values The spectrum is displayed in the upper part of the
300. filters for selection of the channel bandwidth Deviating channel bandwidths cannot be set If deviating channel bandwidths are required the IBW method should be used The list of available channel filters is included in section Setting of Bandwidths and Sweep Time BW key The default setting is 14 kHz IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH BWID 14kHz The ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH softkey opens a table for defining the channel bandwidths for the adjacent channels ACP CHANNEL BW When measuring according to the IBW method FAST ACP OFF the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth the other channels Alt1 and Alt2 are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel on entering the adjacent channel bandwidth ADJ Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths The same holds true for the ALT2 channels alternate channels 2 when the bandwidth of the ALT1 channel alternate channel 1 is entered Note The bandwidths can be selected independent from each other by overwriting the table from top to bottom With the time domain method FAST ACP ON the adjacent channel bandwidths are selected from the list of available channel filters For deviating adjacent channel bandwidths the IBW method should be used IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH BWID ACH 1kHz SENS POW ACH BWID ALT1 14kHz SENS POW ACH BW
301. follows 1093 4820 12 2 34 E 2 FSP Noise Measurements Since only uncorrelated samples contribute to the RMS value the number of samples can be calculated from the sweep time and the resolution bandwidth Samples can be assumed to be uncorrelated if sampling is performed at intervals of 1 RBW The number of uncorrelated samples Ndecorr is calculated as follows Ndecorr SWT RBW The number of uncorrelated samples per trace pixel is obtained by dividing Ngecorr by 501 pixels per trace Example At a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz and a sweep time of 100 ms 3000 uncorrelated samples are obtained If the channel bandwidth is equal to the frequency display range i e all trace pixels are used for the channel power measurement a repeatability of 0 2 dB with a confidence level of 99 is the estimate that can be derived from Fig 2 28 Measuring Phase Noise The FSP has an easy to use marker function for phase noise measurements This marker function indicates the phase noise of an RF oscillator at any carrier in dBc in a bandwidth of 1 Hz Measurement Example Measuring the phase noise of a signal generator at a carrier offset of 10 kHz Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Measurement using FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to
302. for measuring instrument Dim Response As String Response string Set up connection to measuring instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl If ud 0 Then Error treatment End If Send query command Call RSDLLibwrt ud FREQ START ibsta iberr ibcntl Provide space for response Response 100 Read response from measuring instrument Call RSDLLibrd ud Response ibsta iberr ibcntl 1093 4820 12 4 252 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface Inthis example a Save Recall of the instrument setups is performed Dim ibsta As Integer Status variable Dim iberr As Integer Error variable Dim ibcntl As Long Count variable Dim ud As Integer Handle for measuring instrument Dim Cmd As String Command string Set up connection to measuring instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 ibsta iberr ibcntl If ud 0 Then Error treatment End If Request instrument settings Cmd SYST SET Call RSDLLibwrt ud Cmd ibsta iberr ibcntl Store instrument response in file Call RSDLLibrdf ud C db sav ibsta iberr ibcntl Reset instrument Call RSDLLibwrt ud RST ibsta iberr ibcntl and restore the previous settings to this end disable the END message Call RSDLLibeot ud 0 ibsta iberr ibcntl first send off command Call RSDLLibwrt ud SYST SET ibsta iberr ibcntl enable the END message a
303. frequency and times related to the time on the left edge of the diagram e The reference of the interpolation points to the Y axis The limit line can be selected either for absolute levels or voltages or referred to the set maximum level Ref Lvl The position on the display depends on the REF LEVEL POSITION e With relative reference values for the Y axis it is possible to enter an absolute threshold THRESHOLD which lowers the relative limit values see below e The type of limit line upper or lower limit With this information and the active limit checking function Table LIMIT LINES LIMIT CHECK ON the FSP checks for compliance with each limit e The limit line units to be used The units of the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the active measurement window e The measurement curve trace to which the limit line is assigned For the FSP this defines the curve to which the limit is to be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed e For each limit line a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation e n addition commentary can be written for each limit line e g a description of the application Display lines are exclusively used to optically mark relevant frequencies or points in time span 0 as well as constant level values It is not possible to check automatically whether the marked level values have been underranged or exceeded 1093 4820 12 4 118 E 3
304. function 2 31 Measuring Phase Noise 3 erection ee te eer ee ee Ee De Re 2 35 Measurement Example Measuring the phase noise of a signal generator at a carrier offset OL TO inii eoi eet p HERE PES 2 35 Measurements on Modulated 2 37 Measurements AM 1 8 2 37 Measurement Example 1 Displaying the AF of an AM signal in the time domain 2 37 Measurement Example 2 Measuring the modulation depth of an AM carrier in the frequency domain eerte me d pete 2 39 Measurements on FM 5 2 40 Measurement Example Displaying the AF of an FM 2 40 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel 2 43 Measurement Example 1 ACPR measurement on 1595 CDMA Signal 2 44 Measurement Example 2 Measuring the adjacent channel power of an 15136 TDMA 2 48 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Modulation Spectrum in Burst Mode with the Gated Sweep Function 2 51 Measurement Example 4 Measuring the Transient Spectrum in Burst Mode with the Fast ACP
305. gain Call RSDLLibeot ud 1 ibsta iberr ibcntl and send the data Call RSDLLibwrtf ud C db sav ibsta iberr ibcntl 1093 4820 12 4 253 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP Visual Basic for Applications Winword and Excel Programming hints The programming language Visual Basic for Applications VBA is supported as a macro language by various manufacturers The programs Winword and Excel use this language for the versions Winword 97 or Excel 5 0 and higher For macros created with Visual Basic for Applications the same hints are valid as for Visual Basic Applications Programming example e Using the macro QueryMaxPeak a single sweep with subsequent query of the maximum peak is performed The result is entered in a Winword or Excel document Sub QueryMaxPeak Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim ibsta As Integer iberr As Integer ibcntl As Long ud As Integer Response As String Status variable Error variable transferred characters Unit Descriptor Response string handle for instrument Set up connection to measuring instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 If ud 0 Then ibsta iberr ibcntl Call MsgBox Device with address 89 10 38 97 could amp not be found vbExclamation End End If Determine maximum peak in the range 1 2MHZ Call RSDLLibwrt ud RST ibsta iberr
306. gain coupling to span Press the HES BW AUTO softkey If you want to stop the harmonics measurement on the internal reference generator at this point switch the FSP s RF input on again with the following key sequence Press the SETUP key and the softkey sequence SERVICE INPUT HF or press the PRESET key High Sensitivity Harmonics Measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased considerably In this case the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the spectrum analyzer set to a small span Only the frequency range around the harmonics will then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth Measurement Example 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default settings Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Switch on the internal reference generator Press the SETUP key Press the softkeys SERVICE INPUT CAL The internal 128 MHz reference generator is now on The FSP s RF input is switched off 3 Setthe center frequency to 128 MHz and the span to 100 kHz gt Press the FREQ key The frequency menu opens Enter 128 in the entry field from the numeric keypad and terminate with the MHz key Press the SPAN key gt Enter 700 in the entry filed from the numeric keypad and terminate with the KHz key The FSP displays the reference signal with a span of
307. gs should be selected RBW lt lt occupied bandwidth approx 1 20 of voice communication type 300 Hz or 1 kHz occupied bandwidth for VBW gt 3 x RBW Detector RMS or sample Span gt 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth Some of the measurement specifications e g PDC RCR STD 27B require measurement of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector The detector setting of the FSP has to be changed accordingly then Example Measurement of occupied bandwidth of a PDC signal at 800 MHz level 0 dBm PRESET Set the FSP to the default setting FREQ CENTER 800 MHz Set the center frequency to 800 MHz AMPT 0 dBm Set the reference level to 0 dBm MEAS Call the menu for the measurement functions OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH Select measurement of the occupied bandwidth and open the submenu for configuring the measurement POWER BANDWIDTH Select 9995 for the bandwidth to be measured 99 96 CHANNEL BANDWIDTH Enter the channel bandwidth of 21 kHz specified by PDC 21 kHz ADJUST SETTINGS Optimize the measurement parameters for the specified channel band width Allow for a complete frequency sweep so that the FSP can determine the total signal power ADJUST REF LVL Adjust the reference level to the measured signal power TRACE DETECTOR PDC requires measurement of the occupied bandwidth using a DETECTOR MAX PEAK peak detector Therefore switch on the peak detector instead of the 1093 4820 12 RMS detector select
308. h instrument configurations and measurement data in the form of data sets The respective data are stored on the internal hard disk or if selected on a floppy The hard disk and floppy disk drives have the following names floppy disk A hard disk D hard disk C is reserved for instrument software In addition to the saving and recalling of complete instrument settings it is also possible to save recall subsets of settings Configuration data and measurement values are stored in separate files These files have the same name as the data set but however have a different extension A data set thus consists of several files which have the same name but different extensions see Table 4 2 Default setting for storing the data sets is directory D USER CONFIG When saving or loading a data set the subsets which are to be saved or loaded can be selected in the corresponding tables This makes it easy to reconstruct specific instrument settings beside the default setting of the instrument When saving and loading data data subsets are selected in table SEL ITEMS TO SAVE RECALL The saved files of the data sets can be copied from one storage medium e g drive C to another storage medium e g drive A or to another directory using the functions found in the FILE MANAGER sub menu File names and extensions must however not be changed The relationship between the data subsets and the extensions is shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Relationship between
309. he FSP and carefully check the instrument for damage remove protective caps gt Should the instrument be damaged immediately notify the transportation company that shipped the instrument to you and keep the box and packing material gt For further transport or shipment of the FSP the original packing should also be used It is recommended to keep at least the two protective caps for front and rear side in order to prevent damage to the controls and connectors Setting Up the Instrument Standalone Operation The instrument is designed for use under general laboratory conditions The ambient conditions required at the operational site are as follows Building ground Ground connection of operational site Heel strap Floor mat 1093 4820 12 The ambient temperature must be in the range indicated in the data sheet All fan openings must be unobstructed and the air flow at the rear panel and at the side panel perforations must not be obstructed The distance to the wall should be at least 10cm The mounting surface should be flat In order to avoid damage of electronic components of the device under test due to electrostatic discharge on manual touch protection of the operational site against electrostatic discharge is recommended FSP Getting Started with the Instrument Safety Instruction for Instruments with Tiltable Feet Warning The feet m
310. he entry moves the FSP to the next higher directory level Note It is not possible to change menus as long as a file operation is running The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of the directory which will be used in subsequent file operations The new path is included in the FILE MANAGEMENT table IEC IEEE command MMEM MSIS a MMEM CDIR D user 4 170 E 3 FSP Recalling Data Sets The MAKE DIRECTORY softkey creates directories sub directories Sub directories are recommended for sorting files on the storage medium so that the structure is easier to comprehend The entry of an absolute path name e g USER MEAS as well as the path relative to the current directory e g MEAS is possible IEC IEEE command MMEM MDIR D user test The FORMAT DISK softkey formats diskettes located in drive A To prevent accidental destruction of diskette data confirmation by the user is requested IEC IEEE command MMEM INIT a The RENAME softkey activates the entry of a new name for the selected file or directory command MMEM MOVE test02 cfg set2 cfg The SORT MODE softkey activates the selection of the criteria according to which the files listed in the FILE MANAGEMENT table may be sorted SORT MODE V by NAME Directory names are located at the top of the list after the entry for the next higher directory level IEC IEEE command The COPY
311. he interface lines DTR and RTS are connected on both transmitter and receiver For a simple 3 wire connection this is not the case and hardware handshake cannot be used here Default setting is NONE None V DTR RTS IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER CONT DTR OFF SYST COMM SER CONT RTS OFF 1093 4820 12 4 148 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Configuration Setup SW Handshake Software handshake protocol Besides the hardware handshake mechanism using interface lines it is also possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol Here control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes These control bytes can be used as necessary to stop data transmission until the receiver is ready to receive data again In contrast to hardware handshaking software handshaking can be realized even for a simple 3 wire connection One limitation is however that software handshaking cannot be used for the transmission of binary data since the control characters XON and XOFF require bit combinations that are also used for binary data transmission Default setting is NONE None XON XOFF IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PACE NONE Owner Assignment of the interface The serial interface can be assigned alternatively to the measuring instrument section or to the computer section If the interface is assigned to one section of the instrument it is not a
312. he maximum value is calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN RES The STANDARD DEVIATION softkey switches on the calculation of the standard deviation of trace points from the mean value and outputs them as measured value The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time For the maximum peak the largest standard deviation obtained since the activation of MAX HOLD ON is displayed With AVERAGE ON the standard deviations of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM SDEV RES The LIMIT ON OFF softkey selects the limited ON or non limited OFF evaluation range The evaluation range is defined by the START LIMIT and STOP LIMIT softkeys If LIMIT ON signals are only searched between the two lines If only one limit line is switched on time line 1 is the lower limit and the upper limit corresponds to the stop frequency If time line 2 is also switched on it defines the upper limit If no limit line is switched on the evaluation range is not limited The default setting is LIMIT OFF IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK X SLIM OFF The START LIMIT softkey activates the entry of
313. he message OPTION KEY OK is displayed in the status line and the firmware option appears in table FIRMWARE OPTIONS On entry of an invalid license key the message OPTION KEY INVALID is displayed in the status line IEC IEEE bus command Softkey REMOVE OPTION removes all firmware options from the instruments Execution of this function must be confirmed in a message box in order to avoid removal of the firmware options by mistake IEC IEEE bus command 4 153 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Emulation of the Instrument Front Panel SETUP GENERAL SETUP NEXT menu The SOFT FRONTPANEL softkey switches the display of the front panel keys on and off When the front panel keys are displayed on the screen the instrument can be controlled by clicking the respective button with the mouse This is especially useful when the instrument in a different site is controlled via a remote control program like for instance PCANYWHERE and the screen contents are transferred to the controller via remote link Analyzer Screen Mm E 15 2805 kHz Span 152 805 kHz Poner 0 83 dBm Bandwidth 25 kHz Adjacent Channel ower 34 71 dBc Bandwidth Upper 34 3 Spacing Alternate Channel 66 10 dBc Bandwidth Upper 66 44 dBc Spacing Note Display resolution When the display of the front panel keys is switched on the screen resolution of the instru
314. he roll key terminates the input of parameters In tables the cursor keys are used to shift the cursor between the lines and columns of the table o m 4 4 9 are used to shift the cursor inside the entry window to reach a particular position in the string The keys 2 and increase or decrease the value of a parameter for numeric input switch between editing line and help line editor for alphanumeric input 1093 4820 12 3 12 E 2 FSP Setting Parameters Selection and Setting of Parameters via Keys or Softkeys The selection of parameters and their settings is effected by means of a key a softkey or in a table depending on the hierarchical level of the menu they are assigned to Selection and setting of parameters in tables is described in section Selection and Setting of Parameters in Tables Selection via key Selection via softkey 1 The softkey is active or inactive 2 The softkey acts like a toggle switch each pressing changes the active selection 1093 4820 12 Most keys of the FSP are used to enter menus where the selection and the settings are made Few settings can be made directly by means of a keystroke only Example Call up of preset settings gt Press PRESET key The FSP is brought into a predefined initial state PRESET In most cases the selection is made by pressing the respective softkey There are various
315. hich are important for analysis of the results In addition message fields entry windows and tables may be shown in this area This area contains the instrument functions which can be selected via the softkeys The softkey area is not superimposed by other graphics This area contains the available operating modes and screen modes The hotkey area is not superimposed by other graphics Diagram Area Reference level Status Information Trace info Level axis labelling Fig 3 2 1093 4820 12 Logo Title date Hardwaresettings Marker deltamarker This is a screen title 20 chars RBM 388 kHz Marker 1 T1 26 Jun 99 22 57 1 MHz 19 62 dBm Ref 18 dBm 18 dB 2 5 ms 13 MHz j T Enhancement i label 1 Delta T1 42 3t Delta 4 T1 Measurement 60 i window MT wm i i idt Frequency axis labelling Center 138 MHz 1 Span 18 MHz Subdivision of the FSP screen in analyzer mode without measuring diagram 3 2 E 2 FSP The Screen R DELTA MARKER 2 RBH 388 kHz Delta 2 T1 BOB kHz UBU 1 MHz 20 37 dB Ref 20 dBm Att 10 dB SUT 2 5 ms 8 kHz 1 AP CLRHR Center 128 MHz 1 Span 18 MHz Fig 3 3 Measuring diagram Indications in the Diagram Area The following graphic elements are displayed in the diagram area General indicati
316. hmic level units a reduction of the linear power by 50 reduces the logarithmic signal level by only 3 dB IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID TYPE LIN 4 27 E 3 Analyzer Sweep FSP Sweep Settings SWEEP Key The SWEEP key serves for configuring the sweep mode SWEEP menu The SWEEP key calls a menu in which the sweep BW SWEEP Ea mode is defined In split screen mode the entries made are valid for the active window only SWEEP The CONTINUOUS SWEEP SINGLE SWEEP and SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkeys are mutually CONTINUE SGL SWEEP exclusive selection keys SWEEPTIME AUTO SWEEP COUNT SWEEP POINTS SGL SWEEP DISP OFF The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey activates the continuous sweep mode which means that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger mode set When working in the split screen mode and with different settings in the two windows screen A is swept first followed by screen B When the softkey is pressed the sweep is restarted CONTINUOUS SWEEP is the default setting of FSP IEC IEEE bus command INIT CONT ON The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts n sweeps after triggering The number of sweeps is determined by the SWEEP COUNT softkey When working in the split screen mode the frequency ranges of the two windows are swept one after the other If a trace is swept using TRACE AVERAGE or MAXHOLD the value set via the SWEEP COUNT
317. ich the library returns the status of the SRQ bit 0 no SRQ 1 SRQ active device requests service Example RSDLLTestSrq ud result ibsta iberr ibcntl This function corresponds to the function RSDLLWaitSrq The only difference is that RSDLLTestSRQ immediately returns the current status of the SRQ bit whereas RSDLLWaitSrq waits for an SRQ to occur 1093 4820 12 4 249 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP RSDLLWaitSrq This function waits until the device triggers SRQ with the handle VB format Function RSDLLWaitSrq ByVal ud Result ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLWaitSrq short ud short far result short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLWaitSrq short ud short result short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle result Reference to an integer value in which the library returns the status of the SRQ bit 0 No SRQ has occurred during the timeout 1 SRQ has occurred during the timeout Example RSDLLWaitSrq ud result ibsta iberr ibcntl The function waits until one of the following two events occurs The measuring instrument triggers an SRQ e No SRQ occurs during the timeout defined with RSDLLibtmo RSDLLSwapBytes This function changes the display of binary numbers on non Intel platforms VB format Not provided at present since it is required only on non Intel platforms C f
318. ig 2 4 sreemum Fig 2 4 Suppression of noise during harmonic measurement by reducing video bandwidth 9 Coupling the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth again Press the VIDEO BW AUTO softkey 10 Reduce noise by averaging the trace Press the TRACE key Press the AVEHAGE softkey The noise component of the trace is smoothed by averaging 10 consecutive traces Stop 488 MHz Start 108 MHz screen Fig 2 5 Suppression of noise during harmonic measurements by averaging the trace 11 Switch off trace averaging again gt Press the CLEAR WRITE softkey 1093 4820 12 2 9 E 2 Measurement of Harmonics FSP 12 Reduce noise by reducing the measurement bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is decreased noise is reduced proportionally i e if the resolution bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 10 the noise is also reduced by the same factor corresponds to 10 dB The amplitude of a sinusoidal signal is not changed by reducing the resolution bandwidth 13 Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz gt Press the BWkey gt Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 10 kHz The noise is reduced by approx 25 dB compared to the previous setting Since the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth it is reduced to 1 kHz the same proportional reduction as the resolution bandwidth The sweep time is therefore increased to 60 seconds 14 Reset the resolution bandwidth a
319. ignals cannot be directly measured as is the case with AM signals With FM signals the voltage at the output of the envelope detector is constant as long as the frequency deviation of the signal is within the flat part of the passband characteristic of the resolution filter which has been selected Amplitude variations can only occur if the current frequency lies on the falling edge of the filter characteristic This effect can be used to demodulate FM signals The center frequency of the analyzer is set in a way that the nominal frequency of the test signal is on the filter edge below or above the center frequency The resolution bandwidth and the frequency offset are selected in a way that the current frequency is on the linear part of the filter slope The frequency variation of the FM signal is then transformed into an amplitude variation which can be displayed in the time domain The FSP s analog 4 order filters with frequencies from 300 kHz to 3 MHz have a good filter slope linearity if the frequency of the FSP is set to 1 2 times the filter bandwidth below or above the frequency of the transmit signal The useful range for FM demodulation is then almost equal to the resolution bandwidth Measurement Example Displaying the AF of an FM carrier Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation FM 0 kHz deviation i e FM off 1 kHz AF Measurement with the FSP 1
320. ilrd This function reads Cnt bytes from the device with the handle ua VB format Function RSDLLilrd ByVal ud ByVal Rd ByVal Cnt amp ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLilrd short ud char far Rd unsigned long Cnt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far format Unix short RSDLLilrd short ud char Rd unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle ent Maximum number of bytes copied from the DLL into the target string Example RSDLLilrd ud RD 100 ibsta iberr 1 Like the function RSDLLibrd this function reads data from a device The only difference is that in this case the maximum number of bytes to be copied into the target string Rd can be indicated by means of Cnt This function prevents writing beyond the end of the string 1093 4820 12 4 246 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface RSDLLibrdf Reads data from the device with the handle ud into the file file VB format Function RSDLLibrdf ByVal ud ByVal file ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibrd short ud char far file short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibrd short ud char file short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle file File into which the read data is written Example RSDLLibrdf
321. ime domain Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation 50 96 AM 1 kHz AF Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to 0 kHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz 3 Set the reference level to 6 dBm and the display range to linear Press the AMPT key and enter 6 dBm gt Press the RANGE LINEAR softkey 1093 4820 12 2 37 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP 4 Use the video trigger to trigger on the AF signal in order to obtain a stationary display gt Press the TRIG key gt Press the VIDEO softkey The video trigger level is set to 50 if the instrument is switched on for the first time The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the graph The FSP displays the 1 kHz AF signal stably in the time domain TRIGGER LEVEL 50 _ spectrum Fig 2 30 Measuring the AF signal from a 1 kHz AM carrier If the FSP is equipped with the AM FM Demodulator option FSP B3 the AF can be monitored on the built in loudspeaker 5 Switch on the internal AM demodulator gt Press the MKR FCTN key gt Press the MKR DEMOD softkey The FSP switches the AM demodulator on automatically gt Turn up volume control A 1 kHz tone is output by the buil
322. imum value on the corresponding trace The search direction is defined in the NEXT MODE submenu see above IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK MIN NEX CALC DELT MIN NEX The EXCLUDE LO softkey limits the frequency range for the marker search functions or disables the limit activated Because of the feedthrough of the first local oscillator to the first intermediate frequency at the input mixer the LO is represented as a signal at 0 Hz To avoid the marker jumping to the LO at 0 Hz with the peak function when setting the display range this frequency is excluded The minimum frequency to which the marker jumps is gt 6 x resolution bandwidth RBW deactivated No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is in cluded in the marker search functions IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK LOEX ON 1093 4820 12 4 81 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Power Measurements Hardkey MEAS With its power measurement functions the FSP is able to measure all the necessary parameters with high accuracy in a wide dynamic range A modulated carrier is almost always used except e g SSB AM for high frequency transmission of information Due to the information modulated upon the carrier the latter covers a spectrum which is defined by the modulation the transmission data rate and the signal filtering Within a transmission band each carrier is assigned a channel taking into account these parameters In order to ensure erro
323. in dB are converted into linear voltages or powers prior to averaging Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against each other and reconverted into level values For stationary signals the two methods yield the same result Logarithmic averaging or difference calculation is recommended if sinewave signals are to be clearly visible against noise since with this type of averaging noise suppression is improved while the sinewave signals remain unchanged For noise or pseudo noise signals the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in logarithmic averaging due the characteristic involved and the negative peak values are increased relative to the average value If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value The difference is 2 5 dB 4 45 E 3 Traces Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP Amplitude MY Amplitude distribution without averaging E Amplitude distribution af after averaging Probability distribution This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2 5 dB factor Therefore the FSP offers the selection of linear averaging The trace data are delogarithmized prior to averaging then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the screen The average value is always correctly displayed irrespective of the signal characteristic The ASCII FILE EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in ASCII format on a fl
324. in mechanism proceed as follows gt Open NT start menu by means of lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt gt Select the menu item RUN A dialog box opens gt Enter the command D USER NO_AUTOLOGIN REG into the dialog box and confirm with ENTER 1093 4820 12 4 227 E 3 LAN Interface FSP The autologin mechanism is disabled When the instrument is rebooted a prompt for user name and password will appear before the instrument firmware is started Reenabling the Autologin Mechanism To enable the autologin mechanism again proceed as follows gt Open the NT start menu by means of lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt gt Select the menu item RUN A dialog box opens gt Enter the command D USER AUTOLOGIN REG into the dialog box and confirm with ENTER The autologin mechanism is reenabled and is active when the instrument is rebooted the next time Deinstallation of the Network Driver Installation of the MS Loopback Adapter If the instrument is to be operated without network connection for a limited or an unlimited period of time the network card driver must be uninstalled or at least deactivated It is not possible to uninstall the driver without installing another network driver on the analyzer since this would impair the performance of the instrument For this reason the network card driver is replaced by the MS Loopback Adapter supplied with the instrument This pseudo network driver simulates a network including network ca
325. ined very easily If marker 1 is in the switched off state it will be switched on automatically IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK Y PERC 0 100 1093 4820 12 4 108 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 E Y AXIS MAX VALUE Y AXIS ADJUST DEFAULT Analyzer MEAS The RES BW softkey sets the resolution bandwidth in the menu STATISTIC FUNCTION directly without switching to the corresponding menu BW The function of the softkey is identical to the softkey RES BW MANUAL in the menu BW For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to transmit the actual peaks of the signal amplitude correctly Video bandwidth is set to 10 MHz automatically with a statistic function switched on IEC IEEE bus command BAND 3 MHz The NO OF SAMPLES softkey sets the number of power measurements taken into account for the statistics Please note that the overall measurement time is influenced by the number of samples selected as well as by the resolution bandwidth set up for the measurement as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate IEC IEEE bus command CALC STAT NSAM value X AXIS The SCALING softkey opens a sub menu that allows changing REF LEVEL the scaling parameters for both the x and the y axis X AXIS RANGE MIN VALUE SETTINGS SETTINGS 2 The 5 REF LEVEL softkey changes the level settings of the instrument and
326. ing a very small video bandwidth relative to the resolution bandwidth 5 The measurement result is stabilized by averaging the trace Press the TRACE key Press the AVERAGE softkey The FSP performs sliding averaging over 10 traces from consecutive sweeps The measurement result becomes more stable 1093 4820 12 2 28 E 2 FSP Noise Measurements Conversion to other reference bandwidths The result of the noise measurement can be referred to other bandwidths by simple conversion This is done by adding 10 log BW to the measurement result BW being the new reference bandwidth Example A noise power of 150 dBm 1 Hz is to be referred to a bandwidth of 1 KHz 150 10 log 1000 150 30 120 dBm 1 kHz Calculation method The following method is used to calculate the noise power If the noise marker is switched on the FSP automatically activates the sample detector The video bandwidth is set to 1 10 of the selected resolution bandwidth RBW To calculate the noise the FSP takes an average over 17 adjacent pixels the pixel on which the marker is positioned and 8 pixels to the left 8 pixels to the right of the marker The measurement result is stabilized by video filtering and averaging over 17 pixels Since both video filtering and averaging over 17 trace points is performed in the log display mode the result would be 2 51 dB too low difference between logarithmic noise average and noise power
327. ing the calculation formula For the sake of clarity the formula is also displayed in the table 1093 4820 12 4 217 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control 1093 4820 12 FSP RESULT The frequency range of the generator resulting from the calculation formula An asterisk after the upper limit indicates that the stop frequency of the FSP must be adapted when the generator is Switched on in order not to exceed its maximum frequency In the following illustration this is true for the upper generator at a stop frequency of 3 2 GHz of the FSP whereas the lower generator does not yet require an adaptation SOURCE FREQ REC FREQ OFFSET NUN DEN OFFSET RESULT al E Hz Hz 3GHz 1 1 GHz Hz 3 2GHz IEC bus commands SOUR EXT POW 30dBm SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100MHZ 4 218 E 3 FSP LAN Interface Option LAN Interface FSP B16 Using the option FSP B16 LAN Interface the instrument can be connected to an Ethernet LAN Local Area Network Thus it is possible to transfer data via the network and use network printers In addition the instrument can be remote controlled via network The network card allows both for a 10 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3 and a 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The selection between 10 Mbit s and 100 Mbit s can take place either automatically or via manual setting Connecting the Instrument to the Network Caution Befor
328. ion 10 SOURCE 1093 4820 12 The SOURCE ON OFF softkey switches the tracking generator or off Default setting is OFF Note When the tracking generator is switched on the maximum stop frequency is limited to 3GHz This upper limit is automatically reduced by a frequency offset set up for the tracking generator order to meet the data sheet accuracy for measurements with active tracing generetor the start frequency must be set to gt 3 x Resolution Bandwidth e The minimum sweeptime for measurements with data sheet accuracy is 100 ms in frequency domain span gt 0 Hz Selecting sweeptime below this limit will result in the sweeptime indicator field SWT being supplied with a red asterisc and the message UNCAL being displayed FFT filters FILTER FFT in BW menu are not available when the tracking generator is active IEC IEEE bus command OUTP STAT ON 4 188 E 3 FSP Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 The SOURCE POWER softkey allows the tracking generator output power to be selected The output level can be set in 0 1 dB steps from 30 dBm to 0 dBm If the tracking generator is off it is automatically switched on when an output power value is entered The default output power is 20 dBm IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW 20dBm The POWER OFFSET softkey allows selection of a constant level offset for the tracking generator With this offset for example attenuat
329. ion of the sweep time 1093 4820 12 2 45 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP ACPR Repeatability 1595 IBW Method ES 5 Adjacent channels Alternate channels Standard dev dB X o cene 4 100 1000 Sweep time ms m Fig 2 35 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement IS95 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used 6 Switch to Fast ACP to increase the repeatability of results gt Press the CP ACP CONFIG 4 softkey gt Set the FAST ACP softkey to ON The FSP measures the power of each channel in the time domain The trace represents power as a function of time for each channel see Fig 2 36 The numerical results over consecutive measurements become much more stable tt 20 dB 100 ms Fig 2 36 Measuring the channel power adjacent channel power ratio for 1595 signals the time domain Fast ACP The following figure shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit channel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecutive measurements as shown in Fig 2 35 Take scaling into account if comparing power values 1093 4820 12 2 46 E
330. ion disk click Have Disk If pour printer is not listed consult your driver in the Printers table printer documentation for a compatible printer Note If the desired type of the output device does not appear in the list the driver has not yet HP DeskJet 8500 been installed on the instrument In this case click on the HAVE DISK button A prompt HP DeskJet Portable appears requesting the user to insert a disk HP DeskJet 4 with the respective printer driver Then press UNT OK and select the desired printer driver After the installation Service Pack 5 must be reinstalled see section Installing the Back HEN Windows NT Software gt Click on Next If one or more printers are already installed this window will ask whether the just installed printer is to be selected as standard printer for the Windows NT applications Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as default printer No is set as default Manufacturers Printers Add Printer Wizard Complete the installation of the printer The network printer has been successfully installed driver by means of Finish Note If the prompt to specify the path to the printer driver appears after clicking on Finish the Service Pack must be reinstalled after this printer installation see Chapter 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software 3
331. ion of MAX HOLD ON is displayed With AVERAGE ON the peak values of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE RES The RMS softkey switches on the calculation of the rms value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment of it For the maximum peak the largest rms value obtained since the activation of MAX HOLD ON is displayed With AVERAGE ON the rms values of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or the maximum value is calculated is set with the NUMBER OF SWEEPS softkey IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS RES 4 84 E 3 FSP LIMIT ON 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MEAS The MEAN softkey switches on the calculation of the mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment of it The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated This can be used for instance to measure the mean power during a GSM burst For the maximum peak the largest mean value obtained since the activation of MAX HOLD ON displayed With AVERAGE ON the mean values of a trace are averaged over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps over which the average or t
332. ional After the calibration the following message is displayed NOTE calibration complete The display is cleared after approx 3 seconds IEC bus command CORR METH REFL CORR COLL THR 1093 4820 12 4 211 E 3 Configuration External Generator Control FSP Calibration mechanism Calibration means a calculation of the difference between the currently measured power and a reference curve independent of the selected type of measurement transmission reflection The hardware settings used for measuring the reference curve are included in the reference dataset Even with normalization switched on the device settings can be changed in a wide area without stopping the normalization This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum For this purpose the reference dataset trace with 501 measured values is stored internally as a table of 501 points frequency level Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current device settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency ie the reference dataset is extended by constant values An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy This enhancement label is displayed at the righ
333. ith safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation the user must observe all instructions and warnings given in this operating manual Safety related symbols used on equipment and documentation from R amp S Observe Weight PE terminal Ground Danger Warning Ground Attention operating indication for terminal Shock hazard Hot surfaces Electrostatic instructions units gt 18 kg sensitive de vices require special care The unit may be used only in the operating con ditions and positions specified by the manufac turer Unless otherwise agreed the following applies to R amp S products IP degree of protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 only for indoor use al titude max 2000 m The unit may be operated only from supply net works fused with max 16 A Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet a tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures should be taken to avoid any hazards using for example appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation If the unit is to be permanently wired the PE terminal of the unit must first be connected to the PE conductor on site before any other con nections are made Installation and cabling of the unit to be performed only by qualified techni cal personnel F
334. k Excursion 20 dB causes signal 3 to be detected as well since its highest level change of 30 dB is now higher than the set peak excur sion Order of signals found PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK Signal 2 NEXT PEAK Signal 4 NEXT PEAK Signal 3 or PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 2 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 3 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Signal 4 The setting Peak Excursion 6 dB detects all the signals NEXT PEAK RIGHT does not work as required Order of signals found PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK Signal 2 NEXT PEAK Signal 4 NEXT PEAK Signal 3 or PEAK Signal 1 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2 NEXT PEAK RIGHT Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2 1093 4820 12 4 79 E 3 MKR gt Analyzer 1093 4820 12 FSP The gt softkey sets the active marker to a new trace If only one trace is available on the screen the softkey does not appear If several traces are available on the screen only these are offered IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK TRAC 2 Example Three traces are displayed on the screen The marker is always on Trace 1 after switching on MKR gt 2 lt gt The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains at the previous frequency or time MKR gt TRACE 3 lt ENTER gt marker jumps to Trace gt STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the center frequency variation to the current marker frequ
335. l resolution bandwidths It is therefore best to select the largest resolution bandwidth possible to obtain the range that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing frequency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Distortion free Dynamic Range Dyn range dB 1 MHz carrier offset 100 co o Thermal Noise 60 50 40 30 20 10 Mixer level dBm Fig 2 17 Intermodulation free range of the FSP3 as a function of level at the input mixer and the set resolution bandwidth useful signal offset 1 MHz DANL 155 dBm Hz TOI 12 dBm typ values at 2 GHz The optimum mixer level i e the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its maximum depends on the bandwidth At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz it is approx 42 dBm and at 10 kHz increases to approx 32 dBm 1093 4820 12 2 21 E 2 Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals FSP Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation free range at carrier offsets between 10 and 100 kHz Fig 2 18 At greater bandwidths
336. lation Free run SWEEP eeeeeee senes neither Erequeri y ore mre d 4 5 axis labelling 2 3 4 4 6 X TEATELE 4 60 coupling of diagrams 4 133 display window 4 5 4 10 MM E 4 129 offset 2 4 9 Offset ext generator 4 213 offset tracking generator 4 198 Spal icai ihn et Asta DUIS 4 10 start 4 8 stop 24 8 switching off display 4 134 Frequency converting measurements 4 198 4 213 FRQ enhancement 3 6 Full screen 2 2 8 4 132 Eull SDari zx iiie RE o eere 4 10 G GAT enhancement 3 6 Gate delay eoi nU AER 4 36 2 2 0 0 0000000000000000 4 34 length GHz dBm key GMSK deer 6 100 SelectlOn ice 6 101 H Hardcopy oo dehet br 4 177 e o E WEE HERE 4 177 ais EE vein EROR IARE 4 174 Hardware Adjustment 4 162 Hardware settings indication 3 3 Header itt het 5 10 Help line editor essere 3 20 1093 4820 12 Index Horizontal sync signal esses 4 39 Hotkey iii re etl dan en 4 187 R
337. lation products of lower order have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference It is the intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic of the second useful signal in case of two tone modulation The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful signals Fig 4 11 shows intermodulation products and generated by the two useful signals Py and Pyp Level U1 U2 m m Af 4 Frequenc fur f2 Fig 4 11 Intermodulation products Py and Pye The intermodulation product at is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal and signal Py the intermodulation product at by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal Py and signal f4 2X fur fu2 1 f2 2X fi 2 The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that spacing ap3 between intermodulation signals and useful signals is reduced by 2 dB This is illustrated in Fig 4 12 1093 4820 12 4 115 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP Intercept point Output level Compression Intermodulation product Input level Fig
338. les ibsta iberr ibcntl As with the National Instrument interface the successful execution of a command can be checked by means of the variables ibsta iberr and ibcnt1 For this purpose all RSIB functions are assigned references to these three variables Status word ibsta The status word ibsta provides information on the status of the RSIB interface The following bits are defined 8000 Is set when an error has occurred on calling a function If this bit is set iberr contains an error code which specifies the error in greater detail 4000 Is set when a timeout has occurred on calling a function CMPL 0100 Is set if the response of the GPIB parser has been read out completely If a parser response is read out with the function RSDLLilrd and the length of the buffer is insufficient for the answer the bit will be cleared Error variable iberr If the ERR bit 8000h is set in the status word iberr contains an error code which allows to specify the error in greater detail Extra error codes are defined for the RSIB interface independent of the National Instruments interface Eme Desorption Setup of the connection to the measuring instrument has failed A function of the interface has been called with an illegal device handle mew pos 16 interface is blocked by a stil running function pense Error upon creating or assigning a semaphore under Unix Count variable ibcntl The vari
339. librsib so X Yin a directory for which the control application has read rights Example In s usr lib librsib so 1 0 usr lib librsib so Linker options for creating applications e lrsib import library Lxxx path information where the import library can be found This is where the above file link has been created Example L usr lib Additional linker options for creating applications only under Solaris Rxxx path information where the library is searched for during the program run R usr lib Run time environment Set environment variable Lb RUN PATH to the directory in which the file link has been created This is necessary only if Librsib so cannot be found in the standard search path of the operating system and the linker option only Solaris was not specified For C C programming the declarations of the library functions and the definition of error codes are contained in C C RSIB H D R_S Instr RSIB 1093 4820 12 4 242 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface RSIB Interface Functions This chapter lists all functions of the DLL RSIB DLL or RSIB32 DLL or librsib so which allow to produce control applications Overview of Interface Functions The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for GPIB programming The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following table pee 1093 4820 12 4 243 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP Variab
340. llowing rules NUMBER OF SWEEPS 0 NUMBER OF SWEEPS 1 NUMBER OF SWEEPS gt 1 Note TRACE menu IEC IEEE bus command Example Continuous averaging is carried out over 10 measured values No averaging is carried out Averaging is carried out over the set number of measured values This setting is equivalent to the setting of the sweep count in the SWE COUN lt value gt The mean power of a GSM burst with 0 dBm nominal power at 800 MHz is to be measured PRESET FREQ CENTER 800 MHz SPAN ZERO SPAN AMPT 0 dBm BW RES BW MANUAL 30 kHz SWEEP SWEEPTIME MANUAL 600 us TRIG VIDEO 50 MEAS TIME DOM POWER Set the FSP to the default setting Set the center frequency to 800 MHz Select time domain display span 0 Hz Set the reference level to 0 dBm Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz in line with the requirements of the GSM standard Set the sweep time to 600 us Use the video signal as trigger source Call the menu for the measurement functions Select power measurement in the time domain The FSP calculates the mean power from the points of the whole trace The submenu for configuration of the power measurement is opened MEAN is already switched on LIMITS START LIMIT 250 us STOP LIMIT 500 us Note Activate the measurement limitation of the time domain of the power Set the start of the power measurement at 250 us Set the end of th
341. low SORT MODE V by NAME by DATE TIME by EXTENSION 3 15 E 2 Setting Parameters FSP Editing of Numeric Parameters The entry of numeric values is always made in a data entry window which is displayed automatically after selection of the parameter _ Head line with 7 parameter 10 2457535 GHz Editing line with parameter value and unit START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE E Status and message line The headline indicates the name of the instrument parameter which has been selected The entry is made in the editing line Subsequent to calling the entry window the current parameter value including the unit is displayed left justified in the editing line Status and error messages which refer to the current entry are displayed in the third and optionally fourth line Note Entry windows may be represented transparent cf DISPLAY CONFIG DISPLAY menu Entry of a numeric value Call data entry window cf selection of parameters The editing line indicates the current value Example center frequency frequency sweep mode FREQ y EE Entry via number keys gt Enter required value via number keys Example s o ms md 200 MHz Entry via cursor keys Cursor or gt until obtaining the required value Example 1093 4820 12 3 16 E 2 FSP Terminating the entry Correcting the entry 1093 4820 12 Setting Parameters Entry roll key gt Rot
342. lts Averaging which is often performed to stabilize the measurement results leads to a too low level indication and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be measured 4 94 E 3 FSP Setting the Channel Configuration MEAS CP ACP CONFIG submenu 1093 4820 12 NO OF ADJ CHAN ACP LIMIT CHECK CHANNEL BANDWIDTH ADJ CHAN BANDWIDTH ADJ CHAN SPACING EDIT ACP LIMIT CP ACP CHAN PWR HZ SELECT TRACE ADJUST SETTINGS So A Analyzer MEAS The CP ACP CONFIG softkey opens a submenu for configuration of the channel power and adjacent channel power measurement independent from the offered standards The channel configuration consists of the number of adjacent channels to be measured the channel bandwidth CHANNEL BANDWIDTH the bandwidth of the adjacent channels ADJ CHANNEL BANDWIDTH and the distance of the adjacent channels from the center frequency of the transmission channel ADJ CHANNEL SPACING Limit values can additionally be specified for the adjacent channel power ACP LIMIT CHECK and EDIT LIMITS which are checked for compliance during the measurement The NO OF ADJ CHAN softkey activates the entry of the number n of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Numbers from 0 to 3 can be
343. m Context the network administrator Print Options Overview Add Form Feed Notify When Printed Print Banner Login Script Options Run Login Script Login in the Network The user automatically logs into the network with the registration in the operating system As a prerequisite the user name and the password must be identical under Windows NT and on the network Disabling the Autologin Mechanism Upon delivery the instrument is configured for automatic login into Windows NT This mechanism must be disabled if the instrument is operated in a network since the default user name instrument and the password normally are not identical to those of the network account To disable the autologin mechanism proceed as follows gt Open the NT start menu by means of lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt gt Select the menu item RUN A dialog box opens gt Enter the command D USER NO_AUTOLOGIN REG into the dialog box and confirm with ENTER The autologin mechanism is disabled When the instrument is rebooted a prompt for user name and password will appear before the instrument firmware is started Reenabling the Autologin Mechanism To enable the autologin mechanism again proceed as follows gt Open the NT start menu by means of lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt gt Select the menu item RUN A dialog box opens gt Enter the command D USER AUTOLOGIN REG into the dialog box and confirm with
344. m Ref 20 dBm Att 10 dB SWT 100 ms 200 0100 MHz resulting limit ali M E 7 W absolute threshold 71 g 2 JN see9e9229099099909999 relative limit line Im Mi iM a lii M i ih my TA Center 200 MHz 10 kHz Span 100 kHz The preset value is at 200 dBm The field is displayed if the value RELATIVE is entered in the field Y SCALING IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 UPP THR 30 dBm or CALC LIM3 LOW THR 30 dBm Comment Enter comments Comments are arbitrary however they must be less than 41 characters long IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 COMM Upper limit 4 126 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Limit Lines The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table columns Time Frequency and Limit dB Which table columns appear depends upon the Domain selection in the table heading The desired frequency time data points are entered in ascending order two repeated frequencies time values are permitted IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT DATA 1MHz 3MHz 30MHz CALC LIM3 UPP DATA 10 0 0 CALC LIM3 LOW DATA 30 40 40 The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor position where a new data point may be entered However during the entry of new values it is necessary to observe an ascending order for frequency time IEC IEEE bus command Th
345. mand DISP WIND TRAC Y RPOS 10PCT 4 208 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration The REF VALUE softkey activates the input of a level difference which is assigned to the reference line In the default setting the reference line corresponds to a level difference of 0 dB If e g a 10 dB attenuator pad is inserted between DUT and analyzer input between recording of the calibration data and normalization the trace will be shifted down by 10 dB By entering a REF VALUE of 10 dB the reference line for difference formation can also be shifted down by 10 dB so that it will again coincide with the trace see Fig 4 31 REF POSITIOH RBU 3 MHz 50 x 18 MHz Ref dBm Att dB SUT 1s TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN SCREEN B Fig 4 31 Measurement with REF VALUE 10dB and REF VALUE POSITION 50 1093 4820 12 4 209 E 3 o Configuration External Generator Control FSP After the reference line has been shifted by entering REF VALUE 10 dB departures from the nominal value can be displayed with high resolution e g 1 dB Div The absolute measured values are still displayed in the above example 1 dB below nominal value reference line 11 dB attenuation REF URLUE RBH 3 MHz 10 dB UBU 18 MHz CAL Ref 0 Att 30 dB SUT 100 ms TRANS Start 9 kHz 299 9991 Stop 3 GHz SPECTRUN _HETUORK SCREEN
346. mand MMEM LOAD user defined color settings configuration for hardcopy output Settings of tracking generator only with option tracking generator Settings of tracking generator only with option All Limit Lines all limit lines All Traces all traces which are not blanked Source Cal Data correction data for tracking generator only with option tracking generator 1093 4820 12 4 167 E 3 Recalling Data Sets d 1 1093 4820 12 FSP The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first line left column of the table An entry is selected by pressing the ENTER key in the desired line The selection is cleared by pressing the key again IEC IEEE command Current Settings MMEM SEL HWS ON All Limit Lines MMEM SEL LIN ALL ON All Traces MMEM SEL TRAC ON Source Cal Data MMEM SEL SCD ON The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the table IEC IEEE command MMEM SEL ALL The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data subset to be saved and outputs DEFAULT in the TEMS field of the SAVE RECALL DATA SET table IEC IEEE command MMEM SEL DEF The DATA SET LIST softkey opens the DATA SET LIST CONTENTS table In addition the DATA SET CLEAR and DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkeys are displayed DATA SET 1151 DATA SET CONTENTS DATASET 1 CONTENTS DATASET 2 DATASET 3 CURRENT SETTINGS ALL LIMIT LINES ALL TRACE
347. marked limit line and saves it under a new name In this way a new limit line can be easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line The name can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window max of 8 characters IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 COPY 2 or CALC LIM3 COPY GSM2 The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line Before deletion a message appears requesting confirmation IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 DEL The X OFFSET softkey horizontally shifts a limit line which has been specified for relative frequencies or times X axis The softkey opens an entry window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via the rollkey Note This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute values for the X axis IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT OFFS 10kHz The Y OFFSET softkey vertically shifts a limit line which has relative values for the Y axis levels or linear units such as volt The softkey opens an entry window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via the rollkey Note This softkey does not have any effect on limit lines that represent absolute values for the Y axis IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 LOW OFFS 3dB CALC LIM3 UPP OFFS 3dB 4 122 E 3 FSP Limit Lines Entry and Editing of Limit Lines 200 MHz A limit line is characterized by its name the assignment of domain frequency o
348. marker is set to the maximum value peak of the active trace which has the lowest number 1 to 3 In case a marker is already located there it will be set to the frequency of the next lowest level next peak When the split screen display mode is active the marker will be placed in the active window A marker can only be enabled when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible 1093 4820 12 4 58 E 3 FSP MKR Analyzer If a trace is turned off the corresponding markers and marker functions are also deactivated If the trace is switched on again VIEW CLR WRITE the markers along with coupled functions will be restored to their original positions provided the markers have not been used on another trace The gt softkey places the marker a new trace The trace is selected via a data entry field Only those traces can be selected which are visible on the screen in the same window Example Three traces are presented on the screen The marker is always on Trace 1 on switching on MKR gt TRACE 2 lt gt The marker jumps to Trace 2 but remains pre vious frequency or time MKR gt TRACE lt gt The marker jumps to Trace 3 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC DELT TRAC 1 Frequency Measurement with the Frequency Counter In order to accurately determine the frequency of a signal FSP is equipped with a frequency counter which m
349. max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No additional evaluation is performed by the video filter IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID RAT 10 This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu The RBW VBW NOISE 10 softkey sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID RAT 0 1 This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu The RBW VBW MANUAL softkey activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID RAT 10 This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu The SPAN RBW AUTO 50 softkey sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 50 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the FSP IEC IEEE bus command BAND RAT 0 02 This setting is only effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu 4 23 E 3 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time FSP 1093 4820 12 The SPAN RBW MANUAL softkey activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The span resolution bandwidth
350. me applications Printer name HP DeskJet 660C lt Back Cancel 1093 4820 12 1 26 FSP gt Select LPT1 The selection is marked by a tick gt Click Next The available printer drivers are displayed The left hand selection table indicates the manufacturers and the right hand one the available printer drivers gt Mark HP in selection table Manufacturers and HP DeskJet 660 in selection table Printers Note If the required type of output device is not included in the list the driver has not yet been installed In this case click on button HAVE DISK A message box requesting to insert a disk with the corresponding printer driver will be displayed Insert the disk press OK and select the required printer driver After installation Service Pack 5 must be re installed see section Installing Windows NT Software gt Click Next The entry field for the printer name is displayed gt The printer name can be modified in the entry field Printer name max 60 characters If one or more printers are already installed a query is displayed in this window to ask if the printer last installed as default printer should be selected for the Windows NT applications Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as default printer The default selection is E 3 FSP Connecting an Output Device Add Printer Wizard gt Click Next Indicate
351. ment changes to 1024x768 pixels Only a section of the total screen is then displayed on the LC display which will automatically be shifted on mouse moves In order to obtain a complete display of the user interface an external monitor is to be plugged into the corresponding connector at the rear panel Prior to performing the resolution change the user is prompted for confirmation whether the required monitor is connected Switching off the front panel display restores the original screen resolution Key assignment Button labels largely correspond to those of the front panel keys The rotation function of the rotary knob is assigned to the KNOB LEFT and KNOB buttons the press function ENTER to PRESS The labels of the softkey buttons F1 to F9 and of the hotkey buttons C F1 to C F7 indicate that the keys can be operated directly by means of the corresponding function keys F1 to F9 or lt CTRL gt F1 to lt CTRL gt F7 of a PS 2 keyboard IEC IEEE bus command SYST DISP FPAN ON 1093 4820 12 4 154 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup System Information The SYSTEM INFO softkey opens a submenu in which detailed information on module data device statistics and system messages is displayed SETUP menu gt HARDWARE INFO STATISTICS SYSTEM MESSAGES CLEAR ALL MESSAGES aen epa on des 1093 4820 12 4
352. menu 1093 4820 12 b SAVE SELECT ITEMS BECALI ENABLE ALL ITEMS EDIT MAKE DISABLE COMMENT DIRECTORY ALL ITEMS ITEMS TO FORMAT SAVE RCL DISK DATA SET LIST RENAME SET SORT MODE CLEAR DATA SET CLEAR ALL COPY STARTUP DELETE RECALL FILE DEFAULT MANAGER CONFIG 4 165 E 3 FSP Recalling Data Sets 1093 4820 12 The SAVE softkey activates table SAVE DATA SET The data set is stored by pressing the ENTER key SAVE DATA SET PATH D USER CONFIG ITEMS DEFAULT EDIT NAME DATASET1_ The SAVE DATA SET table contains the entry fields for editing the data set Name name of data set The name can be entered with or without drive name and directory the drive name and directory if available are then taken over in the PATH field The extension of the data name is ignored Path directory in which the data set will be saved Items indicates whether the default selection of the data subset DEFAULT or a_ user defined selection SELECTED will be saved Comment Commentary regarding the data set IEC IEEE command MMEM STOR STAT 1 a test02 The RECALL softkey activates the entry of the path in which the data set is located The data set is recalled by pressing the ENTER key RECALL DATA SET ITEMS DEFAULT DATASET1_ The RECALL DATA
353. menu for configuring BANDWIDTH the measurement The softkey is available only in frequency domain span gt 0 and is highlighted when the measurement is switched on CHANNEL In the spectrum display mode this measurement determines BANDWIDTH the bandwidth that contains a predefined percentage of the power of the displayed frequency range POWER BANDWIDTH softkey The occupied bandwidth is output in the marker display field and marked on the trace by temporary markers Note The softkey is only available in frequency domain span gt 0 ADJUST The measurement is performed on the trace REF LVL with marker 1 In order to evaluate another ADJUST trace marker 1 must be placed on another trace SETTINGS by means of SELECT TRACE in the MKR menu 4 OCCUP BW The OCCUP BW ON OFF softkey switches measurement of the occupied bandwidth or off IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW OFF The POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens the entry of the percentage of power related to the total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth percentage of total power The valid range of values is 10 to 99 9 IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW BWID 99PCT The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens an input window for defining the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel For measurements in line with a specifi
354. mes The instrument automatically adds the extension TDF to all transducer factors that are saved If an existing name is changed the factor stored under the previous name is maintained and is not automatically overwritten by the new version The old factor can be deleted later on using the DELETE function This makes it possible to copy factors IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN SEL lt name gt 1093 4820 12 4 143 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Unit Selection of unit The unit of the transducer factor is selected from a box that is activated by pressing ENTER dB dBm dBpA dBpA m V The default setting is dB IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN UNIT lt string gt Interpolation Selection of interpolation Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be performed between the frequency reference values of the table The ENTER key allows the user to select LIN or LOG toggle function IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN SCAL LIN LOG The following diagrams show the effect that interpolation has on the calculated trace Fig 4 1 Linear frequency axis and linear interpolation Fig 4 2 Logarithmic frequency axis and interpolation Comment Entry of comment Any comment with a maximum length of 50 characters can be entered IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN COMM string 1093 482
355. mmand DISP CMAP DEF1 DISP CMAP DEF2 4 134 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Display The DISPLAY PWR SAVE softkey is used to switch on off the power save mode for the display and to enter the time for the power save fuction to respond After the elapse of this time the display is completely switched off ie including backlighting Note This mode is recommended for saving the TFT display especially when the instrument is exclusively operated in remote control The power save mode is configured as follows e The first keystroke activates the power save mode and opens the editor for the response time POWER SAVE TIMEOUT The response time is entered in minutes between 1 and 6 minutes and is confirmed by ENTER e The power save mode is deactivated by pressing the key again On leaving the menu with the power save mode in the activated state the softkey is highlighted in color on returning to the menu and opens again the editor for the response time Pressing again the key switches off the power save mode IEC IEEE bus command DISP PSAV ON DISP PSAV HOLD 15 The SELECT OBJECT softkey activates the SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT table with which a graphics element can be selected After selection the brightness tint and saturation of the selected element can be changed using the softkeys of the same name The color changes by means of the PREDEFINED COLORS softkey can be seen immediately on the display screen SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT
356. modulation is continuous i e not only active at the marker position IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM ON 1093 4820 12 4 72 E 3 FSP Selecting the Trace Menu MKR FCTN 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MKR FCTN The softkeys AM and FM are selector switches one of which only may be active at a time They set the desired demodulation mode FM or AM Default setting is AM IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC D CALC MARK1 FUNC D EL 5 5 The MKR STOP TIME softkey defines the stop time for demodulation at the marker s The FSP interrupts the frequency sweep at the marker position and activates the demodulation for the duration of the stop time see also MKR DEMOD ON OFF In the time domain span 0 the demodulation is continuously active irrespective of the stop time set IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM HOLD 3s The CONT DEMOD softkey switches the continuous demodulation in the frequency domain If the sweep time is long enough the set frequency range can be monitored acoustically IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM CONT ON The gt softkey sets the active marker to different traces Only those traces can be selected which are visible on the screen in the same The function of the softkey is identical to that of the softkey with the same name in the MKR gt menu Example Three traces are display
357. mple 2 10 Measuring the Spectra of complex 2 13 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth 2 13 Measurement Example Resolving two signals with a level of 30 dBm each and a frequency difference of 30 2 2 14 Intermodulation 24 1100 tenerent eren 2 17 Measurement Example Measuring the FSP s intrinsic intermodulation distance 2 19 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of 2 23 Measurement example Measuring the level of the internal reference generator low S N FatioS ES Ry 2 25 Noise Measurements 2 28 Measuring noise power 2 28 Measurement example Measuring the intrinsic noise power density of the FSP at 1 GHz and calculating the FSP s noise figure 2 28 Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission 2 31 Measurement Example Measuring the intrinsic noise of the FSP at 1 GHzina 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth with the channel power
358. n itr enden 1 16 ENABle register part sese 5 19 Enabling the front panel keys 2 4 4 Enhancement 5 2 002 0000000000000000 nee 3 ENTER key aue eerte regedit 3 11 Entry E leoi EET 3 11 activate 3 14 3 23 COM CCH icc cei I RECTE EXER En 3 17 temminala z ir eee epp 3 11 Error messages 4 158 9 1 Error variable 4 244 Error queue quety sese renean 5 32 ESC Ky arcte t e epe 3 11 ESE event status enable 5 22 ESR event status 5 22 5 19 Event status enable register ESE 5 22 Event status register 5 22 10 2 E 3 FSP EXT enhancement 3 6 EXT TRIGGER GATE input 4 32 8 12 External generator esses 4 203 External noise SOUICe eese 4 138 F Fast power 2 4 92 PET filler is Field first or second File os secco ee p HE D rename E10 a Filter band filters ede AUR 1 Firmware update Firmware Fixed filt r 4 sus nette ri Reto bi beers FM demodulation FM modu
359. n Noise source Input Display Tracking Generator only with option FSP B9 External Generator 1 2 only with option FSP B10 Preamplifier only with option FSP B25 El Attenuator only with option FSP B25 1093 4820 12 Settings Spectrum 1 5 GHz 3 5 GHz 6 8 GHz 15 GHz 0 1 center frequency 3 GHz 7 GHz 13 6 GHz 30 GHz auto 10 dB 20 dBm 100 dB log dBm auto auto 3 MHz auto 10 MHz off 50 0 33 cont FSP3 7 13 30 FSP3 7 13 30 free run clr write blank auto peak off 0 Hz 0 dB 100 abs on off RF Full screen active screen A off off off off 4 2 E 2 FSP Mode Selection Mode Selection HOTKEY Bar For fast mode selection FSP has seven keys the so called HOTKEYs which can be allocated depending on the options installed on the instrument SPECTRUM SCREEN B NN Two keys reserved for the basic model The SPECTRUM hotkey sets FSP to spectrum analysis mode The spectrum analysis mode is the basic setting of FSP IEC IEEE bus command INST SEL SAN With the SCREEN A SCREEN B hotkey two different settings can be selected on the FSP in the FULL SCREEN mode In the SPLIT SCREEN mode the key switches between active diagram A and B The key designation indicates the diagram which has been activated by means of the key The currently active wind
360. n A and screen B are opened after switch on of signal analysis the analyzer mode is only set for the display activated for entry marked at the top right corner of diagram For the other display the previous settings remain valid Data acquisition and display of measured values is sequential first in the upper and then in the lower display 1093 4820 12 4 5 1 Frequency and Span Analyzer FSP Frequency and Span Selection FREQ Key The FREQ key is used to specify the frequency axis of the active display window The frequency axis can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and the span SPAN key With two windows SPLIT SCREEN displayed at the same time the input data always refer to the window selected in the SYSTEM DISPLAY menu After pressing one of the CENTER START or STOP softkeys the value of the corresponding parameter can be defined in an input window FREQ menu Span lt gt 0 Span 0 gt gt TRACK m sean ov TRACK STEPSIZEM 0 5 SPAN 0 5 RBW B E TRACK ee X RBW THRESHOLD SELECT START CENTER CENTER TRACE STOP MARKER MARKER MANUAL MANUAL FREQUENCY OFFSET SIGNAL TRACK A a N AT LI The CENTER softkey opens the window for manually entering the ce
361. n of Printers IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 HCOP SYST SYST SYST HCOP DEV LANG GDI COMM PRIN ENUM F IRS COMM PRIN ENUM N EXT COMM PRIN SEL DEST SYST COMM 4 176 P Deskjet 660 on PRIN E 3 FSP COMMENT SCREEN HCOPY side menu 1093 4820 12 Measurement Documentation Print to File In this line directing the printout to the printer OFF or to a file ON is selected For printout to a file the user is prompted to enter a file name on starting the print Selecting the type of printer automatically sets this parameter to the value which corresponds to a standard mode with this output device IEC IEEE bus command HCOP DEST SYST COMM PRIN or HCOP DEST SYST COMM MMEM Orientation In this line the print format of the output page is set to either vertical PORTRAIT or horizontal LANDSCAPE IEC IEEE bus command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT The COLORS softkey gives access to the submenu where the colors for the printout can be selected see section Selection of Printer Colors IEC IEEE bus command The COMMENT SCHEEN A or B softkey opens an entry field in which a comment of two lines 60 characters per line can be entered for screen A or B If the user enters more than 60 characters the excess characters appear on the second line on the print out At any point a manual line feed can be forced by en
362. ndications in the Diagram 3 3 misc 3 8 Split SCr88n uc en e i tec i edet eat itp p En ect tle ect deor 3 8 softkey Area ute Alan mete et e uetus 3 9 Hotkey Area eate e teet e re vp et i eee ite bee ee a See ient 3 10 Calling and Changing the 3 10 Setting Parameltels 2 E EI 3 11 Numeric 22 pe ne ee cles 3 11 Roll key and Cursor 3 12 Selection and Setting of Parameters via Keys or 3 13 Editing of Numeric 3 16 3 19 Editing with External Keyboard 2 3 19 Editing wih Help Une Editor 2e tete en eet 3 20 Selection and Setting of Parameters via Tables sse 3 21 OV ORV i CW rec CLR 3 24 FREQUENG PM EL EET 3 24 LS ca UAE cr m 3 25 t re ue te de m eU RE PERRO sete 3 26 aire TEES 3 27 lt gt EMT 3 28
363. ndow is opened This window guides the user through the printer driver installation gt Click Network printer server and then Next A list of selectable printers is displayed E 3 Connecting an Output Device FSP gt Mark the desired printer and select it with OK Printer Cancel gt Confirm the following request for the Shared Pile Expand by Defaut __Heb installation of a suitable printer driver with OK lt 3 Microsoft Windows Network Netware or Compatible Network The list of printer drivers is displayed The manufacturers are listed in the window at the left the available printer drivers at the right Printer Information Description Status Documents Waiting gt Select the manufacturer in the i Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Manufacturers window and then the installation disk click Have Disk If pour printer is not listed consult your printer driver in the Printers window printer documentation for compatible printer Note If the required type of output device is not i EE included in the list the driver has not yet HP DeskJet 850C been installed In this case click on button E HAVE DISK A message box requesting to HP DeskJet Portable insert a disk with the corresponding printer mu driver will be displayed Insert the disk press RE OK and select the required printer
364. ned and entered in a list with 50 entries max The order of SEARCH the entries is defined by the SORT MODE SORT MODE FREQ sorting in ascending order of frequency values FREQ LEVEY see screenshot if span 0 the entries are sorted in ascending order of time values LEVEL sorting according to level EXCURSION 4 LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD PEAK LIST OFF The search range can be restricted by means of the LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT and THRESHOLD softkeys The definition of the peak values can be modified using the PEAK EXCURSION softkey The MKR gt TRACE softkey in the main menu is used to select the trace for searching peak values Opening the list performs a single search at the end of the sweep The NEW SEARCH softkey triggers a new sweep determines the peak values of the trace at the end of the sweep and enters them in the list Use the PEAK LIST OFF key to delete the list from the screen IEC IEEE bus commands INIT CONT OFF CALC MARK TRAC 1 CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT X INIT WAI CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y CALC MARK FUNC FPE X 1093 4820 12 4 70 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR FCTN 1093 4820 12 SORT MODE LEVEL E ad 3 25 2 The NEW SEARCH softkey starts a new peak search and enters the results in the peak list IEC IEEE bus commands INIT WAI CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 CALC FUNC FPE COUN CALC MARK FUNC
365. nel bandwidth Note If the frequency span is large in comparison with the channel bandwidth or the adjacent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are available per channel This reduces the accuracy of the 4 93 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy We therefore strongly recommend that the formulas mentioned be taken into consideration when selecting the frequency span Resolution bandwidth RBW Video bandwidth VBW Detector 1093 4820 12 To ensure both an acceptable measurement speed and the required selection to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 1 and 4 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighbourhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level For standard NADC IS136 this is not possible for example since the spectrum of the transmit signal penetrates into
366. ng are replaced by zeroes 1093 4820 12 4 139 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP SETUP menu TRANSDUCER The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu where FACTOR defined transducer factors can be edited or new transducer factors can be entered A table with the available factors is displayed and the active transducer can be selected from this list mE NEW 1 EDIT g DELETE VIEW TRANSDUCER PAGE UP PAGE DOWN TRANSDUCER FACTOR Name Unit V Cable_1 dB HK116 dBuV m HL223 dBuV m The TRANSDUCER FACTOR table contains all the defined factors with name and unit If the number of transducer factors defined exceeds the number of lines available in the table the user has to scroll through the table Only one factor at a time can be activated A tick next to the name indicates that the transducer is active The TRANSDUCER FACTOR softkey places the scrollbar on the position of the active transducer factor If a transducer factor is not active the scrollbar is placed on the first line of the table IEC IEEE bus command CORR TRAN SEL lt name gt CORR TRAN ON OFF 1093 4820 12 4 140 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Configuration Setup The NEW and EDIT softkeys give access to the submenu for editing and generating transducer factors The DELETE softkey deletes the factor that is marked To prevent inadvertent deleting the instrument outputs a
367. nnections This printer will be managed by My Computer All settings will be managed and configured on this computer ennt Connect to a printer on another machine ll settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator lt Back Cancel Printer Shared Printers Iv Expand by Default Help Microsoft Windows Network x NetWare or Compatible Network Cancel Description Status Documents Waiting Printer Information 1093 4820 12 4 237 LAN Interface gt Press the HCOPY key The HCOPY menu opens gt Press the NEXT key The HCOPY submenu opens gt Press the INSTALL PRINTER softkey The printer window opens gt Double click on the line Add Printer The Add Printer Wizard window opens It guides through the following printer driver installation gt Click on Network Printer server first and then on Next The choice of enabled printers appears gt Mark the printer and select using OK gt Confirm the following prompt to install a suitable printer driver using OK The choice of printer drivers appears The left table shows the manufacturers the right one the available printer drivers E 3 LAN Interface FSP gt Mark the manufacturer in H 252 Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an Manufacturers table and then the printer installat
368. nnel at the set center frequency is examined The bandwidth of the channel is fixed by means of the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH function The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier It is searched when the function is activated and is marked by means of the REFERENCE FIXED marker The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the signal level obtained C N and in the case of a C N measurement it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth There are two methods for measuring the carrier noise ratio 1 The carrier is outside the channel examined In this case it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth The carrier noise ratio is displayed on the screen 2 The carrier is inside the channel examined In this case the measurement must be performed in two steps First the reference measurement is performed with the carrier being active This is done by switching on either the C N or the C N measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run Then the carrier is switched off so that only the noise of the test setup is active in the channel The carrier noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent measurement has been completed The ADJUST SETTINGS function facilitates the selection of the frequency span appropriate for the channel bandwidth it automatically sets the SPAN to approx 4 x channel bandwidth The RMS detector is enabled when the power measurement is switched on T
369. noise sufficiently approx gt 15 dB it is easy to check by changing the RF attenuation whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are generated internally by the spectrum analyzer If a harmonic originates from the DUT its level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB Only the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation If the harmonic is exclusively generated by the spectrum analyzer the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB or is lost in noise If both the DUT and the spectrum analyzer contribute to the harmonic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller 1093 4820 12 2 6 E 2 FSP Measurement of Harmonics Measuring Harmonics with Frequency Sweeps There are advantages in performing harmonic measurements with a single frequency sweep provided that the harmonic distance is in a way that a resolution bandwidth can be selected which is wide enough to give an acceptably short sweep time Measurement Example Measuring the distance between fundamental wave and the 274 and 39 harmonics of the internal reference signal 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to the default settings Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Switch on the internal reference generator Press the SETUP key Press the softkeys SERVICE INPUT CAL The internal 128 MHz reference generator is now on The FSP s RF input is switched off 3 Set the start
370. ns that support this format e g WinWord The factory settings for DEVICE 2 are Clipboard In this setting the printout is copied to the Windows NT clipboard Most of Windows applications support the clipboard The clipboard contents can be directly inserted into a document via EDIT PASTE Table 1 1 Factory settings for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2in the HCOPY menu Selection in the DEVICE 1 Settings DEVICE 2 Settings configuration table Output Device DEVICE LANGUAGE WINDOWS METAFILE CLIPBOARD 1093 4820 12 1 24 E 3 FSP Connecting an Output Device In the following example a HP DeskJet 660C printer is connected to the LPT interface and configured as DEVICE2 for hardcopies of the screen contents Switch off the FSP Connect the printer to interface LPT Switch on both FSP and printer Select the printer driver under Windows NT gt Press key combination lt CTRL gt lt ESC gt The Windows NT start menu is displayed Printers lel Ea aes gt In the Start menu press Setting and then Printers The printer window is opened Double click symbol Add Printer The Add Printer Wizard window is opened This window leads through the following printer driver installation 1 object s selected Add Printer Wizard gt Click My computer and then Next This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer i j j connections wil be manger D The available printer ports are displayed
371. nt can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network by means of the LAN Interface Option FSP B16 This allows data transmission via the network and the use of network printers The network card is able to handle both 10 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3 and 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u For more details see section LAN Interface Option FSP B16 SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu The CONFIGURE NETWORK softkey opens the dialog box with the network settings Network 21x Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings g Windows uses the following information to identify your Gass computer on the network You may change the name for this computer and the workgroup or domain that it will appear in Computer Name ANALYZER Workgroup WORKGROUP OK Pressing the key for the first time installs the Windows NT network support see section Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network in the manual for LAN Interface FSP B16 If the softkey is pressed again later the existing network configuration can be changed after selecting the corresponding configuration folder After pressing the Change button the computer name and the work group on the Identification folder can be adapted to network requirements Notes keyboard with trackball or mouse instead is required for the installation configuration of the network support The softkey is only available with built
372. nter frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency is for the frequency domain span gt 0 minspan 2 lt f f minspan 2 center and for the time domain span 0 0 Hz lt center lt fmax foenter center frequency minspan smallest selectable span gt 0 Hz 10 Hz fmax max frequency IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT 100MHz 1093 4820 12 4 6 E 1 FSP Analyzer Frequency and Span 1093 4820 12 The CF STEPSIZE softkey opens a submenu for setting the step size of the center frequency The step size can be coupled to the span frequency domain or the resolution bandwidth time domain or it can be manually set to a fixed value The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection keys The softkeys are presented according to the selected domain frequency or time Softkeys in frequency domain dod d o o The 0 1 SPAN softkey sets the step size for the center frequency entry to 1096 of the span IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT The 0 5 SPAN softkey sets the step size for the center frequency entry to 50 of the span IEC IEEE bus command FREQ CENT FREQ CENT LINK SPAN LINK FACT 50PCT The X SPAN softkey allows the factor defining the center frequency step size to be entered as of the span IEC IEEE bus command FREQ
373. nts which can not be selected are indicated by a different color 1093 4820 12 3 21 E 2 Setting Parameters FSP gt Press the ENTER key or the The parameter the setting has been selected The selected parameter can be edited the way described below 3 Editing the marked parameter NAME COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECK TRACE MARGIN GSM22UP v off 1 0 dB V LP1GHz on 2 0 dB Y LP1GHz M off 1 0 dB i MIL461A off 2 checkmark 1 10 3 a Toggling between two If an element of a table can be switched on and off only the states unit keys are used to toggle between these two states Press one of the unit keys The table element is switched on and provided with a checkmark V Press one of the unit keys once more The table element is switched off or gt Press one of the unit keys The table element is switched on on is displayed gt Press one of the unit keys once more The table element is switched off off is displayed 1093 4820 12 3 22 E 2 FSP Setting Parameters b Opening a data entry If a table entry consists of an alpha numeric value selection window of the latter causes the corresponding entry window to be opened Note For numeric or alphanumeric instrument para meters the editing operation may be started by entering any number or letter on the front panel or on the external keyboard In this case the data entry window is open
374. o n detector lt gt mode trace math Example I pK CLRWR 12 Instrument settings Enhancement Labels 1093 4820 12 OVLD is indicated when the input mixer is overloaded gt Increase input attenuation IFOVL is indicated when overload occurs in the IF signal path after the input mixer Increase reference level MSG is indicated if a failure has occurred which impair correct measurement The exact error message can be queried in the menu SETUP SERVICE INFO The display disappears after the cause for the error has been eliminated LOUNL is indicated when an error occurs in the frequency processing of the instrument OVEN is indicated when the crystal oscillator option FSP B4 has not yet reached its operating temperature This indication vanishes after a few minutes after switch on Every active measurement curve trace BLANK is allocated a trace info of two or three lines at the left of the diagram The trace info has the same colour as the measurement curve n trace number 1 3 detector selected detector AP AUTOPEAK detector PK MAX PEAK detector MIN PEAK detector SA SAMPLE detector AV AVERAGE detector RM RMS detector QP QUASIPEAK detector indicates that the selected detector does not correspond to that of the automatic coupling mode indication of sweep mode CLRWR CLEAR WRITE MAXH MAX HOLD MINH MIN HOLD AVG AVERAGE VIEW VIEW Trace math trace math
375. o called marker values are displayed in the marker field The marker info field at the upper right of the display shows the marker location here frequency the level and the currently selected trace T1 The MKR key calls a menu that contains all marker and delta marker standard functions If no marker is active MARKER 1 will be enabled and a peak search on the trace carried out Otherwise the data entry for the marker activated last is opened MKR menu REF FIXED _ REF FXD MARKER ON OFF gt REF POIN MARKER 2 REF POIN LVL OFFSET MARKER 3 REF POIN FREQUENCY CNT RESOL 10 kHz REF POIN TIME MARKER NORM DELTA PEAK SEARCH SIGNAL CNT RESOL COUNT 100 Hz REFERENCE CNT RESOL FIXED 1 10 Hz MARKER CNT RESOL 200 1 Hz ALL MARKER CNT RESOL rm OFF 0 1 Hz lt 1093 4820 12 4 57 E 3 MKR Analyzer FSP mem d The MARKER 1 2 3 4 softkey selects the corresponding marker and acti vates it MARKER 1 is always the normal marker After they have been switched on MARKER 4 MARKERS 2 to 4 are delta markers that refer to MARKER 1 These mark ers
376. of Limit ooo tet i e e e P e ied 4 123 Display LINES Em 4 128 Configuration of Screen Display DISP 4 131 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration SETUP 4 137 External Reference ertt ete nat n pra tao hd 4 138 External Noise SOUE sic acta ert vats el Relea Ee 4 138 1093 4820 12 4 1 E 3 Contents Instrument Functions FSP RE Preamplifiers aie Wath eds ee We a ee ee 4 139 lt lt ESTNE 4 139 Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer 6 5 4 139 Entry and Editing of Transducer 4 142 Programming the Interface Configuration and Time 4 146 Selecting the IEC IEEE Bus Address sss 4 146 Serial Interface 4 147 Setting Date and TMS as RR 4 150 Configuration of Network Settings with Option FSP B16 only 4 151 Enabling Firmware 4 153 Emulation of the Instrument Front Panel essen 4 154 System Information enu eee Eae au Iaceo Ege pun Magee 4 155 Display of Module
377. of test results All the diagrams traces markers marker lists limit lines etc are printed out as long as they are displayed on the screen All the softkeys tables and open data entry fields are not printed out Moreover comments title date and time are output at the bottom margin of the printout IEC IEEE bus command HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IM The PRINT TRACE softkey starts the output of all curves visible on the display screen without auxiliary information Specifically no markers or display lines are printed IEC IEEE bus command HCOP ITEM WIND TRAC STAT ON HCOP IM The PRINT TABLE softkey starts the output of all tables and info lists visible on the display screen without the measurement diagrams and other information lying behind IEC IEEE bus command HCOP ITEM WIND TABL STAT ON HCOP IM 4 174 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Measurement Documentation The HARDCOPY ABORT softkey aborts the printout IEC IEEE bus command ABOR The DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 softkey determines the active output device Table HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS is simultaneously opened for the configuration of the two possible devices The selection bar marks the selected line of the table HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS Devicel WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File YES Orientation Device2 CLIPBOARD Print to File Orientation Device 1 2 In this lines the selection of the output device language for De
378. of the instrument is described in Chapters 5 6 and 7 The operation of the FSP is menu controlled via keys hotkeys and softkeys The setting of the instrument and test parameters in the menus is made either directly via softkeys or by entry of values in entry fields and by selection in tables The operating mode and the screen mode is selected via the hotkeys If required data entry windows and tables are superimposed on the screen The Screen The screen informs continuously on the results and parameters of the selected measuring functions It shows the assignment of the softkeys and menus which are required for setting the measuring parameters The display of test results the softkey labeling and the type of menu depend on the selected measuring function The screen is subdivided into three areas hotkey area softkey area Diagramm area MARKER 2001 RBH 38 kHz Marker 1 T1 1 MHz 100 kHz 30 42 dBm Ref 30 5 dBm 2 5 ms 2 MHz Att 180 dB 1 SHT 40 1 AP CLRHR L 50 60 9 i 1 13 Center 2 MHz Fig 3 1 Span 1 MHz 190 kHz Subdivision of screen 1093 4820 12 3 1 E 2 The Screen Diagram area Softkey area Hotkey area FSP This area contains the measuring diagrams and other measured value information as well as the parameters and status information w
379. oftkey sets the reference level to the current marker level IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC REF Example A spectrum is displayed with a large span after PRESET A signal off the center is to be examined in detail PRESET FSP is set to the default setting MKR gt MARKER 1 is switched on and automatically jumps to the largest signal of the trace CENTER MKR FREQ The center frequency is set to the marker frequency The span is adapted in such a way that the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency is not exceeded REF LEVEL MKR LVL The reference level is set to the measured marker level SPAN The span can for example be reduced using the rollkey The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower peak value on the trace The search direction is defined in the NEXT MODE submenu see below IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK MAX NEXT CALC DELT MAX NEXT 4 75 E 3 MKR gt Analyzer 1093 4820 12 ABSOLUTE PEAK MI SEARCH EXT LEFT 5 EXT RIGHT FSP The NEXT MODE softkey opens a sub menu for definition of the search direction for NEXT PEAK and NEXT MIN The softkeys are selection switches ie only one of them can be active at any one time The ABSOLUTE PEAK MIN softkey defines that the next higher maximum o
380. ompared at the same sweep time Repeatability can be influenced by the selected sweep time The results become much more stable if long sweep times are selected Since the amplitude distribution is different in different channels part of the modulation spectrum falls within the first adjacent channel the repeatability depends on the spacing of the measured channel from the transmit channel Fig 2 41 below shows the standard deviation of results in the different channels as a function of the selected sweep time The standard deviation for the various sweep times was recorded using a signal generator as a source With real DUTs the amplitude distributions in adjacent channels may be different so that the standard deviation could differ from that shown in Fig 2 41 To evaluate the correct measuring time for time critical measurements at a given standard deviation the standard deviation of the ACP values at the output of the real DUT must be determined NADC Repeatability 0 8 Adj Channels Channels 0 6 0 4 Standard Deviation Tx Channel 0 2 0 10 100 000 Sweep Time ms Fig 2 41 Standard deviation of the results of Fast ACP measurement as a function of selected sweep time evaluated from 100 measurements per sweep time 1093 4820 12 2 50 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurement Example 3
381. on 095 1000 Sheet 18 13 14 15 Electrostatics the connectors may dam age the equipment For the safe handling and operation of the equipment appropriate measures against electrostatics should be im plemented The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft lint free dustcloth Never use solvents such as thinners acetone and similar things as they may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Any additional safety instructions given in this manual are also to be observed FSP Manuals Contents of Manuals for Spectrum Analyzer FSP Operating Manual FSP The operating manual describes the following models and options of spectrum analyzer FSP Option FSP B3 Option FSP B4 Option FSP B9 FSP3 9 kHz to 3 GHz FSP7 9 kHz to 7 GHz FSP13 9kHzto 13 6 GHz FSP30 9 kHz to 30 GHz audio demodulator reference oscillator tracking generator Option FSP B10 external generator control Option FSP B16 LAN interface Option FSP B25 electronic attenuator This operating manual contains information about the technical data of the instrument the setup functions and about how to put the instrument into operation It informs about the operating concept and controls as well as about the operation of the FSP via the menus and via remote control Typical measurement tasks for the FSP are explained using the functions offered by the menus and a selec tion of program examples Additionally the
382. onitor After that the measurement screen is displayed on both the external monitor and the instrument Further settings are not necessary 1093 4820 12 1 22 E 3 FSP Connecting an Output Device Connecting a Printing Device Caution The printing device may be connected only when the instrument is switched off STANDBY Note When installing printer drivers that are not pre installed on the instrument the operator is requested to insert the disk with the new driver into drive A After installation the Service Pack needs to be re installed see section Installing Windows NT Software The instrument is prepared for connecting printing devices to two different interfaces in order to create hard copies of the display screen The DEVICE table in menu HCOPY DEVICET1 2 indicates the available selection of installed printing devices see also Chapter 4 section Documentation of Test Results The interface connectors are located on the rear panel f Ch 500009009001 e WY Chapter 8 contains the interface descriptions of the connectors After connection of the printing device to the appropriate interface connector the interface needs to be configured the printer driver has to be installed and assigned to an interface 1 Connecting keyboard and mouse For the installation and configuration of printer drivers on the FSP it is necessary to connect a keyboard to the front panel and a PS 2 mouse to the
383. ons Logo Screen title Date time Hardware settings Ref Offset Att EATT RBW VBW SWT 1093 4820 12 Indication of the logo Indication of selected screen title Indication of date and time Indication of the reference level Indication of the offset of reference level Indication of the set RF attenuation Indication of the set RF attenuation with electronic attenation only with option Electronic Attenuaror FSP B25 Indication of the set resolution bandwidth If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value of the automatic coupling a green asterisk is prefixed to the field Indication of the set video bandwidth If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value of the automatic coupling a green asterisk is prefixed to the field Indication of the set sweep time If the sweep time does not correspond to the value of the automatic coupling an asterisk is prefixed to the field The colour of the asterisk turns red as soon as the sweep time falls below the value of the automatic coupling 3 3 E 2 FSP The Screen Marker deltamarker Limit check X axis labelling 10 MHz DIV puc uc a puel Trigger 1 234 ms i Status information UNCAL 1093 4820 12 This label displays the position of the last selected marker or deltamarker in the x and y directions and the marker deltamarker index The square brackets contain the curve which the marker is
384. operating manual includes information about maintenance of the instrument and about error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument It is subdi vided into 9 chapters Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 1093 4820 12 describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well as all procedures required for putting the FSP into operation and integration into a test system gives an introduction to typical measurement tasks of the FSP which are ex plained step by step describes the operating principles the structure of the graphical interface and of fers a menu overview forms a reference for manual control of the FSP and contains a detailed descrip tion of all instrument functions and their application The chapter also lists the re mote control command corresponding to each instrument function describes the basics for programming the FSP command processing and the status reporting system lists all the remote control commands defined for the instrument At the end of the chapter a alphabetical list of commands and a table of softkeys with command assignment is given contains program examples for a number of typical applications of the FSP describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument s in terfaces gives a list of error messages that the
385. oppy disk command FORM ASC MMEM STOR TRAC 1 TRACE DAT The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the trace data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace n lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs eg MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator Note Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is therefore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using softkey DECIM SEP Example 4 46 E 3 FSP File header Data section of the file 1093 4820 12 File contents Type FSP3 Version 1 00 Date 01 Jul 1999 Mode Spectrum Center Freq 55000 Hz Freq Offset 0 Hz Span 90000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Ref Level 30 dBm Level Offset 0 dB Ref Position 75 y Axis LOG Level Range 100 dB RF Att 20 dB El Att 0 dB RBW 100000 Hz VBW 30000 Hz SWT 0 005 s Trace Mode AVERAGE Detector SAMPLE Sweep Count 20 Trace 1 5 x Unit Hz y Unit dBm Values 501 10000 10 3 15 7
386. or off The corresponding marker becomes the NORMAL marker During noise measurement the noise power density is measured at the position of the marker In the time domain mode all points of the trace are used to determine the noise power density When measurements are performed in the frequency domain two points to the right and left of the marker are used for the measurement to obtain a stable result The noise power density is indicated in the marker field With a logarithmic amplitude units dBm dBmV dBmuV dBA the noise power density is output in dBm Hz i e as level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW With linear amplitude units V A W the noise voltage density is evaluated in uV VHz the noise current density in LA VHz or the noise power density in nuW Hz The following settings have to be made to ensure that the power density measurement yields correct values Detector Sample or RMS Video bandwidth lt 0 1 x resolution bandwidth with sample detector corresponds to RBW VBW NOISE gt x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector corresponds to RBW VBW SINE In the default setting the FSP uses the sample detector for the noise function With the sample detector the trace can additionally be set to AVERAGE to stabilize the measured values With RMS detector used trace averaging must not be used since in this case it produces too low noise levels which cannot be corrected Instead the sweep time can be incre
387. or permanently installed units without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective de vices the supply circuit must be fused such as to provide suitable protection for the users and equipment Prior to switching on the unit it must be ensured that the nominal voltage set on the unit matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the unit may have to be changed accordingly Units of protection class with disconnectible AC supply cable and appliance connector may be operated only from a power socket with earthing contact and with the PE conductor con nected 095 1000 Sheet 17 It is not permissible to interrupt the PE conduc tor intentionally neither in the incoming cable nor on the unit itself as this may cause the unit to become electrically hazardous Any extension lines or multiple socket outlets used must be checked for compliance with rele vant safety standards at regular intervals If the unit has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suit able for providing disconnection from the AC supply If units without power switches are integrated in racks or systems a disconnecting
388. or the selected power measurement see below All instrument settings relevant for a power measurement within a specific frequency range channel bandwidth are optimized for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing Frequency span The frequency span has to cover at least all channels to be considered When measuring the channel power 2 x channel bandwidth measurement margin is set as span The setting of the span during adjacent channel power measurement is dependent on the channel spacing and channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 with the largest distance from the transmission channel 2 x channel spacing channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding channel spacing and channel bandwidth Resolution bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth e Video bandwidth VBW gt 3 x RBW Detector RMS detector Trace math and trace averaging functions are switched off The reference level is not influenced by ADJUST SETTINGS It can be separately adjusted with ADJUST REF LVL The adjustment is carried out only once if necessary the instrument settings can be changed later IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH PRES ACP CPOW OBW 4 98 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MEAS The ACP LIMIT CHECK softkey switches the limit check for the ACP measurement on and off IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM AC
389. ore no longer used although it appears in the abbreviated form in the name of keys CAL CAL menu The CAL key opens a menu with the available functions for recording displaying and activating the data for self alignment CAL TOTAL gt SETUR CAL ABORT CAL CORR OFF CAL RESULTS PAGE UP PAGE DOWN The CAL TOTAL softkey starts the recording of correction data of the instrument If the correction data recording has failed or if the correction values are deactivated CAL CORR OFF softkey the status field indicates Ex IEC IEEE bus command CAL The CAL ABORT softkey interrupts the recording of correction data and restores the last complete correction data set IEC IEEE bus command CAL ABOR 1093 4820 12 4 55 E 3 Calibration FSP CAL CORR The CAL CORR ON OFF softkey switches the calibration data on off OFF ON The status message depends upon the results of total calibration OFF The message UNCAL appears in the status line IEC IEEE bus command CAL STAT ON The CAL RESULTS softkey calls the CALIBRATION RESULTS table which shows the correction data found during calibration The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information date and time of last record of correction valuesKorrekturwertaufnahme overall results of correction value record list of found correction values according
390. ormat void WINAPI RSDLLSwapBytes void far pArray const long size const long count C format Unix void RSDLLSwapBytes void pArray const long size const long count Parameter pArray Array in which modifications are made size Size of a single element in pArray count Number of elements in pArray Example RSDLLSwapBytes Buffer sizeof float ibcntl sizeof float This function swaps the display of various elements from Big Endian to Little Endian and vice versa It is expected that a coherent storage area of elements of the same file type size byte is transferred to pArray This function has no effect on Intel platforms Different types of processor architecture store data in different byte sequences For example Intel processors store data in the reverse order of Motorola processors Comparison of byte sequences Big Endian Motorola processors Most significant byte at The most significant byte is at the left end network standard least significant address of the word Little Endian Intel processors Least significant byte at The most significant byte is at the right least significant address end of the word 1093 4820 12 4 250 E 3 FSP RSIB Interface Programming via the RSIB Interface Visual Basic Programming hints Access to the functions of the RSIB DLL To create Visual Basic control applications the file RSIB BAS must be added to a project for 16 bit Basic programs and the file RSIB32 BAS for 32 bit Basic
391. ors or amplifiers at the output connector of the tracking generator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or during data entry The valid range is 200 dB to 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the tracking generator The default setting is 0 dB Offsets lt gt 0 will display the enhancement label LVL IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW OFFS 10dB 1093 4820 12 4 189 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP Transmission Measurement This measurement will yield the transmission characteristics of a two port network The built in tracking generator serves as a Signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the FSP is fed from the output of the DUT OOO Te Fig 4 16 Test setup for transmission measurement A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup eg frequency response of connecting cables Calibration of Transmission Measurement NETWORK menu The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu comprising SOURCE gt 2 of the calibration functions for the transmission and en reflection measurement CAL REFL SHORT The calibration of the refle
392. ossible value with option el attenuator is 20 dB IEC IEEE bus command INP GAIN ODB Note The PREAMP softkey is only available with option EL ATTENUATOR FSP B25 Transducer Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu enabling the user to activate or deactivate defined transducer factors to generate new transducer factors or to edit existing ones A table with the transducer factors defined is displayed As soon as a transducer is activated the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs The unit cannot be changed in the AMPT menu since the FSP and the transducer used are regarded as one measuring instrument Only if the transducer has the unit dB will the unit originally set on the FSP be maintained and can be changed transducer factor is active the remark TDF appears in the Enhancement Labels column After all transducers have been switched off the FSP returns to the unit that was used before a transducer was activated In the analyzer mode an active transducer for a sweep is calculated once in advance for every point displayed and is added to the result of the level measurement during the sweep If the sweep range changes the correction values are calculated again If several measured values are combined only one value is taken into consideration If the active transducer factor is not defined for the entire sweep range the values missi
393. outines in order to determine the signal power from IF envelope measurements These factors are valid if and only if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct Apart from this common method the FSP also has a true power detector i e an RMS detector It correctly displays the power of the test signal within the selected resolution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution without additional correction factors being required With an absolute measurement uncertainty of lt 0 5 dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of lt 0 2 dB each with a confidence level of 95 the FSP comes close to being a true power meter There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power with a spectrum analyzer The IBW method Integration Bandwidth Method in which the spectrum analyzer measures with a resolution bandwidth that is less than the channel bandwidth and integrates the level values of the trace versus the channel bandwidth This method is described in the section on noise measurements Measurement using a channel filter In this case the spectrum analyzer makes measurements in the time domain using an IF filter that corresponds to the channel bandwidth The power is measured at the output of the IF filter Until now this method has not been used for spectrum analyzers because channel filters were not available and the resolution bandwidths optimized for the sweep did not have a sufficient
394. ow is marked by A or the right of the diagram IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND lt 1 2 gt SEL The meaning of the other keys is described in the operating manuals of the various options 1093 4820 12 4 3 1 Return to manual control FSP Return to Manual Control LOCAL Menu 1093 4820 12 The menu LOCAL is displayed on switching the instrument to remote control mode At the same time the HOTKEY bar is blanked out and all keys are disabled except the PRESET key The diagram traces and display fields are then blanked out they can be activated using the remote control command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON The menu contains only one softkey the LOCAL key The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote to manual control with the assumption that the remote controller has not previously set the LOCAL LOCKOUT function A change in the control mode consists of Enabling the Front Panel Keys Returning to manual mode enables all inactive keys and turns on the hotkey menu The soft key menu which is displayed is the main menu of the current mode Inserting the measurement diagrams The blanked diagrams traces and display fields are inserted Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE If at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey the synchronisation mechanism via OPC OPC or is active the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and
395. p Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one time slot is switched on Measurement using the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 MHz the span to 0 Hz and the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 0 Hz or press the ZEROSPAN softkey 3 Set the FSP reference level to 10 dBm signal generator level 10 dB gt Press the AMPT key and enter 10 dBm 4 Set the sweep time to 1 ms gt Press the SWEEP key and enter 1 ms The FSP shows the GSM burst running across the display 1093 4820 12 2 61 E 2 Time Domain Measurements FSP 5 Trigger on the rising edge of the burst using the video trigger gt Press the TRIG key gt Press the VIDEO softkey and enter 70 The FSP displays a stable curve with the GSM burst at the beginning of the trace The trigger level is shown as a horizontal line labeled with the absolute level for the trigger threshold 6 Configure the power measurement in the time domain gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the TIME DOM POWER 3 softkey gt Set the LIMITS softkey to ON gt Press the START LIMIT softkey gt Place the vertical line on the start of the burst by turning the spinwheel clockwise gt Press the STOP LIMIT softkey gt Place the second
396. p count in the trace menu is equivalent to the setting in the sweep menu IEC IEEE bus command SWE COUN 64 See following Section Selection of Detector See following Section Mathematical Functions for Traces 4 44 E 3 FSP TRACE NEXT menu AVG MODE LIN 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Traces The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min peak detector FSP saves for each sweep the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to MIN PEAK In this way the minimum value of a signal can be determined over several sweeps This function is useful eg for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed by the min hold function whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and restarts the min hold function IEC IEEE bus command DISP WIND TRAC MODE MINH The AVG MODE LOG LIN softkey selects logarithmic or linear averaging for the logarithmic level display mode At the same time the difference calculation is switched between linear and logarithmic in submenu TRACE MATH IEC IEEE bus command CALC MATH AVER MODE LIN With logarithmic averaging the dB values of the display voltage are averaged or substracted from each other with trace mathematical functions With linear averaging the level values
397. pectral distribution boundaries on the display screen which are not to be exceeded They indicate for example the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a unit under test UUT For transmission of information in TDMA e g GSM the amplitude of the bursts in a timeslot must adhere to a curve which must fall within a specified tolerance band The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line Then the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits GO NOGO test The instrument supports limit lines with a maximum of 50 data points 8 of the limit lines stored in the instrument can be used simultaneously and activated in the split screen mode either in Screen A Screen B or in the two windows The number of limit lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the flashdisk used For each limit line the following characteristics must be defined e The name of the limit line The limit line data are stored under this name and can be examined in the table LIMIT LINES e The domain in which the limit line is to be used Here a distinction is made between the time domain span 0 Hz and the frequency domain span gt 0 Hz e The reference of the interpolation points to the X axis The limit line may be specified either for absolute frequencies or times or for frequencies which are related to the set center
398. perational parameters which were active just prior to the last power off STANDBY or AC power OFF or were with STARTUP RECALL see Chapter 4 Saving and Recalling Data Sets A lithium battery is used to supply power to the CMOS RAM As soon as the battery is discharged expected life time is approx 5 years any data stored in CMOS RAM will be lost In this case the factory standard setup is loaded at power on For changing batteries please contact your local service representative Functional Test After turning on the AC power the FSP will display the following message on the display screen Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Analyzer BIOS Vx y After appearance of the above message a selftest of the digital hardware is performed Subsequently the Windows NT controller boots and the measurement screen will appear The system self alignment is activated via CAL key CAL TOTAL softkey The individual results of the self alignment PASSED FAILED can be displayed in the CAL menu CAL RESULTS With the aid of the built in selftest functions SETUP key SERVICE SELFTEST soft keys the functional integrity of the instrument can be verified and or defective modules can be localized 1093 4820 12 1 18 E 3 FSP Windows NT Windows NT Caution The drivers and programs used under Windows NT are adapted to the measuring instrument In order to prevent the instrument functions from damage the settings should only be modifie
399. programs D R_S INSTR RSIB so that the functions of the RSIB DLL or RSIB32 DLL can be accessed Generating a response buffer Prior to calling the functions RSDLLibrd and RSDLLilrd a string of sufficient length must be generated This is possible either by defining the string or using the command Space Generating a string of the length 100 Dim Response as String 100 Dim Response String Response 100 If a response is to be output as a string from the measuring instrument the appended blanks can be removed using the Visual Basic Function RTrim Example Response 100 Call RSDLLibrd ud Response ibsta iberr ibcntl Response RTrim Response Output of Response Reading out trace data in real format Using the function declarations in the file RSIB BAS or RSIB32 BAS the responses of the device can be assigned to one string only If the data are to be read into an array with float values the header and the useful data must be read out with separate function calls Example of a header 4 2004 Length of data e g Prefix for Number of digits of 501 pixels binary data the following length 4 bytes pixel indication In order to enable the trace data to be directly read into a float array a special function declaration must be created Declare Function RSDLLilrdTraceReal Lib rsib32 dll Alias RSDLLilrd ByVal ud Rd As Single ByVal Cnt amp ibsta iberr ibcntl
400. pt being the 3rd order intercept in dBm and P the level of a carrier in dBm With an intermodulation distance of 60 dB and an input level Pw of 20 dBm the following 3 order intercept is obtained TOI 60 dBm 2 20 dBm 10 dBm 1093 4820 12 2 18 E 2 FSP Measuring the Spectra of complex Signals Measurement Example Measuring the FSP s intrinsic intermodulation distance To measure the intrinsic intermodulation distance use the test setup in Fig 2 8 Signal generator settings e g SMIQ Level Frequency Signal generator 1 10 dBm 999 9 MHz Signal generator 2 10 dBm 1000 1 MHz Measurement using the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default settings gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set center frequency to 1 GHz and the frequency span to 1 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 1 MHz 3 the reference level 10 dBm and HF attenuation to 0 dB gt Press the AMPT key and enter 70 dBm gt Press the HF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 0 dB By reducing the RF attenuation to 0 dB the level to the FSP input mixer is increased Therefore 3 order intermodulation products are displayed 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz gt Press the BWkey gt Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey and enter 10 kHz By reducing the bandwidth the noise is further reduced and the intermodulation products can be cl
401. ption Tracking Generator FSP B9 is fitted For detailed information see section Option Tracking Generator FSP B9 The SOURCE POWER softkey activates the input of the generator output level The value range depends on the selected generator See table of chapter Configuration of the External Generator Ist neben der Option Externe Generatorsteuerung FSP B10 auch die Option Mitlaufgenerator FSP B9 installiert so ver ndert der Softkey wahlweise den Ausgangspegel des internen Mitlaufgenerators oder des externen Generators je nachdem welcher Generator gerade eingeschaltet ist Die Grundeinstellung des Ausgangspegels ist 20 dBm IEC IEEE bus command SOUR EXT POW 20dBm 1093 4820 12 4 204 E 3 FSP External Generator Control Configuration Transmission Measurement The transmission characteristic of a two port network is measured The external generator serves as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the analyser is fed from the output of the DUT UO wj GEN OUTPUT Fig 4 27 Test setup for transmission measurement A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup eg frequency response of connecting cables Calibration of Transmission Measurement NETWORK menu The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu comprising CAL iuit had no p TRANS the c
402. r free transmission each transmitter must be conforming to the specified parameters These include among others e the output power e occupied bandwidth i e the bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power and e the power dissipation allowed in the adjacent channels Additionally the menu contains functions to determine the modulation depth of AM modulated signals and to measure the 3 order intercept point The measurements and the corresponding settings are selected in the MEAS menu MEAS menu The MEAS key opens the menu to select and set the power measurement C gt POWER 38 MEAS The following measurements can be selected CHAN PWR Power in time domain TIME DOM POWER ACP i e Channel power adjacentchannel power OCCUPIED frequency domain CHAN PWR ACP BANDWIDTHS e Occupied bandwidth OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH SIGNAL Carrier noise ratio C N STATISTIC Amplitude probability distribution SIGNAL STATISTICS es e Modulation depth MODULATION DEPTH 39 order intercept TOI above measurements are carried out alternatively TOI SELECT MARKER 1093 4820 12 4 82 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS Power Measurement in Time Domain With the aid of the power measurement function the FSP determines the power of the signal in the
403. r 1 section Computer Function Installing the Windows NT Software 1093 4820 12 1 32 E 3 FSP R amp S Analyzer Interface Programs Documents Settings Find Run amp on Windows NT Workstation Shut Down Windows NT Service Pack Setup x Welcome to Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 5 Setup Before installing this Service Pack we recommend that you close all other applications backup your system and update your Emergency Repair diskette When Service Pack Setup completes you will need to shutdown and restart Windows NT To continue please read the following license agreement and indicate your acceptance SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY The Microsoft Corporation Microsoft operating system components which you are about to install including any online or electronic documentation 08 COMPONENTS are subject to the terms and xl IV Accept the License Agreement must accept before installing the Service Pack Windows NT Service Pack Setup Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 5 installation is complete You must restart your computer for the Service Pack update to take effect If you install any additional Windows NT components from the original Windows NT CD you should then reinstall Service Pack 5 to ensure the new components are updated 1093 4820 12 1 33 Inst
404. r minimum is searched for on the whole trace IEC Bus Befehle CALC MARK MAX NEXT CALC DELT MAX NEXT CALC MARK MIN NEXT CALC DELT MIN NEXT The SEARCH NEXT LEFT softkey defines that the next higher maximum or minimum on the left of the active marker is searched for ie only frequencies or time values smaller than the current marker frequency or time are taken into account IEC Bus Befehle CALC MARK MAX LEFT CALC DELT MAX LEFT CALC MARK MIN LEFT CALC DELT MIN LEFT The SEARCH NEXT RIGHT softkey defines that the the next higher maximum or minimum on the right of the active marker is searched for ie only frequencies or time values higher than the current marker frequency or time are taken into account IEC Bus Befehle CALC MARK MAX RIGH CALC DELT MAX RIGH CALC MARK MIN RIGH CALC DELT MIN RIGH 4 76 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR gt LEFT The SEARCH LIMITS softkey limits the search range for maxi LIMIT mum or minimum search The softkey switches to a submenu in which the search range limits can be set in the x and y direction RIGHT LIMIT THRESHOLD SEARCH LIM OFF The LEFT LIMIT und RIGHT LIMIT softkeys define the two vertical lines F1 and F2 in the frequency domain span gt 0 and T1 T2 in the time domain span 0 The search is performed between these lines in the frequency and time domain If only one line is enabled line F
405. r time the scaling in absolute or relative times or frequencies the vertical unit the interpolation the vertical scaling the vertical threshold only with relative vertical scaling the margin the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit the data points for frequency time and level At the time of entry the FSP immediately checks that all limit lines are in accordance with certain guidelines These guidelines must be observed if specified operation is to be guaranteed e The frequencies times for each data point must be entered in ascending order however for any single frequency time two data points may be input vertical segment of a limit line The data points are allocated in order of ascending frequency time Gaps are not allowed If gaps are desired two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled The entered need not necessarily be selectable in FSP A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time domains The minimum frequency for a data point is 200 GHz the maximum frequency is 200 GHz For the time domain representation negative times may also be entered The valid range is 1000 s to 1000 s The minimum maximum value for a limit line is 200 dB to 200 dB for the logarithmic or 10 20 to 10 20 or 99 9 to 999 9 for the linear amplitude scales 1093 4820 12 4 123 E 3 Limit Lines FSP LINES EDIT LIMIT LINE menu The EDIT LIMIT LINE
406. ram waits with the function RSDLLWaitSrq Then the maximum is determined CALC MARK MAX and the level read out define MAX_RESP_LEN 100 short ibsta iberr unsigned long ibcntl short ud short char MaxPegel MAX RESP LEN char Spr Determine handle for instrument ud RSDLLibfind 89 10 38 97 amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl if instrument exists if ud gt 0 Set timeout for RSDLLWaitSrq to 10 seconds RSDLLibtmo ud 10 amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl Activate SRQ generation via event status register ESR and enable ESB bit in SRE register RSDLLibwrt ud ESE 1 SRE 32 amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl Set single sweep trigger sweep and use OPC to cause the generation of a service request at the end of the sweep RSDLLibwrt ud INIT CONT off INIT OPC amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl Wait for SRQ end of sweep RSDLLWaitSrq ud amp srq amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl Clear RQS MSS bit RSDLLibrsp ud amp spr amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl if sweep is terminated if srq then set marker to first maximum and query the level RSDLLibwrt ud amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl RSDLLilrd ud MaxPegel MAX RESP LEN amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl MaxPegel ibcntl 0
407. rd and can therefore also be installed if the system does not contain a network card or if an existing network card is to be removed from the instrument Note The MS Loopback Adapter must be installed prior to removing the network card from the instrument Otherwise there will be driver conflicts when the instrument is started the next time To install the MS Loopback Adapter proceed as follows Network HEI gt Press the SETUP key Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings ae The SETUP menu opens Windows use the Gad to jeny sou T tl h t qi compute andthe ot ihat wil Press the GENERAL SETUP key appear in ICI EE The GENERAL SETUP menu opens Workgroup WORKGROUP Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK softkey The configuration menu for the network settings Network opens gt Select the Adapters tab OK 1093 4820 12 4 228 E 3 FSP LAN Interface The active network driver is displayed Click on Aad The list indicating the available network drivers opens Select Network Adapter gt Click on MS Loopback Adapter and confirm with OK B The OEM options selection appears 89 Microdyne NE10 100 PCI Adapter 89 MicroGate SyncLink Intemet Adapter MS Loopback Adapter NCR StarLAN 16 4 Token Ring Adapter MS Loopback Adapter Card Setup gt Confirm Frame
408. re of amplifiers or of the FSP alone can be obtained from the noise power display Based on the known thermal noise power of a 50 Q resistor at room temperature 174 dBm 1Hz and the measured noise power Py ise the noise figure NF is obtained as follows NF Proise 174 g where g gain of DUT in dB Example The measured internal noise power of the FSP at an attenuation of 0 dB is found to be 153 dBm 1 Hz The noise figure of the FSP is obtained as follows NF 153 174 19 dB Note If noise power is measured at the output of an amplifier for example the sum of the internal noise power and the noise power at the output of the DUT is measured The noise power of the DUT can be obtained by subtracting the internal noise power from the total power subtraction of linear noise powers By means of the following diagram the noise level of the DUT can be estimated from the level difference between the total and the internal noise level 0 Correction factorindB 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Total power intrinsic noise power in dB Fig 2 25 Correction factor for measured noise power as a function of the ratio of total power to the intrinsic noise power of the spectrum analyzer 1093 4820 12 2 30 E 2 FSP Noise Measurements Measurement of Noise Power within a Transmission Channel Noise in
409. re switched on the other time slots are switched off The SMIQ is set as follows to generate the signal Press the PRESET key Press the FREQ key and enter 850 MHz Press the LEVEL key and enter 20 dBm Press the RETURN key Select DIGITAL STANDARD using the spinwheel and press the SELECT key Select NADC using the spinwheel and press the SELECT key Press the SELECT key Select ON using the spinwheel and press the SELECT key Press the RETURN key Keep turning the spinwheel until SAVE RECALL FRAME appears in the list and select the menu item SAVE RECALL FRAME using the SELECT key The cursor is set to GET PREDEFINED FRAME Press the SELECT key VV VV VV ON ON ON ON VON 1093 4820 12 2 51 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP gt Select UP1TCH using the spinwheel and press the SELECT key In the following operating sequence for the FSP it is assumed that steps 1 to 6 of the previous example example no 2 have already been performed 1 Configuring the Gated Sweep function on the FSP gt Press the TRIG key gt Press the GATED TRIGGER softkey gt Press the EXTERN softkey gt Press the GATE SETTINGS 2 softkey The FSP switches to time domain measurement so that the setting of the Gated Sweep parameters can be checked visually gt Press the ZOOM X AXIS softkey and enter 10 ms Exactly one TDMA burst will be displayed gt Press the GATE DELAY softkey and enter 2 ms or set the Gate Delay u
410. red bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as noncorrelated A measurement time of 20 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the FSP sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 1 dB 9996 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW HSP ON The FULL SIZE DIAGRAM softkey switches the diagram to full screen size IEC Bus Befehl The ADJUST REF LVL softkey adjusts the reference level of the FSP to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the FSP or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW ACH PRES RLEV For manual setting of the test parameters different from the settings made with ADJUST SETTINGS the following should be observed Frequency span 1093 4820 12 The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a measurement margin of 10 For channel power measurement the span is 1 1 x chan
411. rements max therefore be avoided With the RMS detector the whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each trace pixel The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each trace pixel using the following formula Ys i l a Paus sj linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per pixel of the trace PRMS power represented by a trace pixel 1093 4820 12 2 33 E 2 Noise Measurements FSP When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a trace pixel The number of A D converter values N used to calculate the power is defined by the sweep time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly proportional to the selected sweep time The RMS detector uses far more samples for power measurement than the sample detector especially if the sweep time is increased The measurement uncertainty can be reduced considerably In the default setting the FSP therefore uses the RMS detector to measure the channel power For both detectors sample and RMS the video bandwidth VBW must at least be three times the resolution bandwidth so that the peak values of the video voltage are not cut off by the video filter At smaller video bandwi
412. requency to 128 MHz and the frequency span to 100 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 128 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 100 MHz 1093 4820 12 2 25 E 2 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise FSP Set the HF attenuation to 60 dB to attenuate the input signal or to increase the intrinsic noise Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey and enter 60 dB The RF attenuation indicator is marked with an asterisk 60 dB to show that it is no longer coupled to the reference level The high input attenuation reduces the reference signal which can no longer be detected in noise RF 3 MHz dB UBU 10 MHz Ref 20 dem Att 60 dB 2 5 ns 20 dB Fig 2 24 Sinewave signal with low S N ratio The signal is measured with the autopeak detector and is completely swamped by the intrinsic noise of the spectrum analyzer 5 To suppress noise spikes the trace can be averaged Press the TRACE key Press the AVERAGE softkey The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the FSP automatically switches on the sample detector The RF signal therefore can be more clearly distinguished from noise RBW 3 MHz 18 MHz Att 60 dB SUT 2 5 ns Fig 2 22 sinewave signal with low S N ratio if the trace is averaged 1093 4820 12 2 26 E 2 FSP Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise 6 Instead of trace averaging a vi
413. res the noise power at the delta markers referred to 1 Hz bandwidth The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0 1 times the resolution bandwidth RBW The two settings are taken into account in the correction values used for the noise power measurement To obtain stable results two pixels on the right and the left of the respective delta marker position are taken for the measurement The procedure for determining the noise power is identical to the method used for the noise power measurement see NOISE softkey The measured noise level referred to 1 Hz bandwidth is subtracted from the carrier level at the reference marker MARKER 1 The measured values are displayed in the delta marker field in dBc Hz spacing in dB of the noise power from the carrier level in 1 Hz bandwidth If several delta markers are enabled only the value read by the active marker is shown in the marker field If several delta markers are active their measurement results are shown in the marker info field The reference value for the phase noise measurement can be defined with REF POINT LEVEL REF POINT FREQUENCY and REF POINT LVL OFFSET to differ from that of the reference marker IEC IEEE bus command E The PH NOISE ON OFF softkey switches on off the phase noise measurement Switching on is performed by means of the PHASE NOISE softkey and is only necessary when the phase noise measurement has been switched off in the submen
414. revious setting With this function a fast change between overview measurement FULL SPAN and detailed measurement manually set center frequency and span is possible Note Only values 0 Hz are restored i e a transition between time and frequency domain is not possible IEC IEEE bus command aae 4 12 E 1 FSP Analyzer Level Display RF Input Level Display Setting and RF Input Configuration AMPT Key The AMPT key is used to set the reference level the maximum level and the display range of the active window as well as the input impedance and the input attenuation of the RF input The AMPT key opens a menu for setting the reference level and the input attenuation of the active window The data entry for the reference level REF LEVEL softkey is opened automatically Further settings regarding level display and attenuation can be made in this menu Option FSP B25 Option FSP B25 AMPT REF LEVEL POSITION RANGE REF LEVEL LOG 100 dB OFFSET RANGE LOG MANUAL RANGE ID LINEAR rud REL UNIT EL ATTEN AUTO RF ATTEN EL ATTEN MANUAL ANUAL RF ATTEN AUTO Option gt NPUT 750 4 Ea dBmV dBpW VOLT AMPERE WATT The REF LEVEL softkey allows the reference level to be input in the currently active unit dBm dBuy
415. right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency ie the reference dataset is extended by constant values An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy This enhancement label is displayed at the right diagram border when normalization is switched on and a deviation from the reference setting occurs Three accuracy levels are defined Table 4 3 Measurement accuracy levels Accuracy Enhancement Reason Limitation label NOR No difference between reference setting and measurement Medium APX Change of the following settings approximation coupling RBW VBW SWT reference level RF attenuation start or stop frequency output level of tracking generator frequency offset of tracking generator detector max peak min peak sample etc Change of frequency max 501 points within the set sweep limits corresponds to a doubling of the span Aborted more than 500 extrapolated points within the current sweep limits in case of span normalization doubling Note At a reference level REF LEVEL of 10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same value the FSP operates without overrange reserve ie the FSP is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message OVLD for overload is displayed in the status line or the display range is exceeded clipping of th
416. riginal entry is kept erase the current entry in input field beginning of an input close message window status error and warning messages ENTER close the data input BACK erase last character input for uncompleted input restore previous input undo 1093 4820 12 1 1 E 2 FSP Front View WAP 0E XVIN Wo 0G INdNI 4H 08 1089170 Bab Front View Fig 1 1 E 2 1 2 1093 4820 12 FSP 1093 4820 12 data input GHz s The units keys close the data dBm V input and define the multipli cation factor for each basic unit MHz For dimension less or dBm mV alphanumeric inputs the units keys have weight 1 2 They behave in this case like the dB uV ENTER key Hz ns dB nV FREQ Set frequency axis SPAN Set span AMPT Setlevel indication and configure HF input MKR Select and set standard marker and delta marker functions MKR gt Change instrument settings via markers MKR Select further marker and delta FCTN marker functions BW Set resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time Set coupling of these parameters SWEEP Select sweep MEAS Select and set power measurements TRIG Set trigger sources 1 3 Front View see Chapter 3 see Chapter 4 see Chapter 4 E 2 BE
417. rmula for the obtainable harmonic distortion do in dB is derived from the straight line equations and the given intercept point d S H I P 1 do harmonic distortion PI mixer level dBm S H second harmonic intercept Note The mixer level is the applied RF level minus the set RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P4 at the 27 harmonic in dBm is 2 P S HI 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the spectrum analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 dB 1093 4820 12 2 5 E 2 Measurement of Harmonics FSP The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived 1 Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor 2 Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to just measure the harmonic ratio The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the intrinsic noise level of the receiver The level applied to the mixer according to 2 is Poise IP2 P 5 At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz noise level 143 dBm S H I 40 dBm this level is 51 5 dBm According to 1 a maximum measurable harmonic distortion of 91 5 dB minus a minimum S N ratio of 4 dB is obtained Hint If the harmonic emerges from
418. s obtained for the FM AF signal Result 10 5 dB this means a deviation of 100 kHz is obtained if the demodulator characteristic slope is 5 dB 100 kHz 1093 4820 12 2 41 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Fig 2 33 Demodulated FM signal 1093 4820 12 2 42 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks in the field of digital transmission for a spectrum analyzer with the necessary test routines While theoretically channel power could be measured at highest accuracy with a power meter its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adjacent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power The power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter A spectrum analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter because it displays the IF envelope voltage However it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a pure sinewave signal irrespective of the selected detector This calibration is not valid for non sinusoidal signals Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution the signal power within the selected resolution bandwidth can be obtained using correction factors These correction factors are normally used by the spectrum analyzer s internal power measurement r
419. s of the analyzer These are set with the PRESET key A complete listing of the standard settings can be found in chapter 4 section Preset settings of the FSP PRESET key Level and Frequency Measurements Measuring the frequency and level of a signal is one of the most common purposes for the use of a spectrum analyzer For unknown signals the spectrum analyzer default settings PRESET are a good starting point for the measurement If signal levels at the RF input are expected to be above 30 dBm 1 W a power attenuator must be connected to the RF input of the spectrum analyzer Please note that the total powar of all applied signals must be taken into account concerning this limit If a power attenuator is not used signal levels above 30 dBm can destroy the RF attenuator or the input mixer Measurement Example 1 Measuring Frequency and Level using Markers It is easy to measure the level and frequency of a sinewave carrier with the marker function At the marker position the FSP indicates the signal s amplitude and frequency The accuracy of the frequency measurement is determined by the FSP reference frequency the resolution of the marker frequency display and the resolution of the screen In the example the frequency of the 128 MHz internal reference generator is displayed using the marker 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default settings Press the PRESET key Connect the test signal to the RF INPUT on the instrumen
420. s only displayed correctly if the selected resolution bandwidth RBW is at least as wide as the frequency range which corresponds to a pixel in the trace At a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz this means that the maximum frequency display range is 501 MHz Average detector For each pixel of the trace the average detector outputs the average value of the linear IF envelope for the frequency range assigned to each test point It therefore measures the linear average noise The level of sinewave signals is only displayed correctly if the selected resolution bandwidth RBW is at least as wide as the frequency range which corresponds to a pixel in the trace At a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz this means the maximum frequency display range is 501 MHz Quasi peak detector The quasi peak detector is a peak detector for measurements with defined charge and discharge times These times are defined in CISPR 16 the standard for equipment used to measure EMI emissions Measurement example Measuring the level of the internal reference generator at low S N ratios The example shows the different factors influencing the S N ratio 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Switch on the internal reference generator Press the SETUP key Press the softkeys SERVICE INPUT CAL The internal 128 MHz reference generator is on The FSP s RF input is off 3 Set the center f
421. s the sweep time required for a particular span is proportional to Span RBW When using the FFT algorithm however the sweep time is proportional to Span RBW The video bandwidths are available in 1 3 10 steps between 1 Hz and 10 MHz They can be set in accordance with the resolution bandwidth The video filters serve for smoothing the displayed trace Video bandwidths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth average out noise peaks and pulsed signals so that only the signal average is displayed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is recommended to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly Note For analog and digital filters the FSP has overload reserves of different magnitude above the reference level Due to the LO breakthrough the overload display OVLD responds with digital filters with RBW 100 kHz as soon as the start frequency is selected lt 6 resolution bandwidth for RBW 100 kHz as soon as the start frequency is below 3 MHz 1093 4820 12 4 18 E 3 FSP Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time BW menu ANUAL SINE 1 3 VIDEO BW RBW VBW ANUAL PULSE 0 1 SWEEPT IME VBW MODE RBW ANUAL NOISE 10 RBW VBW MANUA
422. s within the selected channel The analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth When sweeping over the channel the channel filter is formed by the passband characteristics of the resolution bandwidth see Fig 2 27 Resolution filter Channel bandwith Fig 2 27 Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth 1093 4820 12 2 32 E 2 FSP Noise Measurements The following steps are performed e The linear power of all the trace pixels within the channel is calculated p 1019 where in power of the trace pixel i displayed level of trace point i e The powers of all trace pixels within the channel are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of trace pixels in the channel The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of the resolution filter RBW Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel bandwidth this method is also called the IBW method Integration Bandwidth method Bandwidth selection RBW For channel power measurements the resolution bandwidth RBW must be small compared to the channel bandwidth so that the channel bandwidth can be defined precisely If the resolution bandwidth which has been selected is too wide this may have a negative effect on the selectivity of the simulated channel filter and result in the power in the adjacent channel
423. screen and the channel power the level ratios of the adjacent channel powers and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen The individual channels are displayed as vertical lines on the graph 4 Set the optimum reference level and the RF attenuation for the applied signal level gt Press the ADJUST REF LEVEL softkey The FSP sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range The following figure shows the result of the measurement 1093 4820 12 2 55 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Fig 2 44 Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W CDMA uplink signal 5 Measuring adjacent channel power with the Fast ACP method gt Press the CP ACP CONFIG 2 softkey gt Set FAST ACP softkey to ON gt Press the ADJUST REF LVL softkey The FSP measures the power of the individual channels in the time domain A root raised cosine filter with the parameters a 0 22 and chip rate 4 096 Mcps receive filter for W CDMA is used as the channel filter Att 20 dB Fig 2 45 Measuring the adjacent channel power of a W CDMA signal with the Fast ACP method Note With W CDMA the FSP s dynamic range for adjacent channel measurements is limited by the 12 bit A D converter The greatest dynamic range is therefore obtained with the IBW method 1093 4820 12 2 56 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals
424. se source The PREAMP softkey switches on the RF preamplifier gain The PREAMP softkey switches on the RF preamplifier gain This softkey is only available with option EL ATTENUATOR FSP B25 The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu for entering the correction characteristics for transducers The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a submenu for all the general settings such as IEC IEEE bus address date and time as well as the configuration of the device interfaces FIRMWARE OPTIONS can be installed under this menu item The SYSTEM INFO softkey opens a submenu for displaying the hardware configuration of the instrument the switching cycle statistics and system messages 1093 4820 12 4 137 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP e The SERVICE softkey opens a submenu in which special device functions and system information can be selected for servicing The password required for service functions can be entered in this submenu e The SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey enables additional special settings for servicing and troubleshooting It is available after entering the corresponding password under the SERVICE softkey External Reference Oscillator The FSP can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as frequency standard from which all internal oscillators are derived A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as internal reference source In the default setting internal reference this frequency is available as output signal at rear pan
425. selectivity The method was reserved for special receivers optimized for a particular transmission method The FSP has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measurements These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting procedures 1093 4820 12 2 43 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Measurement Example 1 ACPR measurement on an IS95 CDMA Signal Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 850 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation CDMA IS 95 Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 850 MHz and frequency deviation to 4 MHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 850 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 10 dBm gt Press the AMPT key and enter 10 dBm 4 Configuring the adjacent channel power for the CDMA IS95 reverse link gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the CHAN PWR softkey gt Press the CP ACP STANDARD softkey From the list of standards select CDMA IS95A REV using the spinwheel or the cursor down key below the spinwheel and press ENTER The FSP sets the channel configuration according to the 1595 standard for mobile stations with 2 adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel The spectrum is displayed in the upper part of the screen the numeric values of the results and the channel configur
426. sic noise Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured For signals that are just above the intrinsic noise the accuracy of the level measurement is influenced by the intrinsic noise of the spectrum analyzer The displayed noise level of a spectrum analyzer depends on its noise figure the selected RF attenuation the selected reference level the selected resolution and video bandwidth and the detector The effect of the different parameters is explained in the following Impact of the RF attenuation setting The sensitivity of a spectrum analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenuation The highest sensitivity is obtained at a RF attenuation of 0 dB The FSP s RF attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps up to 70 dB 5 dB steps up to 75 dB with option Electronic Attenuator FSP B25 Each additional 10 dB step reduces the FSP s sensitivity by 10 dB i e the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB Impact of the reference level setting If the reference level is changed the FSP changes the gain on the last IF so that the voltage at the logarithmic amplifier and the A D converter is always the same for signal levels corresponding to the reference level This ensures that the dynamic range of the log amp or the A D converter is fully utilized Therefore the total gain of the signal path is low at high reference levels and the noise figure of the IF amplifier makes a substantial contribution to the total noise figure
427. signal at 800 MHz with 0 dBm level in line with 15136 PRESET Set the FSP to the default setting FREQ CENTER 800 MHz Set the center frequency to 800 MHz AMPT 0 dBm Set the reference level to 0 dBm MEAS Call the menu for the measurement functions CHAN PWR ACP Select the channel and adjacent channel power measurement function The measurement is performed with the default settings or a previously defined setting The submenu for setting the desired new configuration is opened CP ACP STANDARD select 15136 ENTER Select the NADC 15136 standard CP ACP CONFIG Call the submenu for configuration of the adjacent channel power measurement NO OF ADJ CHAN 2 ENTER Select two adjacent channels for the measurement i e the adjacent channel and the alternate channel are measured Greg Change to the main menu for channel power measurement ADJUST SETTINGS Set the optimum span resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VBW and detector automatically for the measurement The absolute channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels are displayed on the screen ADJUST REF LVL Set the reference level equal to the channel power measured 1093 4820 12 4 100 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS 2 Measurement with user specific channel configuration Measurement of the adjacent channel power ratio ACPR of an 1595 CDMA signal at 800 MHz level 0 dBm Similar to example 1 the setting can be simplifi
428. sing the spinwheel so that the burst is reliably detected gt Press the GATE LENGTH softkey and enter 5 ms or set the vertical line for the gate length using the spinwheel so that the burst is reliably detected Fig 2 42 Setting the parameters Gate Delay and Gate Length in time domain The time interval required to measure the spectrum is indicated by two vertical lines gt Press the PREV key The FSP now performs the ACP measurement only during the switch on phase of the TDMA burst The measurement is stopped during the switch off phase Note The selected sweep time is the net sweep time i e the time during which the FSP is actually measuring The complete frame of an 15136 signal takes 40 ms In the above example measurement only takes place for 2x5 ms within a frame The FSP is therefore only measuring for 25 of the frame duration The total measuring time is therefore four times that for the CW mode 1093 4820 12 2 52 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurement Example 4 Measuring the Transient Spectrum in Burst Mode with the Fast ACP function In addition to the modulation spectrum or adjacent channel power from the modulation of the RF carrier the spectrum or adjacent channel power generated by burst edges is also to be measured in TDMA systems The spectrum is a pulse spectrum and must be measured with the peak detector With the usual IBW method only the power of the continuously modulated signal can
429. sity APD and complementary PERCENT cumulative distribution CCDF be selected alternately Only one of the signal Y AXIS statistic functions can be switched on at a RES MAX VALUE time 45 In default mode all statistic functions are switched off SCALING g With a statistic function switched on the FSP is set into zero span mode automatically ADJUST ADJUST SETTINGS SETTINGS CONT MEAS SINGLE DEFAULT MEAS SETTINGS The FSP measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the resolution bandwidth set In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 times the resolution bandwidth The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage APD The APD ON OFF softkey switches on or off the amplitude probability OFF distribution function When the APD function is switched on the CCDF function is switched off automatically IEC IEEE bus command CALC STAT APD ON cc The CCDF ON OFF softkey switches on or off the complementary cumulative ON distribution function When the CCDF function is switched on the APD function is switched off automatically IEC IEEE bus command CALC STAT CCDF ON If the CCDF function is active the PERCENT MARKER softkey allows to position marker 1 by entering a probability value Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determ
430. softkey activates the input of the destination of the copy operation By entering a predefined disk drive e g C a file can also be copied to another storage medium The files directories selected by the cursor are copied after the input is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key IEC IEEE command D user set cfg a The DELETE softkey deletes the selected files To prevent accidental deletion of data confirmation by the user is requested IEC IEEE command MMEM DEL test01 hcp MMEM RDIR D user test aad 1093 4820 12 4 171 E 3 Measurement Documentation FSP Measurement Documentation HCOPY Key Note The installation of additional printers is described in chapter 1 section Installation and Configuration of Printers Pressing one of the softkeys PRINT in the HCOPY menu initiates the print job The printer parameters defined in the DEVICE SETTINGS menu are used for setting up the printer configuration All of the display items to be printed are written to the printer buffer Since the printer runs in the background the instrument may be operated immediately after pressing the PRINT softkey With PRINT SCREEN selected all the diagrams with traces and status displays are printed as they occur on the screen Softkeys open tables and data entry fields are not printed out Function PRINT TRACE allows printing out individual traces With PRINT TABLE tables can be printed out If
431. softkey determines the number of sweeps If 0 has been entered one sweep is performed IEC IEEE bus command INIT CONT OFF 1093 4820 12 4 28 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer Sweep The CONTINUE SGL SWEEP softkey repeats the number of sweeps set under SWEEP COUNT however without first deleting the trace This is particularly of interest when using the functions TRACE AVERAGE and MAXHOLD if previously recorded measurement results are to be taken into consideration for averaging maximum search If SGL SWEEP DISP OFF is active the screen is switched off also during repeated sweeps IEC IEEE bus command INIT CONM The SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkey activates the window for entering the sweep time manually see also BW menu IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIME 10s The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey activates the automatic selection of the sweep time as a function of the bandwidth of the resolution and video filters see also BW menu IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIME AUTO ON The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the window for the entry of the number of sweeps to be performed by FSP after a single sweep has been started If Trace Average Max Hold or Min Hold is activated this also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures Example TRACE1 MAX HOLD SWEEP SWEEP COUNT 10 ENTER SINGLE SWEEP FSP performs the Max Hold function over 10 sweeps The permissible range for the sweep co
432. solution bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth video bandwidth VBW 2 3 x RBW e detector RMS are optimized The reference level is not influenced by ADJUST SETTINGS For an optimum dynamic range it should be selected in a way that the signal maximum is close to the reference level The adjustment is carried out only once if necessary the instrument settings may be changed later IEC IEEE bus command SENS POW PRES OBW 4 104 E 3 FSP Analyzer MEAS Measurement principle For example the bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined The routine first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace In the next step the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the total power is reached Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency Then the FSP sums up the points from the left edge of the trace until 0 5 of the power is reached Auxiliary marker 2 is positioned at this point 99 of the power is now between the two markers The distance between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth which is displayed in the marker info field A prerequisite for correct measurement is that only the signal to be measured is visible on the screen of the FSP An additional signal would invalidate the measurement To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following settin
433. surement is carried out with the delta marker or delta markers This measurement corresponds to the NOISE function in the MARKER menu MKR The result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in level between the reference point and the noise power density The following possibilities can be selected on switching on PHASE NOISE 1 No marker enabled MARKER 1 is enabled set to peak PHASE NOISE MARKER 1 becomes the reference marker MARKER 2 the delta marker frequency frequency of the reference marker The delta marker is the active marker i e it can be moved with the rollkey or adjusted by entering numerals The PHASE NOISE function is switched on and the measured value is output 2 Markers are enabled previous marker configuration remains unchanged PHASE NOISE MARKER 1 becomes the reference marker If other markers are enabled they become delta markers and measure the phase noise at their respective positions If further markers are enabled during the phase noise measurement they automatically become delta markers and measure the phase noise at their respective positions When the phase noise measurement is switched off the marker configuration remains unchanged and the delta markers measure the relative level to the reference marker MARKER 1 4 67 E 3 FSP MKR FCTN Analyzer 1093 4820 12 PH NOISE ON The PHASE NOISE function measu
434. synchronisation is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting system Setting Bit 6 User Request of the Event Status Register With a corresponding configuration of the status reporting system this bit immediately causes the generation of a service request SRQ which is used to inform the control software that the user wishes to return to front panel control This information can be used e g to interrupt the control program so that the user can make necessary manual corrections to instrument settings This bit is set each time the LOCAL Softkey is pressed Note If the LOCAL LOCKOUT function is active in the remote control mode the front panel PRESET key is also disabled The LOCAL LOCKOUT state is left as soon as the process controller de activates the REN line or JIEC IEEE bus cable is disconnected from the instrument 44 E 1 FSP Spectrum Analyzer Mode Spectrum Analyzer Mode The analyzer mode is activated by pressing hotkey SPECTRUM see also Section Mode Selection The SPECTRUM hotkey selects the ANALYZER mode This mode is the default setting of the FSP The functions provided correspond to those of a conventional spectrum analyzer The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the test signal over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep time or for a fixed frequency displays the waveform of the video signal Note If two displays scree
435. t ud SENS FREQ STAR ibsta iberr ibcntl This function allows to send setting and query commands to the measuring instruments Whether the data is interpreted as a complete command can be set using the function RSDLLibeot RSDLLilwrt This function sends Cnt bytes to a device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLilwrt ByVal ud ByVal Wrt ByVal Cnt amp ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLilwrt short ud char far Wrt unsigned long Cnt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLilwrt short ud char Wrt unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle Wrt String sent to the GPIB parser Cnt Number of bytes sent to the device Example RSDLLilwrt ud 100 ibsta iberr 1 Like RSDLLibwrt this function sends data to a device The only difference is that binary data can be sent as well The length of the data is not determined by a zero terminated string but by the indication of Cnt bytes If the data is to be terminated with EOS 0Ah the EOS byte must be appended to the string 1093 4820 12 4 245 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP RSDLLibwrtf This function sends the contents of a file files to the device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLibwrtf ByVal ud ByVal file ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI
436. t accuracy of the instrument This is the reason why the softkeys HEF FREQUENCY CAL SIGNAL POWER and SAVE CHANGES can only be accessed after entering a password Firmware Update The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built in diskette drive The firmware update kit contains several diskettes The installation program is called in the SETUP menu SETUP side menu The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey starts the installation program and leads the user through the remaining steps of the update IEC IEEE bus command The firmware update is started as follows Insert disk 1 into the floppy drive Call SETUP side menu via SETUP NEXT Start the update via FIRMWARE UPDATE The RESTORE FIRMWARE softkey restores the previous firmware version IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 162 E 3 FSP Recalling Data Sets Saving and Recalling Data Sets FILE Key The FILE key calls the following functions Storage loading functions for storing SAVE instrument settings such as instrument configurations measurement display settings etc and measurement results from working memory to permanent storage media or to load RECALL stored data into working memory e Functions for management of storage media FILE MANAGER Included are among others functions for listing files formatting storage media copying and deleting renaming files The FSP is capable of internally storing complete instrument settings wit
437. t diagram border when normalization is switched on and a deviation from the reference setting occurs Three accuracy levels are defined Table 4 5 Measurement accuracy levels Accuracy Enhancement Reason Limitation label No difference between reference setting and measurement Medium APX Change of the following settings approximation coupling RBW VBW SWT reference level RF attenuation start or stop frequency output level of tracking generator frequency offset of tracking generator detector max peak min peak sample etc Change of frequency max 501 points within the set sweep limits corresponds to a doubling of the span Aborted more than 500 extrapolated points within the current sweep limits in case of span normalization doubling Note At a reference level REF LEVEL of 10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the same value the analyzer operates without overrange reserve ie the analyzer is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message OVLD for overload is displayed in the status line or the display range is exceeded clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border Overrange Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the tracking generator SOURCE POWER NETWORK menu e Increasing the reference level REF LEVEL AMPT menu 1093 4820 12 4 212 E 3 FSP External
438. t front panel 3 Switch on the internal reference generator Press the SETUP key The SETUP menu opens gt Press the SERVICE softkey The SETUP SERVICE menu opens gt Press the INPUT CAL softkey The internal reference generator is turned on The FSP s RF input is turned off 4 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz Press the FREQ key The entry field for the center frequency is displayed on the screen Enter 128 from the numeric keypad and terminate the entry with the MHz key 1093 4820 12 2 1 E 2 Level and Frequency Measurements FSP 5 Reduce the measurement frequency range SPAN to 1 MHz gt Press the SPAN key gt Enter 7 from the numeric keypad and terminate the entry with the MHz key Note If the SPAN is changed the resolution bandwidth RES BW the video bandwidth VIDEO BW and the sweep time SWEEP TIME are also set to new values because they are defined as coupled functions in the standard PRESET settings 6 Measure the level and frequency using the marker and read off the results from the screen gt Press the MKR key The marker is switched on and automatically jumps to the trace peak Note When a marker is switched on for the first time it automatically performs the PEAK SEARCH function as in this example If a marker is already active the PEAK softkey in the MKR gt menu must be pressed in order to set the currently active marker onto the displayed signal maximum The
439. t in loudspeaker 1093 4820 12 2 38 E 2 FSP Measurements on Modulated Signals Measurement Example 2 Measuring the modulation depth of an AM carrier in the frequency domain Test setup Settings on the signal generator e g R amp S SMIQ Frequency 100 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation 50 1 kHz AF Measurement with the FSP 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to its default state gt Press the PRESET key The FSP is in its default state 2 Set the center frequency to 100 MHz and the span to 0 kHz gt Press the FREQ key and enter 100 MHz gt Press the SPAN key and enter 5 kHz 3 Activate the marker function for AM depth measurement Press the MEAS key Press the MODULATION DEPTH softkey The FSP automatically positions a marker on the carrier signal in the middle of the graph and one delta marker on each of the lower and upper AM sidebands The FSP calculates the AM modulation depth from the ratios of the delta marker levels to the main marker level and outputs the numerical value in the marker info field Center 100 MHz seem Fig 2 31 Measurement of AM modulation depth The modulation depth is indicated by MDEPTH The frequency of the AF signal is indicated by the delta markers 1093 4820 12 2 39 E 2 Measurements on Modulated Signals FSP Measurements on FM Signals Since spectrum analyzers only display the magnitude of signals by means of the envelope detector the modulation of FM s
440. t menu The Windows NT start menu is called using the key combination CTRL ESC It is possible to access the required submenus from the start menu by means of the mouse or the cursor keys In order to return to the measurement screen the button R amp S Analyzer Interface in the Windows NT task bar can be used 1093 4820 12 1 19 E 3 Connecting an External Keyboard FSP Connecting an External Keyboard Caution The keyboard may only be connected when the instrument is switched off STANDBY Otherwise correct operation of the keyboard cannot be guaranteed The FSP offers a 6 contact PS 2 connector KEYBOARD on the instrument s front panel for the connection of an external PC It is recommended to use the PSP Z2 keyboard Order No 1091 4100 02 English This keyboard is equipped with a trackball for mouse control KEYBOARD During measurement operations the keyboard simplifies the input of commentary text file names etc The section Instrument Interfaces in Chapter 8 contains the interface description of the connector After connection of the keyboard and subsequent power on the keyboard will be automatically recognized The default language used is US keyboard Special settings such as repetition rate etc can be performed in the Windows NT menu START SETTINGS CONTROL PANEL KEYBOARD 1093 4820 12 1 20 E 3 FSP Connecting a Mouse Connecting a Mouse Caution The mouse may only be connected when the instrument
441. ta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibloc short ud short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Example RSDLLibloc ud ibsta iberr 1 After switchover to LOCAL state the instrument can be manually operated via the front panel On the next access to the instrument by means of one of the functions of the library the instrument is switched again to the REMOTE state RSDLLibeot This function enables or disables the END message after write operations VB format Function RSDLLibeot ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibontl C format Unix short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibontl Parameter ud Device handle 0 no END message 1 send END message Example RSDLLibeot ud 1 ibsta iberr 1 If the END message is disabled the data of a command can be sent with several successive calls of write functions The END message must be enabled again before sending the last data block RSDLLibrsp This function performs a serial poll and provides the status byte of the device VB format Function RSDLLibrsp ByVal ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format void WINAPI RSDLLibrsp short ud char far spr short far ibsta
442. ter driver the assignment to the interface and the setting of most of the printer specific parameters e g paper size is performed under Windows NT in the START SETTINGS PRINTER menu 5 Configuration of the connected output device The configuration of the connected output device and the assignment to the interface takes place in the HCOPY DEVICE1 2 menu see in Chapter 4 the section Measurement Documentation The instrument supports the configuration of up to two output devices DEVICE1 and DEVICE2 one of which must be activated for printing The parameter DEVICE determines which output device is to be used The parameter PRINT TO FILE determines if the output is in the form of a file The parameter ORIENTATION sets the page format to horizontal or vertical portrait Selecting the type of printer automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION to values which correspond to a standard operating mode with this output device Other printer dependent parameters such as FORMFEED PAPEHFEED etc can be modified under Windows NT in the printer properties window START SETTINGS PRINTER SETTINGSJ Table 1 1 shows the standard factory settings for the two output devices The factory settings for DEVICE 1 correspond to output format WMF Windows Metafile printing is performed in a file WMF is a common format which is used for the import of hardcopies e g measurement windows in other Windows applicatio
443. tering the character The comment is printed below the corresponding diagram The comment text appears on the print out but does not appear on the display screen If a comment is not to appear on the printout it has to be deleted By pressing PRESET all comments will be deleted IEC IEEE bus command HCOP ITEM WIND2 TEXT Comment A certain number of printer drivers is already installed on the FSP The INSTALL PRINTER softkey opens the Printers window where further printer drivers can be installed see section Installation of a Local Printer and Installation of Network Printer IEC IEC bus command 4 177 E 3 Measurement Documentation Selection of Printer Colors 1093 4820 12 FSP The COLORS softkey gives access to the submenu where the colors for the printout can be selected To facilitate color selection the color combination selected is displayed when the menu is entered The previous colors are restored when the menu is exited IEC IEEE bus command 112 The COLOR ON OFF softkey switches over from color output to black and white output All color highlighted areas are printed in white and all color lines in black This improves the contrast on the printout The default setting is COLOR ON IEC IEEE bus command HCOP DEV COL ON The SCREEN COLORS softkey selects the current screen colors for the printout Note The background is always printed in white and the grid in black I
444. ternal calibration source 128 MHz and activates the data entry of the output level of the calibration source Possible values 0 dB and 30 IEC IEEE bus command DIAG SERV INP CAL DIAG SERV INP CSO 0 DBM The ENTER PASSWORD softkey allows the entry of a password The FSP contains a variety of service functions which if incorrectly used can affect correct operation of the analyzer These functions are normally not accessible and are only usable after the entry of a password see instrument service manual IEC IEEE bus command SYST PASS Password SETUP SERVICE NEXT submenu The CAL GEN 128 MHZ softkey selects a sinusoidal signal at 128 MHz as output signal for the internal calibration source The internal pulse generator will be switched off Note The softkey is only available if the optional Broadband Calibration Source FSP B15 is fitted IEC IEEE bus command DIAG SERV INP PULS OFF The CAL GEN COMB softkey switches the internal pulse generator on and allows the pulse frequency to be entered The selectable pulse frequencies are 10 kHz and 62 5 kHz Note The softkey is only available if the optional Broadband Calibration Source FSP B15 is fitted IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 160 E 3 FSP Selftest SETUP SERVICE submenu 1093 4820 12 Configuration Setup The SELFTEST softkey initiates the selftest of the instrument modules With this function the instrument is c
445. test line 17 according to CCIR 473 4 for example the line value has to be set to 17 This is the default setting after switching on the TV trigger IEC IEEE bus command TRIG VID LINE NUM 17 1093 4820 12 4 39 E 3 Triggering the Sweep Analyzer FSP VIDEO POL The VIDEO POL POS NEG softkey selects the polarity POS of the video signal Positive video polarity is to be selected e g for standard L signals negative video polarity for signals according to the standards colour standard PAL or NTSC Default setting is VIDEO POL NEG IEC IEEE bus command TRIG VID SSIG POL NEG LINES The LINES 625 525 softkey selects the line system 625 525 currently in use y Default setting is 625 LINES IEC IEEE bus command TRIG VID FORM LPFR 625 The CCVS INT EXT softkey selects the input channel INT for the TV trigger input signal An external CCVS signal can be supplied via the corresponding connector at the rear panel of the instrument IEC IEEE bus command SENS TV CCVS INT 1093 4820 12 4 40 E 3 FSP Analyzer Traces Selection and Setting of Traces TRACE Key The FSP is capable of displaying up to three different traces at a time in a diagram A trace consists of a maximum of 501 pixels on the horizontal axis frequency or time If more measured values than pixels are available several measured values are combined in one pixel The traces are selected using the SELECT TRACE
446. text Select parameter The data entry is active automatically upon calling the data entry window The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the previous entry Press the required character on the keyboard The character is inserted prior to the cursor Enter further characters Correcting the entry Delete the entry using the DELETE key or BACKSPACE key Terminating the entry Press the ENTER key of the external keyboard The data entry window is closed and the new value is accepted for the instrument Aborting the entry Press the ESC key on the front panel Or any softkey The data entry window is closed the original value is retained 1093 4820 12 3 19 E 2 Setting Parameters FSP Editing with Help Line Editor If the external keyboard is not fitted the help line editor is called automatically with entry of alphanumeric parameters The help line editor is an extension of the alphanumeric entry window It contains the complete alphabet with uppercase and lowercase letters as well as special characters in two lines of 52 characters each Individual letters and a series of special characters can be selected in the help line editor and copied into the entry line input line message line FIBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZAOU 5 _ abcdefghi jklmnopqrstuvwxyz f lt gt 2 3 0123456789 The cursor keys toggle between entry in the editing line and sel
447. the Sweep The configuration menu for TV trigger settings can be reached with key sequence TRIG NEXT TV TRIG SETTINGS The TV TRIG SETTINGS softkey switches the TV trigger on and opens a submenu for configuration of the TV signal parameters Note Triggering on TV signals is only possible in time domain span 0 Hz Therefore the softkey TV TRIG SETTINGS is without function in frequency domain IEC IEEE bus command TRIG SOUR TV TV TRIGGER The TV TRIGGER ON OFF softkey switches the TV o Trigger on or off When switching off the TV trigger the selected trigger source will be FREE RUN IEC IEEE bus command SENS TV ON OFF The VERT SYNC softkey configures the trigger for the vertical sync signal The FSP triggers on the frame repetition without distinction between the two fields IEC IEEE bus command TRIG VID FIEL SEL ALL The softkeys VERT SYNC ODD FIELD and VERT SYNC EVEN FIELD configure the trigger for the vertical sync signal of the first or second field IEC IEEE bus command TRIG VID FIEL SEL EVEN ODD The HOR SYNC softkey configures the trigger for the horizontal sync signal and opens the data entry field for selection of the corresponding line The trigger can be set on any line number which can be in the range of 1 to 525 or 1 to 625 depending on the line system The maximum possible line number will be selected if the active range is exceeded In order to trigger on
448. the function FreeLibrary When import libraries are used the DLL is automatically loaded immediately before the application is started At the end of the program the DLL is unloaded again unless it is still used by other applications Access to librsib so functions Unix platforms The functions of 1ibrsib so are declared in the header file RSIB H Upper lower case characters for file names are typically observed under Unix The library functions are linked to a C C program by entering the 1rsib linker option The shared library 1 is automatically loaded on starting the application The accessibility for example via standard path of the library must be ensured Refer to the beginning of this main chapter under Unix Environment Query of strings If instrument responses are to be further processed as strings a zero termination must be appended Example char buffer 100 RSDLLibrd ud buffer amp ibsta amp iberr amp ibcntl buffer ibcntl 0 1093 4820 12 4 255 E 3 RSIB Interface FSP Programming example In the following C program example a single sweep is started on the device with the IP address 89 10 38 97 and subsequently a marker is set to maximum level Prior to the search for maximum a synchronization to the end of the sweep is performed For this purpose the command Operation complete is used to create a service request at the end of the sweep for which the control prog
449. the influence of the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths The optimum mixer level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independent of bandwidth and is approx 40 dBm Distortion free Dynamic Range Dyn range dB 10 to 100 kHz carrier offset 40 50 60 10 70 80 100 90 100 110 120 60 50 40 30 20 10 Mixer level dBm Fig 2 18 Intermodulation free dynamic range of the FSP3 as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth useful signal offset 10 to 100 kHz DANL 155 dBm Hz TOI 12 dBm typ values at 2 GHz Hint If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be measured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small it is best to measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products separately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the FSP 1093 4820 12 2 22 E 2 FSP Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise The minimum signal level a spectrum analyzer can measure is limited by its intrin
450. thers Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services Harmonics are produced by nonlinear characteristics They can often be reduced by lowpass filters Since the spectrum analyzer has a nonlinear characteristic e g in its first mixer measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the analyzer do not cause spurious results If necessary the fundamental wave must be selectively attenuated with respect to the other harmonics with a highpass filter When harmonics are being measured the obtainable dynamic range depends on the 2 intercept of the spectrum analyzer The K2 intercept is the virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes equal to the level of the fundamental wave In practice however applying a level of this magnitude would damage the mixer Nevertheless the available dynamic range for measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the second harmonic intercept As shown in Fig 2 2 the level of the 2 harmonic is reduced by 20 dB if the level of the fundamental wave is reduced by 10 Level display dBm A 7 40 T Second intercept point 30 fs dBm 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 RF level T dBm Fig 2 2 Extrapolation of the 1 and 2 harmonics to the second harmonic intercept at 40 dBm The following fo
451. thout the superposition of frequency components generated during switching Similarly the spectrum can also be examined for an inactive carrier The sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger e 38 kHz UBI 388 kHz Ref dBm Att 20 dB gt 50 ns 1 Rix CLRHR Center 882 MHz 368 Span 3 6 MHz Fig 4 1 Pulsed signal GATE OFF e 38 kHz UBI 388 kHz Ref dBm sAtt 20 dB 50 ms 1 CLRHR Center 882 MHz 3680 kHz Span 3 6 MHz Fig 4 2 TDMA signal with GATE ON 1093 4820 12 4 33 E 3 Triggering the Sweep Analyzer FSP The gated sweep mode is activated by the GATED TRIGGER softkey The setting of the mode takes place in the GATE SETTINGS submenu 1093 4820 12 The GATED TRIGGER softkey switches the sweep mode with gate on and off When gate is switched on a gate signal applied to the rear panel connector EXT TRIGGER GATE or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the analyzer This selection is made via the EXTERN and IF POWER softkeys for trigger and gate The length of the gate signal defines when the sweep is to be interrupted Here a differentiation is made between edge triggered and level triggered modes in case of edge triggering the gate length can be set via the GATE LENGTH softkey while in case of level triggering the gate length depends on the length of the gate signal G
452. thus represents 1 501 of the sweep range and contains all single measurements frequency samples in this subrange in compressed form For each trace display mode an optimized detector is selected automatically Since peak detectors and sample detector are connected in parallel a single sweep is sufficient for collecting all detector values for 3 traces Peak detectors Peak detectors are implemented by digital comparators They MAX PEAK and MIN determine the largest of all positive max peak or the smallest of all negative min peak peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one of the 501 pixels This procedure is repeated for each pixel so that for wide frequency spans and despite the limited resolution of the display a large number of measurements can be taken into consideration for the display of the spectrum Autopeak detector The AUTOPEAK detector combines the two peak detectors The max peak detector and the min peak detector simultaneously determine the maximum and the minimum level within a displayed testpoint and display it as a single measured value The maximum and minimum levels within a frequency point are connected by a vertical line Sample detector The SAMPLE detector routes through the sampled data without any further evaluation and either displays them directly or for reasons of speed in case of short sweep times first writes them into a memory and processes them subs
453. time domain SPAN 0 Hz by summing up the power at the individual pixels and dividing the result by the number of pixels In this way it is possible to measure for example the power of TDMA signals during transmission or during the muting phase Both the mean power and the rms power can be measured by means of the individual power values The result is displayed in the marker info field The measured values are updated after each sweep or averaged over a user defined number of sweeps AVERAGE ON OFF and NUMBER OF SWEEPS in order to determine e g the mean power over several bursts For determination of the peak value HOLD ON the maximum value from several sweeps is displayed Example Marker info field for MEAN selected AVERAGE ON and MAX HOLD ON MEAN HOLD 2 33 dBm MEAN AV 2 39 dBm If both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed the measurement range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase with the aid of vertical lines The ratio between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by using a measurement as a reference value and after that varying the measurement range Upon switching on power measurement the sample detector is activated TRACE DETECTOR SAMPLE Submenu MEAS TIME DOM POWER pl POWER SET The TIME DOM POWER softkey activates the ON OFF REFERENCE power measurement in the time dom
454. time domain into the center of screen IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 CONT MODE ABS CALC LIM3 UPP MODE ABS CALC LIM3 LOW MODE ABS Unit Select the vertical scale units for the limit line The selection of units takes place in a selection box The default setting is dBm UNITS VERTICAL SCALE IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 UNIT DBM 4 125 E 3 Limit Lines 1093 4820 12 FSP Limit Select upper lower limit A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit IEC IEEE bus command defined by key words UPPer or LOWer Margin Setting a margin The margin is defined as the signal level distance to the limit line When the limit line is defined as an upper limit the margin means that the level is below the limit line When the limit line is defined as a lower limit the margin means that the level is above the limit line The default setting is O dB i e no margin IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM3 UPP MARG 10dB CALC LIM3 LOW MARG 10dB Threshold Selection of the threshold value with relative Y scaling With relative Y scaling an absolute threshold value can be defined which lowers the relative limit values The function is useful especially for mobile radio applications provided the limit values are defined in relation to the carrier power as long as they are above an absolute limit value Example RBW 300 Hz Marker 11 VBW 3 kHz 28 4 dB
455. to 0 dBm The tracking generator can be used in all operating modes Acquisition of test setup calibration values SOURCE CAL and normalization using these correction values NORMALIZE is only possible in the NETWORK operating mode Note The RF characteristics of some DUTs is especially sensitive concerning the input VSWR In such cases insertion of 20 dB attenuation between the DUT and the tracking generator output is highly recommended The tracking generator is activated by means of the NETWORK hotkey in the hotkey bar at the bottom of the screen SPECTRUM _HETHORK SCREEN B 1093 4820 12 4 187 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP Tracking Generator Settings The NETWORK hotkey opens a menu for selecting the functions of the tracking generator B OFF TRANS EXT AM SOURCE CAL REFL EXT FM POWER SHORT POWER CAL REFL 2 OFFSET OPE S pou NORMALIZE CAL amp FREQUENCY REF VALUE OFFSE POSITIO MODULATION REF VALUE a RECALL MODULATION OFF Note Additional softkeys are available in the displayed menus for controlling an external generator if option External Generator Control FSP B10 is fitted For detailed information see section External Generator Control Opt
456. to function module The results have the following meaning PASSED calibration successful without any restrictions CHECK deviation of correction value larger than expected correction could however be performed FAILED deviations of correction value too large no correction was possible The found correction data are not valid ABORTED calibration aborted CALIBRATION RESULTS IEC IEEE bus command CAL RES The softkeys PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN scroll one page forward or backward in the CALIBRATION RESULTS table They have no function when the table is closed IEC IEEE bus command 1093 4820 12 4 56 E 3 FSP MKR Analyzer Markers and Delta Markers MKR Key The markers are used for marking points on traces reading out measurement results and for quickly selecting a display section FSP provides four markers per display window All markers can be used either as markers or delta markers The availability of marker functions depends on whether the meas urement is performed in the frequency time or level domain The marker that can be moved by the user is defined in the following as the active marker Examples of marker display Marker Active marker Temporary marker Y Y A 2 Delta marker Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement results They disappear when the associated function is deactivated The measurement results of the active marker als
457. to the maximum value of the displayed spectrum SIGNAL COUNT The frequency counter is switched on FSP counts the frequency of the signal at the marker position with a reso lution of 1 kHz The counted frequency is indicated in the marker info field NEXT Changes to the submenu for setting the counter resolution CNT RESOL 10 The frequency counter resolution is increased to 10 Hz 4 60 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 REF FIXED REF FIXED OFF REF POINT LVL OFFSET REF POINT IME SEARCH MKR Analyzer The REFERENCE FIXED softkey defines the level and the fre quency or time of MARKER 1 as a reference for one or several delta markers The measured values for one or several markers displayed in the marker info field are derived from this reference point instead of the current values of the reference marker MARKER 1 On actuating the softkey reference fixed is switched on and thus the level value and the frequency time or x level value of MARKER 17 immediately become the reference point Additionally the REFERENCE FIXED softkey opens the sub menu where it is possible to determine manually a reference point with level and frequency time or x axis level to define a level offset or deactivate the reference point The REFERENCE FIXED function is useful for the measure ment of the harmonic suppression at small span fundamental
458. topped at the position of the reference marker The frequency of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center frequency The zoomed display range is then configured and the new settings are used by FSP for further measurements As long as switching to the new frequency display range has not yet taken place pressing the softkey will abort the procedure If MARKER 17 is not active when the softkey is pressed it is automatically activated and set to the highest peak in the window If an instrument setting is changed after selection of MARKER ZOOM the function is aborted The MARKER ZOOM softkey is only available in the frequency domain span gt 0 IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 FUNC ZOOM 1kHz The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers reference and delta markers It also switches off all functions and displays associated with the markers delta markers IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK AOFF 4 63 E 3 MKR FCTN Analyzer Marker Functions MKR Key The MKR FCTN menu offers further measurements with the markers Measurement of noise density NOISE MEAS softkey Measurement of phase noise PHASE NOISE softkey Measurement of filter or signal bandwidth DB DOWN softkey Activating of AF demodulation MARKER DEMOD softkey FSP On calling the menu the entry for the last active marker is activated SELECT MARKER softkey if no marker is activated marker 1 is activated and
459. tribution is measured the resolution bandwidth must be set in a way that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter without being distorted If the selected resolution bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated signal the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian distribution according to the central limit theorem and so corresponds to a white noise signal The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined A video bandwidth which is large in comparison to the resolution bandwidth 3 x RBW must be selected This ensures that the amplitude peaks of the signal are not smoothed by the lowpass effect of the video filter The video bandwidth is set automatically during statistics measurements Since the video bandwidth of the FSP is limited to 10 MHz lowpass filtering occurs during measurements with a resolution bandwidth of 10 MHz Additional band limiting occurs at a resolution bandwidth of 10 MHz due to the lowpass filtering at the output of the log amplifier The latter limits the video signal to a bandwidth of 8 MHz in order to obtain sufficient suppression of the 20 4 MHz IF The level range of the signal amplitudes e g during APD white noise measurements is smaller For broadband modulated signals such as W CDMA signals the effect depends on the bandwidth occ
460. ts of the limit check test LIMIT CHECK PASSED No violations of active limits LIMIT CHECK FAILED One or more active limit lines were violated The message contains the names of the limit lines which were violated or whose margins were not complied with LIMIT CHECK MARGIN The margin of at least one active limit lines was not complied with however no limit line was violated The message contains the names of the limit lines whose margins were not complied with The following example shows two active limit lines A check for violations of limit lines takes place only if the limit line of the assigned measurement curve trace is enabled If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines then the limit line check is not executed and the display window is activated IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM STAT ON INIT WAI CALC LIM FAIL Trace Select the measurement curve to which the limit line is assigned The selection of the measurement curve trace takes place in an entry window Allowed are the integer entries 1 2 or 3 The default setting is trace 1 If the selected limit line is not compatible with the assigned measurement curve then the limit line is disabled display and limit check IEC IEEE bus command CALC LIM TRAC 1 4 121 E 3 Limit Lines 14 lt i 2 1093 4820 12 FSP See following Section Entry and Editing of Limit Lines The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data file describing the
461. tween the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards 1595 B 1597 B and C and 1598 and C is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This definition is also used for the FSP when the following standard settings are selected CDMA 1S95 Class 0 FWD CDMA 1S95 Class 0 REV CDMA 1S95 Class 1 FWD CDMA 1595 Class 1 REV The selection of the standard influences the following parameters channel spacing channel bandwidth and type of filtering resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector of adjacent channels Trace mathematics and trace averaging are switched off The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an optimum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message The default setting is CP ACP STANDARD NONE IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES standard 4 91 E 3 MEAS Analyzer FSP NOISE ON 1093 4820 12 See following section Setting the Channel Configuration With channel power measurement activated the SET CP REFERENCE softkey defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value The reference v
462. u IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT1 FUNC PNO ON CALC DELT1 FUNC PNO RES The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for the input of a reference level other than the reference marker level The function is identical to that of the softkey with the same name in the marker menu MKR IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT1 FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dB The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates an entry box for the input of an additional level offset for the phase noise calculation This level offset is set to 0 dB on when the REFEHENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function is enabled IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y OFFS 10dB 4 68 E 3 FSP Analyzer MKR FCTN The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates an entry box for the manual input of a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE function IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT1 FUNC FIX RPO X 10 7MHz The PEAK SEARCH sets the reference point level for delta marker 2 in the selected measurement window to the peak of the selected trace IEC IEEE bus command CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Measurement example The phase noise of a CW signal at 100 MHz with 0 dBm level is to be measured at 800 kHz from the carrier PRESET CENTER 100 MHz SPAN 2 MHz AMPT 0 dBm MKR FCTN PHASE NOISE 800 kHz The FSP is set to the default setting The center frequency is set to 100 MHz The span is set to 2 MHz The reference lev
463. u is always effected via a softkey SOFTKEY The labeling of all softkeys which call a submenu includes a U arrow 1093 4820 12 3 10 E 2 FSP Setting Parameters Setting Parameters Parameters are set either by simple selection selection parameters or by alpha numeric entries in data entry windows or tables The numeric keypad on the front panel an external keyboard optional a roll key and the cursor keys are provided for the entry of instrument parameters in an entry window or in a table The external keyboard is optional If it is not fitted the help line editor is called automatically for entry of alphanumeric parameters The help line editor provides for selection of individual letters and a number of special characters which are copied into the actual entry window Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is provided for entry of numeric parameters It contains the following keys e Number keys 0 to 9 Decimal point Inserts a decimal point at the cursor position Sign key Changes the sign of the mantissa or exponent of a numeric parameter ig inserted at the cursor position in case of an alphanumeric parameter Unit keys GHz dBm MHz dBm kHz dB and Provide the numeric value entered with the selected unit and terminate the entry The unit keys are all assigned the value 1 for dimensionless quantities or for level entries e g in dB The unit keys thus assum
464. ubsets and the commentary for the currently selected data set In addition to the data sets stored by the user the data set FACTORY which specifies the settings of the instrument before it was last switched off Standby is always present If a data set other than FACTORY is chosen then at the time of instrument power on the available data subsets of the selected data set are recalled The data subsets which are not present in this data set are taken from the FACTORY data set Nole The specified data set is also loaded upon PRESET if STARTUP RECALL is active The preset settiongs can thus be arbitrarily modified IEC IEEE command MMEM LOAD AUTO 1 D user config test02 4 169 E 3 Recalling Data Sets FSP The FILE MANAGER softkey opens a menu for managing storage media and files FILE FILE MANAGER sub menu 1093 4820 12 DRIVE MANAGEMENT ms MAKE DIRECTORY FILE MANAGEMENT FORMAT DISK SETTING DRW 10 MAY 98 10 25 10 68 175 RENAME SORT MODE DELETE GS Gp Gp Gn Table Drive Management displays the name and label of the storage medium as well as the available storage area Table File Management displays the files of the current directory and indicates if any subdirectories are present If a directory name is selected the FSP automatically changes to this directory Selection of t
465. ulated as follows Tracking generator frequency receive frequency frequency offset IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ OFFS 50MHz 1093 4820 12 4 198 E 3 FSP Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 External Modulation of the Tracking Generator NETWORK menu MODUDETION The MODULATION softkey opens a submenu for m am selecting different modulation modes The time characteristics of the tracking generator output EXT FM signal can be influenced by means of external signals input voltage range 1 V to 1 V EXT Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as signal inputs Their function changes depending on the selected modulation TG IN1 AM and TG IN Q FM MODULATION OFF T The modulation modes can be combined with each other and with the frequency offset function up to a certain degree The following table shows which modulation modes are possible at the same time and which ones can be combined with the frequency offset function Table 4 4 Simultaneous modes of modulation tracking generator Modulation Frequency EXT AM EXT FM EXT offset Frequency offset EXT I Q can be combined 1093 4820 12 4 199 E 3 Tracking Generator Option FSP B9 FSP 1093 4820 12 The EXT AM softkey activates an AM modulation of the tracking generator output signal The modulation signal is applied to th
466. unt is 0 to 32767 For sweep count 0 or 1 one sweep is performed For trace averaging in the continuous sweep mode FSP performs running averaging over 10 sweeps if sweep count 0 if sweep count 1 no averaging is performed The sweep count is valid for all the traces in a diagram Note The number of sweeps set in the TRACE menu is the same as that in the SWEEP menu If SINGLE SWEEP is selected the measurement stops after the selected number of sweeps has been performed IEC IEEE bus command SWE COUN 64 4 29 E 3 Analyzer Sweep 1093 4820 12 FSP The SWEEP POINTS softkey selects the number of measurement samples acquired during a sweep The following numbers of points per sweep are available 125 251 501 default 1001 2001 4001 8001 Note The autopeak detector will be disabled while the number of points per sweep is z 501 IEC IEEE bus command SWE POIN 501 The SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkey deactivates the display while a single sweep is being performed Once the sweep has been completed the trace is shown IEC IEEE bus command INIT DISP OFF INIT 4 30 E 3 FSP Analyzer Triggering the Sweep Triggering the Sweep TRIG Key The TRIG key opens a menu for selection of the various trigger sources trigger polarity and external gate function The active trigger mode is indicated by highlighting the corresponding softkey For video trigger a trigger threshold can be entered which is represente
467. upied by the signal At a signal bandwidth of 4 MHz the amplitude distribution can be measured correctly with the effective video bandwidth 5 Selecting the number of samples For statistics measurements with the FSP the number of samples Nsampies is entered for statistical evaluation instead of the sweep time Since only statistically independent samples contribute to statistics the measurement or sweep time is calculated automatically It is indicated on the FSP display The samples are statistically independent if the time difference is at least 1 RBW The sweep time SWT is therefore expressed as follows SWT Nsamples RBW 1093 4820 12 2 60 E 2 FSP Time Domain Measurements Time Domain Measurements With TDMA radiocommunication systems e g GSM or 15136 the transmission quality is determined not only by the spectral characteristics but also by the time domain characteristics Since several users share the same frequency a time slot is assigned to the each user Unimpaired operation can only be ensured if each user adheres to his assigned time slot In this case both the power during the transmit phase and the time characteristics such as duration of the TDMA burst as well as rise and fall time of the burst are relevant Power measurements The FSP has easy to operate functions for measuring power during a given time interval Measurement Example Measuring the power of a GSM burst during the switch on phase Test setu
468. uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples linear average value For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the average value For linear display the average value is displayed Each pixel thus corresponds to the average of the measured values summed up in the pixel The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal The quasipeak detector similates the behaviour of an analog voltmeter by evaluating the measured values in a pixel The quasipeak detector is especially designed for the requirements of EMC measurements and is used for evaluating pulse shaped spurious Note During a frequency sweep FSP increments the 1st local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This is to ensure that the signal level is correctly measured For narrow bandwidths and wide frequency spans a very large number of measured values is thus obtained The number of frequency steps however always is a multiple of 501 number of pixels that can be displayed With the sample detector selected only every n value is displayed The value of n depends on the number of measured values ie on the frequency span the resolution bandwidth and the measurement rate 1093 4820 12 4 50 E 3 FSP TRACE DETECTOR submenu
469. ust be fully folded in or out Only in this way can the stability of the instrument be guaranteed and reliable operation be ensured With the feet out the total load for the feet must not exceed 500 N own weight and additional units put onto the instrument These units must be secured against slipping e g by locking the feet of the unit at the top side of the enclosure When shifting the instrument with the feet out the feet might collapse and fold in To avoid injuries the instrument must therefore not be shifted with the feet out q a The instrument be operated in any position Rackmounting Important Note For rack installation ensure that the air flow at the side panel perforations and the air exhaust at the rear panel are not obstructed The instrument may be mounted in a 19 rack by using a rack adapter kit Order No see data sheet The installation instructions are included in the adapter kit 1093 4820 12 1 15 E 3 Getting Started with the Instrument FSP EMI Protection Measures In order to avoid electromagnetic interference EMI the instrument may be operated only when all covers are correctly in place Only adequately shielded signal and control cables may be used see recommended accessories Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply The FSP is equipped with an AC voltage selection feature and will
470. ution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted The coupling of the video bandwidth is always recommended when the minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth Narrower video bandwidths require longer sweep times due to the longer settling time Wider bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO submenu The coupling of the video bandwidth to the resolution filter is also permitted for the time domain display span 0 IEC IEEE bus command BAND VID AUTO ON 4 21 E 3 Analyzer Bandwidths and Sweep Time FSP 1093 4820 12 The SWEEPTIME AUTO softkey couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW The sweep time is automatically adjusted on any change in span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth The softkey is only available in the frequency domain span gt 0 Hz It is blanked in the time domain The FSP always selects the shortest sweep time possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error compared to using a longer sweep time is lt 0 1 dB If additional bandwidth and level errors are to be avoided the sweep time is to be set to three times the time offered in coupled mode IEC IEEE bus command SWE TIME AUTO ON gt ie if RBW VBW PULSE 1 RBW VBW NOISE 10 RBW VBW MANUAL SPAN RBW
471. vailable to the other section INSTRUMENT The interface is assigned to the measuring instrument section Outputs to the interface from the computer section are not possible will get lost OS The interface is assigned to the computer section lt cannot be used by the measuring instrument section This means that remote control of the instrument via the interface is not possible INSTRUMENT os IEC IEEE bus command 4 149 E 3 Configuration Setup FSP Setting Date and Time SETUP GENERAL SETUP submenu 1093 4820 12 The TIME DATE softkey activates the entry of time and date for the internal realtime clock TIME AND DATE Time 21 59 Date 01 Oct 1997 Time Input of time In the corresponding dialog box the time is partitioned into two input fields so that hours and minutes can be entered independently TIME 21 59 IEC IEEE bus command SYST TIME 21 59 Date Input of Date In the corresponding dialog box the date is partitioned into 3 input fields so that day month and year can be input separately DATE 01 1999 For the selection of the month pressing a unit key opens list of abbreviations wherein the desired month can be selected MONTH JAN FEB IEC IEEE bus command SYST DATE 1999 10 01 4 150 E 3 FSP Configuration Setup Configuration of Network Settings with Option FSP B16 only The instrume
472. vates the numerical selection of the marker the data entry field Delta marker 1 is selected by input of O IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK1 CALC MARK1 X value CALC MARK1 Y 1093 4820 12 4 74 E 3 FSP 1093 4820 12 Analyzer MKR gt The PEAK softkey sets the active marker or delta marker to the peak of the trace If no marker is active when MKR gt menu is called MARKER 17 is automati cally switched on and the peak search is performed IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK MAX CALC DELT MAX The CENTER MKR FREQ softkey sets the center frequency to the current marker or delta marker frequency A signal can thus be set to the center of the frequency display range for ex ample so that it can then be examined in detail with a smaller span The softkey is not available in the time domain zero span IEC IEEE bus command CALC MARK FUNC CENT Example A spectrum is displayed with a large span after PRESET A signal off the center is to be examined in detail PRESET FSP is set to the default setting MKR gt MARKER 1 is switched on and automatically jumps to the largest signal of the trace CENTER MKR FREQ The center frequency is set to the marker frequency The span is adapted in such a way that the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency is not exceeded SPAN The span can for example be reduced using the rollkey The REF LEVEL MKR LVL s
473. vice1 or Device2 is made Print to File selects printout to file or printer Orientation selects the print format of the output page 4 175 E 3 Measurement Documentation Device 1 Device 2 FSP The selection of the output device language for Device 1 and Device 2 is made in this line After pressing the ENTER key the list of all installed printers is displayed Three file formats and the Windows NT clipboard are also available CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE or BITMAP FILE ENHANCED METAFILE output in Windows NT clipboard output in file output in file or Windows NT clipboard Devicel WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File Orientation s Device2 Print to File Orientation V CLIPBOARD CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE ENHANCED METAFILE BITMAP FILE HP DeskJet 660C The installation of additional printers is described in chapter 1 section Installation and Configuration of Printers Notes Selecting the type of printer automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION to values which correspond to a standard mode with this output device Other printer dependent parameters such as PAPERSIZE can be modified under Windows NT in the printer properties window START SET TINGS PRINTER SETTINGS For operation of Windows NT mouse and external keyboard have to be connected to instrument see also Section Installation and Configuratio
474. whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer share name A query is displayed for providing the printer in the network This query is irrelevant when installing a local printer The default selection is Not shared Shared Not shar ree Share Name Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer Click Next The window for starting a test page print is displayed The test page is helpful for checking if the installation was successful s NT 4 0 MIPS sNT 4 0 Alpha Add Printer Wizard gt Click Yes recommended After your printer is installed you can print a test page so ick Finish you can confirm that the printer is set up properly gt Click Finish Would you like to print a test page A test page is printed if the installation was successful If the test page is not printed or not printed completely the Windows NT online help offers troubleshooting instructions under the topic Printer Troubleshooting Note If a prompt for the printer driver path appears after pressing Finish the Service Pack must be re installed after this printer installation see Chapter 1 section Installing Windows NT Software lt Back Carcel Now the instrument needs to be configured for creating hardcopies of the measurement screen using this printer Configuring HP DeskJ
475. witches between the IBW method FAST ACP OFF and the time domain method FAST ACP ON With FAST ACP ON the power measurement is performed in the different channels in time domain The FSP sets the center frequency consecutively to the different channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measurement time sweep time number of channels The RBW filter suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used e g root raised cos with IS 136 The list of available channel filters is included in section Setting of Bandwidths and Sweep Time BW key The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results Therefore this requires no software correction factors The measured values are displayed in a table the power in the useful channel being displayed in dBm and the power in the adjacent channels in dBm CP ACP ABS or dB CP ACP REL The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Reproducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 5 dB 99 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated when their time interval corresponds to the reciprocal of the measu
476. xer level and input attenuation are coupled with one another For the level measurement the same reference level and input attenuation must be set for the two diagrams IEC IEEE bus command INST COUP RLEV The CENTER B MARKER A and CENTER A MARKER B softkeys couple the center frequency in diagram B with the frequency of marker 1 in diagram A and the center frequency in diagram B with the frequency of marker 1 in diagram B The two softkeys are mutually exclusive This coupling is useful eg for viewing the signal at the marker position in diagram A with higher frequency resolution or in the time domain in diagram B If marker 1 is off it is switched on and set to the maximum of the trace in the active diagram IEC IEEE bus command INST COUP CF_B INST COUP CF_A SCREEN SELECT The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey opens a submenu TITLE OBJECT allowing additional display items to be added to the screen In addition the display power save mode ON m BRIGHTNESS DISPLAY PWR SAVE and the colors of the display elements can be set here LOGO TINT OFF NNOTATION SATURATION OFF DATA ENTRY OPAQUE Di COLORS 1 COLORS EFAULT PREDEFINED DEFAULT COLORS 2 DI PWR SAVE SPLAY Oo Gag 4 133 E 3 Display 1093 4820 12 TIME DATE OFF LOGO OFF 4 OTAT ION
477. ystem there will be a prompt for whether Printer name the new printer should be used as the HP DeskJet standard printer for Windows NT applications Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as default printer The preselection is No lt Back Cancel Add Printer Wizard gt Click on Next Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other j j network users If you choose sharing give this printer a A p rom pt will querying the share name availability of the printer in a network This query is irrelevant for the installation of a Share Names local printer The answer Not shared is preselected Select the operating systems of all computers that will be printing to this printer DARE Click on Next s NT 4 0 Alpha sNT4 0PPC The window for printing a test page nm eae appears This allows testing whether the installation was successful Add Printer Wizard gt Click on Yes recommended gt Click on Finish If the installation was successful a test page will be printed If the test page is not printed or printed incorrectly the Windows NT online help will supply additional support in chapter Printer Trouble Shooting After your printer is installed you can print test page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page Note If you are prompted to
478. yzer Traces 1093 4820 12 The DETECTOR AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector In contrast to the rms detector the average detector supplies the linear average of all sampled level values during the sweep of a pixel The same relations as for the rms detector apply see above IEC IEEE bus command DET AVER The DETECTOH QPK softkey activates the quasipeak detector This detector evaluates the sampled level values during the sweep of a pixel like an analog voltmeter On switching the quasipeak detector on the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 MHz so as to exclude the influence of the video filter on the signal evaluation IEC IEEE bus command DET QPE 4 53 E 3 Traces Analyzer FSP Mathematical Functions for Traces TRACE 1 TRACE MATH submenu TA 1093 4820 12 TRACE MATH T1 T2 gt T1 TLi I3 TI TRACE POSITION TRACE MATH OFF TRACE MATH 1 2 gt 1 The TRACE MATH softkey opens a submenu in which the difference between the selected trace to trace 1 is calculated The softkey is highlighted if a math function is activated The 77 2 and T1 T3 softkeys subtract the corresponding traces The result displayed is referred to the zero point defined by TRACE POSITION To indicate that the trace has been obtained by subtraction the difference 1 2 or 1 3 is indicated on

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Here heretic hereditary heredity hereditary meaning here movie hereinafter heretic definition heresy definition hereby here comes the sun here\u0027s johnny hereditary hemochromatosis heretic perfume here comes the guide hereditary angioedema hereafter here i am to worship lyrics heretic movie hereditary spherocytosis hereditary movie hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia here to slay heredia costa rica hereditariedade here comes the bus

Related Contents

Samsung WF9904CWE/XSP User Manual  Gardena Water Computer C 1060 solar plus  Lenovo ThinkPad 11e  03 –Tourisme - FAE-CFM    取扱説明書 - M  1756-RM100 - Rockwell Automation  資料 - 国土交通省  Samsung GT-B7330 دليل المستخدم  Barco PFWX-51B  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file